diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/coril10.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/coril10.txt | 10722 |
1 files changed, 10722 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/coril10.txt b/old/coril10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b1e3f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/coril10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10722 @@ + +Project Gutenberg's Etext of The Coral Island, R. M. Ballantyne + + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check +the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!! + +Please take a look at the important information in this header. +We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, keeping an +electronic path open for the next readers. Do not remove this. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations* + +Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and +further information is included below. We need your donations. + + +The Coral Island +A Tale of the Pacific Ocean + +R. M. Ballantyne + +September, 1996 [Etext #646] + + +Project Gutenberg's Etext of The Coral Island, R. M. Ballantyne +*****This file should be named coril10.txt or coril10.zip****** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, coril11.txt. +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, coril10a.txt. + + +We are now trying to release all our books one month in advance +of the official release dates, for time for better editing. + +Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an +up to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes +in the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has +a bug in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a +look at the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a +new copy has at least one byte more or less. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +fifty hours is one conservative estimate for how long it we take +to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-two text +files per month: or 400 more Etexts in 1996 for a total of 800. +If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the +total should reach 80 billion Etexts. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext +Files by the December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000=Trillion] +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only 10% of the present number of computer users. 2001 +should have at least twice as many computer users as that, so it +will require us reaching less than 5% of the users in 2001. + + +We need your donations more than ever! + + +All donations should be made to "Project Gutenberg/BU": and are +tax deductible to the extent allowable by law. (BU = Benedictine +University). (Subscriptions to our paper newsletter go to BU.) + +For these and other matters, please mail to: + +Project Gutenberg +P. O. Box 2782 +Champaign, IL 61825 + +When all other email fails try our Executive Director: +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +We would prefer to send you this information by email +(Internet, Bitnet, Compuserve, ATTMAIL or MCImail). + +****** +If you have an FTP program (or emulator), please +FTP directly to the Project Gutenberg archives: +[Mac users, do NOT point and click. . .type] + +ftp uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu +login: anonymous +password: your@login +cd etext/etext90 through /etext96 +or cd etext/articles [get suggest gut for more information] +dir [to see files] +get or mget [to get files. . .set bin for zip files] +GET INDEX?00.GUT +for a list of books +and +GET NEW GUT for general information +and +MGET GUT* for newsletters. + +**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor** +(Three Pages) + + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you can distribute copies of this etext if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG- +tm etexts, is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor +Michael S. Hart through the Project Gutenberg Association at +Benedictine University (the "Project"). Among other +things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext +under the Project's "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] the Project (and any other party you may receive this +etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold the Project, its directors, +officers, members and agents harmless from all liability, cost +and expense, including legal fees, that arise directly or +indirectly from any of the following that you do or cause: +[1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, modification, +or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word pro- + cessing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the etext (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the + net profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Association / Benedictine + University" within the 60 days following each + date you prepare (or were legally required to prepare) + your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time, +scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty +free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution +you can think of. Money should be paid to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Benedictine University". + +*END*THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93*END* + + + + + +The Coral Island: A Tale of the Pacific Ocean by R. M. Ballantyne. +Scanned and proofed by David Price +email ccx074@coventry.ac.uk + + + + + +The Coral Island: A Tale of the Pacific Ocean + + + + +Preface + + +I was a boy when I went through the wonderful adventures herein set +down. With the memory of my boyish feelings strong upon me, I +present my book specially to boys, in the earnest hope that they +may derive valuable information, much pleasure, great profit, and +unbounded amusement from its pages. + +One word more. If there is any boy or man who loves to be +melancholy and morose, and who cannot enter with kindly sympathy +into the regions of fun, let me seriously advise him to shut my +book and put it away. It is not meant for him. + +RALPH ROVER + + + +CHAPTER I. + + + +The beginning - My early life and character - I thirst for +adventure in foreign lands and go to sea. + + +ROVING has always been, and still is, my ruling passion, the joy of +my heart, the very sunshine of my existence. In childhood, in +boyhood, and in man's estate, I have been a rover; not a mere +rambler among the woody glens and upon the hill-tops of my own +native land, but an enthusiastic rover throughout the length and +breadth of the wide wide world. + +It was a wild, black night of howling storm, the night in which I +was born on the foaming bosom of the broad Atlantic Ocean. My +father was a sea-captain; my grandfather was a sea-captain; my +great-grandfather had been a marine. Nobody could tell positively +what occupation HIS father had followed; but my dear mother used to +assert that he had been a midshipman, whose grandfather, on the +mother's side, had been an admiral in the royal navy. At anyrate +we knew that, as far back as our family could be traced, it had +been intimately connected with the great watery waste. Indeed this +was the case on both sides of the house; for my mother always went +to sea with my father on his long voyages, and so spent the greater +part of her life upon the water. + +Thus it was, I suppose, that I came to inherit a roving +disposition. Soon after I was born, my father, being old, retired +from a seafaring life, purchased a small cottage in a fishing +village on the west coast of England, and settled down to spend the +evening of his life on the shores of that sea which had for so many +years been his home. It was not long after this that I began to +show the roving spirit that dwelt within me. For some time past my +infant legs had been gaining strength, so that I came to be +dissatisfied with rubbing the skin off my chubby knees by walking +on them, and made many attempts to stand up and walk like a man; +all of which attempts, however, resulted in my sitting down +violently and in sudden surprise. One day I took advantage of my +dear mother's absence to make another effort; and, to my joy, I +actually succeeded in reaching the doorstep, over which I tumbled +into a pool of muddy water that lay before my father's cottage +door. Ah, how vividly I remember the horror of my poor mother when +she found me sweltering in the mud amongst a group of cackling +ducks, and the tenderness with which she stripped off my dripping +clothes and washed my dirty little body! From this time forth my +rambles became more frequent, and, as I grew older, more distant, +until at last I had wandered far and near on the shore and in the +woods around our humble dwelling, and did not rest content until my +father bound me apprentice to a coasting vessel, and let me go to +sea. + +For some years I was happy in visiting the sea-ports, and in +coasting along the shores of my native land. My Christian name was +Ralph, and my comrades added to this the name of Rover, in +consequence of the passion which I always evinced for travelling. +Rover was not my real name, but as I never received any other I +came at last to answer to it as naturally as to my proper name; +and, as it is not a bad one, I see no good reason why I should not +introduce myself to the reader as Ralph Rover. My shipmates were +kind, good-natured fellows, and they and I got on very well +together. They did, indeed, very frequently make game of and +banter me, but not unkindly; and I overheard them sometimes saying +that Ralph Rover was a "queer, old-fashioned fellow." This, I must +confess, surprised me much, and I pondered the saying long, but +could come at no satisfactory conclusion as to that wherein my old- +fashionedness lay. It is true I was a quiet lad, and seldom spoke +except when spoken to. Moreover, I never could understand the +jokes of my companions even when they were explained to me: which +dulness in apprehension occasioned me much grief; however, I tried +to make up for it by smiling and looking pleased when I observed +that they were laughing at some witticism which I had failed to +detect. I was also very fond of inquiring into the nature of +things and their causes, and often fell into fits of abstraction +while thus engaged in my mind. But in all this I saw nothing that +did not seem to be exceedingly natural, and could by no means +understand why my comrades should call me "an old-fashioned +fellow." + +Now, while engaged in the coasting trade, I fell in with many +seamen who had travelled to almost every quarter of the globe; and +I freely confess that my heart glowed ardently within me as they +recounted their wild adventures in foreign lands, - the dreadful +storms they had weathered, the appalling dangers they had escaped, +the wonderful creatures they had seen both on the land and in the +sea, and the interesting lands and strange people they had visited. +But of all the places of which they told me, none captivated and +charmed my imagination so much as the Coral Islands of the Southern +Seas. They told me of thousands of beautiful fertile islands that +had been formed by a small creature called the coral insect, where +summer reigned nearly all the year round, - where the trees were +laden with a constant harvest of luxuriant fruit, - where the +climate was almost perpetually delightful, - yet where, strange to +say, men were wild, bloodthirsty savages, excepting in those +favoured isles to which the gospel of our Saviour had been +conveyed. These exciting accounts had so great an effect upon my +mind, that, when I reached the age of fifteen, I resolved to make a +voyage to the South Seas. + +I had no little difficulty at first in prevailing on my dear +parents to let me go; but when I urged on my father that he would +never have become a great captain had he remained in the coasting +trade, he saw the truth of what I said, and gave his consent. My +dear mother, seeing that my father had made up his mind, no longer +offered opposition to my wishes. "But oh, Ralph," she said, on the +day I bade her adieu, "come back soon to us, my dear boy, for we +are getting old now, Ralph, and may not have many years to live." + +I will not take up my reader's time with a minute account of all +that occurred before I took my final leave of my dear parents. +Suffice it to say, that my father placed me under the charge of an +old mess-mate of his own, a merchant captain, who was on the point +of sailing to the South Seas in his own ship, the Arrow. My mother +gave me her blessing and a small Bible; and her last request was, +that I would never forget to read a chapter every day, and say my +prayers; which I promised, with tears in my eyes, that I would +certainly do. + +Soon afterwards I went on board the Arrow, which was a fine large +ship, and set sail for the islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + +CHAPTER II. + + + +The departure - The sea - My companions - Some account of the +wonderful sights we saw on the great deep - A dreadful storm and a +frightful wreck. + + +IT was a bright, beautiful, warm day when our ship spread her +canvass to the breeze, and sailed for the regions of the south. +Oh, how my heart bounded with delight as I listened to the merry +chorus of the sailors, while they hauled at the ropes and got in +the anchor! The captain shouted - the men ran to obey - the noble +ship bent over to the breeze, and the shore gradually faded from my +view, while I stood looking on with a kind of feeling that the +whole was a delightful dream. + +The first thing that struck me as being different from anything I +had yet seen during my short career on the sea, was the hoisting of +the anchor on deck, and lashing it firmly down with ropes, as if we +had now bid adieu to the land for ever, and would require its +services no more. + +"There, lass," cried a broad-shouldered jack-tar, giving the fluke +of the anchor a hearty slap with his hand after the housing was +completed - "there, lass, take a good nap now, for we shan't ask +you to kiss the mud again for many a long day to come!" + +And so it was. That anchor did not "kiss the mud" for many long +days afterwards; and when at last it did, it was for the last time! + +There were a number of boys in the ship, but two of them were my +special favourites. Jack Martin was a tall, strapping, broad- +shouldered youth of eighteen, with a handsome, good-humoured, firm +face. He had had a good education, was clever and hearty and lion- +like in his actions, but mild and quiet in disposition. Jack was a +general favourite, and had a peculiar fondness for me. My other +companion was Peterkin Gay. He was little, quick, funny, decidedly +mischievous, and about fourteen years old. But Peterkin's mischief +was almost always harmless, else he could not have been so much +beloved as he was. + +"Hallo! youngster," cried Jack Martin, giving me a slap on the +shoulder, the day I joined the ship, "come below and I'll show you +your berth. You and I are to be mess-mates, and I think we shall +be good friends, for I like the look o' you." + +Jack was right. He and I and Peterkin afterwards became the best +and stanchest friends that ever tossed together on the stormy +waves. + +I shall say little about the first part of our voyage. We had the +usual amount of rough weather and calm; also we saw many strange +fish rolling in the sea, and I was greatly delighted one day by +seeing a shoal of flying fish dart out of the water and skim +through the air about a foot above the surface. They were pursued +by dolphins, which feed on them, and one flying-fish in its terror +flew over the ship, struck on the rigging, and fell upon the deck. +Its wings were just fins elongated, and we found that they could +never fly far at a time, and never mounted into the air like birds, +but skimmed along the surface of the sea. Jack and I had it for +dinner, and found it remarkably good. + +When we approached Cape Horn, at the southern extremity of America, +the weather became very cold and stormy, and the sailors began to +tell stories about the furious gales and the dangers of that +terrible cape. + +"Cape Horn," said one, "is the most horrible headland I ever +doubled. I've sailed round it twice already, and both times the +ship was a'most blow'd out o' the water." + +"An' I've been round it once," said another, "an' that time the +sails were split, and the ropes frozen in the blocks, so that they +wouldn't work, and we wos all but lost." + +"An' I've been round it five times," cried a third, "an' every time +wos wuss than another, the gales wos so tree-mendous!" + +"And I've been round it no times at all," cried Peterkin, with an +impudent wink of his eye, "an' THAT time I wos blow'd inside out!" + +Nevertheless, we passed the dreaded cape without much rough +weather, and, in the course of a few weeks afterwards, were sailing +gently, before a warm tropical breeze, over the Pacific Ocean. +Thus we proceeded on our voyage, sometimes bounding merrily before +a fair breeze, at other times floating calmly on the glassy wave +and fishing for the curious inhabitants of the deep, - all of +which, although the sailors thought little of them, were strange, +and interesting, and very wonderful to me. + +At last we came among the Coral Islands of the Pacific, and I shall +never forget the delight with which I gazed, - when we chanced to +pass one, - at the pure, white, dazzling shores, and the verdant +palm-trees, which looked bright and beautiful in the sunshine. And +often did we three long to be landed on one, imagining that we +should certainly find perfect happiness there! Our wish was +granted sooner than we expected. + +One night, soon after we entered the tropics, an awful storm burst +upon our ship. The first squall of wind carried away two of our +masts; and left only the foremast standing. Even this, however, +was more than enough, for we did not dare to hoist a rag of sail on +it. For five days the tempest raged in all its fury. Everything +was swept off the decks except one small boat. The steersman was +lashed to the wheel, lest he should be washed away, and we all gave +ourselves up for lost. The captain said that he had no idea where +we were, as we had been blown far out of our course; and we feared +much that we might get among the dangerous coral reefs which are so +numerous in the Pacific. At day-break on the sixth morning of the +gale we saw land ahead. It was an island encircled by a reef of +coral on which the waves broke in fury. There was calm water +within this reef, but we could only see one narrow opening into it. +For this opening we steered, but, ere we reached it, a tremendous +wave broke on our stern, tore the rudder completely off, and left +us at the mercy of the winds and waves. + +"It's all over with us now, lads," said the captain to the men; +"get the boat ready to launch; we shall be on the rocks in less +than half an hour." + +The men obeyed in gloomy silence, for they felt that there was +little hope of so small a boat living in such a sea. + +"Come boys," said Jack Martin, in a grave tone, to me and Peterkin, +as we stood on the quarterdeck awaiting our fate; - "Come boys, we +three shall stick together. You see it is impossible that the +little boat can reach the shore, crowded with men. It will be sure +to upset, so I mean rather to trust myself to a large oar, I see +through the telescope that the ship will strike at the tail of the +reef, where the waves break into the quiet water inside; so, if we +manage to cling to the oar till it is driven over the breakers, we +may perhaps gain the shore. What say you; will you join me?" + +We gladly agreed to follow Jack, for he inspired us with +confidence, although I could perceive, by the sad tone of his +voice, that he had little hope; and, indeed, when I looked at the +white waves that lashed the reef and boiled against the rocks as if +in fury, I felt that there was but a step between us and death. My +heart sank within me; but at that moment my thoughts turned to my +beloved mother, and I remembered those words, which were among the +last that she said to me - "Ralph, my dearest child, always +remember in the hour of danger to look to your Lord and Saviour +Jesus Christ. He alone is both able and willing to save your body +and your soul." So I felt much comforted when I thought thereon. + +The ship was now very near the rocks. The men were ready with the +boat, and the captain beside them giving orders, when a tremendous +wave came towards us. We three ran towards the bow to lay hold of +our oar, and had barely reached it when the wave fell on the deck +with a crash like thunder. At the same moment the ship struck, the +foremast broke off close to the deck and went over the side, +carrying the boat and men along with it. Our oar got entangled +with the wreck, and Jack seized an axe to cut it free, but, owing +to the motion of the ship, he missed the cordage and struck the axe +deep into the oar. Another wave, however, washed it clear of the +wreck. We all seized hold of it, and the next instant we were +struggling in the wild sea. The last thing I saw was the boat +whirling in the surf, and all the sailors tossed into the foaming +waves. Then I became insensible. + +On recovering from my swoon, I found myself lying on a bank of soft +grass, under the shelter of an overhanging rock, with Peterkin on +his knees by my side, tenderly bathing my temples with water, and +endeavouring to stop the blood that flowed from a wound in my +forehead. + + + +CHAPTER III. + + + +The Coral Island - Our first cogitations after landing, and the +result of them - We conclude that the island is uninhabited. + + +THERE is a strange and peculiar sensation experienced in recovering +from a state of insensibility, which is almost indescribable; a +sort of dreamy, confused consciousness; a half-waking half-sleeping +condition, accompanied with a feeling of weariness, which, however, +is by no means disagreeable. As I slowly recovered and heard the +voice of Peterkin inquiring whether I felt better, I thought that I +must have overslept myself, and should be sent to the mast-head for +being lazy; but before I could leap up in haste, the thought seemed +to vanish suddenly away, and I fancied that I must have been ill. +Then a balmy breeze fanned my cheek, and I thought of home, and the +garden at the back of my father's cottage, with its luxuriant +flowers, and the sweet-scented honey-suckle that my dear mother +trained so carefully upon the trellised porch. But the roaring of +the surf put these delightful thoughts to flight, and I was back +again at sea, watching the dolphins and the flying-fish, and +reefing topsails off the wild and stormy Cape Horn. Gradually the +roar of the surf became louder and more distinct. I thought of +being wrecked far far away from my native land, and slowly opened +my eyes to meet those of my companion Jack, who, with a look of +intense anxiety, was gazing into my face. + +"Speak to us, my dear Ralph," whispered Jack, tenderly, "are you +better now?" + +I smiled and looked up, saying, "Better; why, what do you mean, +Jack? I'm quite well" + +"Then what are you shamming for, and frightening us in this way?" +said Peterkin, smiling through his tears; for the poor boy had been +really under the impression that I was dying. + +I now raised myself on my elbow, and putting my hand to my +forehead, found that it had been cut pretty severely, and that I +had lost a good deal of blood. + +"Come, come, Ralph," said Jack, pressing me gently backward, "lie +down, my boy; you're not right yet. Wet your lips with this water, +it's cool and clear as crystal. I got it from a spring close at +hand. There now, don't say a word, hold your tongue," said he, +seeing me about to speak. "I'll tell you all about it, but you +must not utter a syllable till you have rested well." + +"Oh! don't stop him from speaking, Jack," said Peterkin, who, now +that his fears for my safety were removed, busied himself in +erecting a shelter of broken branches in order to protect me from +the wind; which, however, was almost unnecessary, for the rock +beside which I had been laid completely broke the force of the +gale. "Let him speak, Jack; it's a comfort to hear that he's +alive, after lying there stiff and white and sulky for a whole +hour, just like an Egyptian mummy. Never saw such a fellow as you +are, Ralph; always up to mischief. You've almost knocked out all +my teeth and more than half choked me, and now you go shamming +dead! It's very wicked of you, indeed it is." + +While Peterkin ran on in this style, my faculties became quite +clear again, and I began to understand my position. "What do you +mean by saying I half choked you, Peterkin?" said I. + +"What do I mean? Is English not your mother tongue, or do you want +me to repeat it in French, by way of making it clearer? Don't you +remember - " + +"I remember nothing," said I, interrupting him, "after we were +thrown into the sea." + +"Hush, Peterkin," said Jack, "you're exciting Ralph with your +nonsense. I'll explain it to you. You recollect that after the +ship struck, we three sprang over the bow into the sea; well, I +noticed that the oar struck your head and gave you that cut on the +brow, which nearly stunned you, so that you grasped Peterkin round +the neck without knowing apparently what you were about. In doing +so you pushed the telescope, - which you clung to as if it had been +your life, - against Peterkin's mouth - " + +"Pushed it against his mouth!" interrupted Peterkin, "say crammed +it down his throat. Why, there's a distinct mark of the brass rim +on the back of my gullet at this moment!" + +"Well, well, be that as it may," continued Jack, "you clung to him, +Ralph, till I feared you really would choke him; but I saw that he +had a good hold of the oar, so I exerted myself to the utmost to +push you towards the shore, which we luckily reached without much +trouble, for the water inside the reef is quite calm." + +"But the captain and crew, what of them?" I inquired anxiously. + +Jack shook his head. + +"Are they lost?" + +"No, they are not lost, I hope, but I fear there is not much chance +of their being saved. The ship struck at the very tail of the +island on which we are cast. When the boat was tossed into the sea +it fortunately did not upset, although it shipped a good deal of +water, and all the men managed to scramble into it; but before they +could get the oars out the gale carried them past the point and +away to leeward of the island. After we landed I saw them +endeavouring to pull towards us, but as they had only one pair of +oars out of the eight that belong to the boat, and as the wind was +blowing right in their teeth, they gradually lost ground. Then I +saw them put about and hoist some sort of sail, - a blanket, I +fancy, for it was too small for the boat, - and in half an hour +they were out of sight." + +"Poor fellows," I murmured sorrowfully. + +"But the more I think about it, I've better hope of them," +continued Jack, in a more cheerful tone. "You see, Ralph, I've +read a great deal about these South Sea Islands, and I know that in +many places they are scattered about in thousands over the sea, so +they're almost sure to fall in with one of them before long." + +"I'm sure I hope so," said Peterkin, earnestly. "But what has +become of the wreck, Jack? I saw you clambering up the rocks there +while I was watching Ralph. Did you say she had gone to pieces?" + +"No, she has not gone to pieces, but she has gone to the bottom," +replied Jack. "As I said before, she struck on the tail of the +island and stove in her bow, but the next breaker swung her clear, +and she floated away to leeward. The poor fellows in the boat made +a hard struggle to reach her, but long before they came near her +she filled and went down. It was after she foundered that I saw +them trying to pull to the island." + +There wan a long silence after Jack ceased speaking, and I have no +doubt that each was revolving in his mind our extraordinary +position. For my part I cannot say that my reflections were very +agreeable. I knew that we were on an island, for Jack had said so, +but whether it was inhabited or not I did not know. If it should +be inhabited, I felt certain, from all I had heard of South Sea +Islanders, that we should be roasted alive and eaten. If it should +turn out to be uninhabited, I fancied that we should be starved to +death. "Oh!" thought I, "if the ship had only stuck on the rocks +we might have done pretty well, for we could have obtained +provisions from her, and tools to enable us to build a shelter, but +now - alas! alas! we are lost!" These last words I uttered aloud +in my distress. + +"Lost! Ralph?" exclaimed Jack, while a smile overspread his hearty +countenance. "Saved, you should have said. Your cogitations seem +to have taken a wrong road, and led you to a wrong conclusion." + +"Do you know what conclusion I have come to?" said Peterkin. "I +have made up my mind that it's capital, - first rate, - the best +thing that ever happened to us, and the most splendid prospect that +ever lay before three jolly young tars. We've got an island all to +ourselves. We'll take possession in the name of the king; we'll go +and enter the service of its black inhabitants. Of course we'll +rise, naturally, to the top of affairs. White men always do in +savage countries. You shall be king, Jack; Ralph, prime minister, +and I shall be - " + +"The court jester," interrupted Jack. + +"No," retorted Peterkin, "I'll have no title at all. I shall +merely accept a highly responsible situation under government, for +you see, Jack, I'm fond of having an enormous salary and nothing to +do." + +"But suppose there are no natives?" + +"Then we'll build a charming villa, and plant a lovely garden round +it, stuck all full of the most splendiferous tropical flowers, and +we'll farm the land, plant, sow, reap, eat, sleep, and be merry." + +"But to be serious," said Jack, assuming a grave expression of +countenance, which I observed always had the effect of checking +Peterkin's disposition to make fun of everything, "we are really in +rather an uncomfortable position. If this is a desert island, we +shall have to live very much like the wild beasts, for we have not +a tool of any kind, not even a knife." + +"Yes, we have THAT," said Peterkin, fumbling in his trousers +pocket, from which he drew forth a small penknife with only one +blade, and that was broken. + +"Well, that's better than nothing; but come," said Jack, rising, +"we are wasting our time in TALKING instead of DOING. You seem +well enough to walk now, Ralph, let us see what we have got in our +pockets, and then let us climb some hill and ascertain what sort of +island we have been cast upon, for, whether good or bad, it seems +likely to be our home for some time to come." + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + + +We examine into our personal property, and make a happy discovery - +Our island described - Jack proves himself to be learned and +sagacious above his fellows - Curious discoveries - Natural +lemonade! + + +WE now seated ourselves upon a rock and began to examine into our +personal property. When we reached the shore, after being wrecked, +my companions had taken off part of their clothes and spread them +out in the sun to dry, for, although the gale was raging fiercely, +there was not a single cloud in the bright sky. They had also +stripped off most part of my wet clothes and spread them also on +the rocks. Having resumed our garments, we now searched all our +pockets with the utmost care, and laid their contents out on a flat +stone before us; and, now that our minds were fully alive to our +condition, it was with no little anxiety that we turned our several +pockets inside out, in order that nothing might escape us. When +all was collected together we found that our worldly goods +consisted of the following articles:- + +First, A small penknife with a single blade broken off about the +middle and very rusty, besides having two or three notches on its +edge. (Peterkin said of this, with his usual pleasantry, that it +would do for a saw as well as a knife, which was a great +advantage.) Second, An old German-silver pencil-case without any +lead in it. Third, A piece of whip-cord about six yards long. +Fourth, A sailmaker's needle of a small size. Fifth, A ship's +telescope, which I happened to have in my hand at the time the ship +struck, and which I had clung to firmly all the time I was in the +water. Indeed it was with difficulty that Jack got it out of my +grasp when I was lying insensible on the shore. I cannot +understand why I kept such a firm hold of this telescope. They say +that a drowning man will clutch at a straw. Perhaps it may have +been some such feeling in me, for I did not know that it was in my +hand at the time we were wrecked. However, we felt some pleasure +in having it with us now, although we did not see that it could be +of much use to us, as the glass at the small end was broken to +pieces. Our sixth article was a brass ring which Jack always wore +on his little finger. I never understood why he wore it, for Jack +was not vain of his appearance, and did not seem to care for +ornaments of any kind. Peterkin said "it was in memory of the girl +he left behind him!" But as he never spoke of this girl to either +of us, I am inclined to think that Peterkin was either jesting or +mistaken. In addition to these articles we had a little bit of +tinder, and the clothes on our backs. These last were as follows:- + +Each of us had on a pair of stout canvass trousers, and a pair of +sailors' thick shoes. Jack wore a red flannel shirt, a blue +jacket, and a red Kilmarnock bonnet or night-cap, besides a pair of +worsted socks, and a cotton pocket-handkerchief, with sixteen +portraits of Lord Nelson printed on it, and a union Jack in the +middle. Peterkin had on a striped flannel shirt, - which he wore +outside his trousers, and belted round his waist, after the manner +of a tunic, - and a round black straw hat. He had no jacket, +having thrown it off just before we were cast into the sea; but +this was not of much consequence, as the climate of the island +proved to be extremely mild; so much so, indeed, that Jack and I +often preferred to go about without our jackets. Peterkin had also +a pair of white cotton socks, and a blue handkerchief with white +spots all over it. My own costume consisted of a blue flannel +shirt, a blue jacket, a black cap, and a pair of worsted socks, +besides the shoes and canvass trousers already mentioned. This was +all we had, and besides these things we had nothing else; but, when +we thought of the danger from which we had escaped, and how much +worse off we might have been had the ship struck on the reef during +the night, we felt very thankful that we were possessed of so much, +although, I must confess, we sometimes wished that we had had a +little more. + +While we were examining these things, and talking about them, Jack +suddenly started and exclaimed - + +"The oar! we have forgotten the oar." + +"What good will that do us?" said Peterkin; "there's wood enough on +the island to make a thousand oars." + +"Ay, lad," replied Jack, "but there's a bit of hoop iron at the end +of it, and that may be of much use to us." + +"Very true," said I, "let us go fetch it;" and with that we all +three rose and hastened down to the beach. I still felt a little +weak from loss of blood, so that my companions soon began to leave +me behind; but Jack perceived this, and, with his usual considerate +good nature, turned back to help me. This was now the first time +that I had looked well about me since landing, as the spot where I +had been laid was covered with thick bushes which almost hid the +country from our view. As we now emerged from among these and +walked down the sandy beach together, I cast my eyes about, and, +truly, my heart glowed within me and my spirits rose at the +beautiful prospect which I beheld on every side. The gale had +suddenly died away, just as if it had blown furiously till it +dashed our ship upon the rocks, and had nothing more to do after +accomplishing that. The island on which we stood was hilly, and +covered almost everywhere with the most beautiful and richly +coloured trees, bushes, and shrubs, none of which I knew the names +of at that time, except, indeed, the cocoa-nut palms, which I +recognised at once from the many pictures that I had seen of them +before I left home. A sandy beach of dazzling whiteness lined this +bright green shore, and upon it there fell a gentle ripple of the +sea. This last astonished me much, for I recollected that at home +the sea used to fall in huge billows on the shore long after a +storm had subsided. But on casting my glance out to sea the cause +became apparent. About a mile distant from the shore I saw the +great billows of the ocean rolling like a green wall, and falling +with a long, loud roar, upon a low coral reef, where they were +dashed into white foam and flung up in clouds of spray. This spray +sometimes flew exceedingly high, and, every here and there, a +beautiful rainbow was formed for a moment among the falling drops. +We afterwards found that this coral reef extended quite round the +island, and formed a natural breakwater to it. Beyond this the sea +rose and tossed violently from the effects of the storm; but +between the reef and the shore it was as calm and as smooth as a +pond. + +My heart was filled with more delight than I can express at sight +of so many glorious objects, and my thoughts turned suddenly to the +contemplation of the Creator of them all. I mention this the more +gladly, because at that time, I am ashamed to say, I very seldom +thought of my Creator, although I was constantly surrounded by the +most beautiful and wonderful of His works. I observed from the +expression of my companion's countenance that he too derived much +joy from the splendid scenery, which was all the more agreeable to +us after our long voyage on the salt sea. There, the breeze was +fresh and cold, but here it was delightfully mild; and, when a puff +blew off the land, it came laden with the most exquisite perfume +that can be imagined. While we thus gazed, we were startled by a +loud "Huzza!" from Peterkin, and, on looking towards the edge of +the sea, we saw him capering and jumping about like a monkey, and +ever and anon tugging with all his might at something that lay upon +the shore. + +"What an odd fellow he is, to be sure," said Jack, taking me by the +arm and hurrying forward; "come, let us hasten to see what it is." + +"Here it is, boys, hurrah! come along. Just what we want," cried +Peterkin, as we drew near, still tugging with all his power. +"First rate; just the very ticket!" + +I need scarcely say to my readers that my companion Peterkin was in +the habit of using very remarkable and peculiar phrases. And I am +free to confess that I did not well understand the meaning of some +of them, - such, for instance, as "the very ticket;" but I think it +my duty to recount everything relating to my adventures with a +strict regard to truthfulness in as far as my memory serves me; so +I write, as nearly as possible, the exact words that my companions +spoke. I often asked Peterkin to explain what he meant by +"ticket," but he always answered me by going into fits of laughter. +However, by observing the occasions on which he used it, I came to +understand that it meant to show that something was remarkably +good, or fortunate. + +On coming up we found that Peterkin was vainly endeavouring to pull +the axe out of the oar, into which, it will be remembered, Jack +struck it while endeavouring to cut away the cordage among which it +had become entangled at the bow of the ship. Fortunately for us +the axe had remained fast in the oar, and even now, all Peterkin's +strength could not draw it out of the cut. + +"Ah! that is capital indeed," cried Jack, at the same time giving +the axe a wrench that plucked it out of the tough wood. "How +fortunate this is! It will be of more value to us than a hundred +knives, and the edge is quite new and sharp." + +"I'll answer for the toughness of the handle at any rate," cried +Peterkin; "my arms are nearly pulled out of the sockets. But see +here, our luck is great. There is iron on the blade." He pointed +to a piece of hoop iron, as he spoke, which had been nailed round +the blade of the oar to prevent it from splitting. + +This also was a fortunate discovery. Jack went down on his knees, +and with the edge of the axe began carefully to force out the +nails. But as they were firmly fixed in, and the operation blunted +our axe, we carried the oar up with us to the place where we had +left the rest of our things, intending to burn the wood away from +the iron at a more convenient time. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, after we had laid it on the stone which +contained our little all, "I propose that we should go to the tail +of the island, where the ship struck, which is only a quarter of a +mile off, and see if anything else has been thrown ashore. I don't +expect anything, but it is well to see. When we get back here it +will be time to have our supper and prepare our beds." + +"Agreed!" cried Peterkin and I together, as, indeed, we would have +agreed to any proposal that Jack made; for, besides his being older +and much stronger and taller than either of us, he was a very +clever fellow, and I think would have induced people much older +than himself to choose him for their leader, especially if they +required to be led on a bold enterprise. + +Now, as we hastened along the white beach, which shone so brightly +in the rays of the setting sun that our eyes were quite dazzled by +its glare, it suddenly came into Peterkin's head that we had +nothing to eat except the wild berries which grew in profusion at +our feet. + +"What shall we do, Jack?" said he, with a rueful look; "perhaps +they may be poisonous!" + +"No fear," replied Jack, confidently; "I have observed that a few +of them are not unlike some of the berries that grow wild on our +own native hills. Besides, I saw one or two strange birds eating +them just a few minutes ago, and what won't kill the birds won't +kill us. But look up there, Peterkin," continued Jack, pointing to +the branched head of a cocoa-nut palm. "There are nuts for us in +all stages." + +"So there are!" cried Peterkin, who being of a very unobservant +nature had been too much taken up with other things to notice +anything so high above his head as the fruit of a palm tree. But, +whatever faults my young comrade had, he could not be blamed for +want of activity or animal spirits. Indeed, the nuts had scarcely +been pointed out to him when he bounded up the tall stem of the +tree like a squirrel, and, in a few minutes, returned with three +nuts, each as large as a man's fist. + +"You had better keep them till we return," raid Jack. "Let us +finish our work before eating." + +"So be it, captain, go ahead," cried Peterkin, thrusting the nuts +into his trousers pocket. "In fact I don't want to eat just now, +but I would give a good deal for a drink. Oh that I could find a +spring! but I don't see the smallest sign of one hereabouts. I +say, Jack, how does it happen that you seem to be up to everything? +You have told us the names of half-a-dozen trees already, and yet +you say that you were never in the South Seas before." + +"I'm not up to EVERYTHING, Peterkin, as you'll find out ere long," +replied Jack, with a smile; "but I have been a great reader of +books of travel and adventure all my life, and that has put me up +to a good many things that you are, perhaps, not acquainted with." + +"Oh, Jack, that's all humbug. If you begin to lay everything to +the credit of books, I'll quite lose my opinion of you," cried +Peterkin, with a look of contempt. "I've seen a lot o' fellows +that were ALWAYS poring over books, and when they came to try to DO +anything, they were no better than baboons!" + +"You are quite right," retorted Jack; "and I have seen a lot of +fellows who never looked into books at all, who knew nothing about +anything except the things they had actually seen, and very little +they knew even about these. Indeed, some were so ignorant that +they did not know that cocoa-nuts grew on cocoa-nut trees!" + +I could not refrain from laughing at this rebuke, for there was +much truth in it, as to Peterkin's ignorance. + +"Humph! maybe you're right," answered Peterkin; "but I would not +give TUPPENCE for a man of books, if he had nothing else in him." + +"Neither would I," said Jack; "but that's no reason why you should +run books down, or think less of me for having read them. Suppose, +now, Peterkin, that you wanted to build a ship, and I were to give +you a long and particular account of the way to do it, would not +that be very useful?" + +"No doubt of it," said Peterkin, laughing. + +"And suppose I were to write the account in a letter instead of +telling you in words, would that be less useful?" + +"Well - no, perhaps not." + +"Well, suppose I were to print it, and send it to you in the form +of a book, would it not be as good and useful as ever?" + +"Oh, bother! Jack, you're a philosopher, and that's worse than +anything!" cried Peterkin, with a look of pretended horror. + +"Very well, Peterkin, we shall see," returned Jack, halting under +the shade of a cocoa-nut tree. "You said you were thirsty just a +minute ago; now, jump up that tree and bring down a nut, - not a +ripe one, bring a green, unripe one." + +Peterkin looked surprised, but, seeing that Jack was in earnest, he +obeyed. + +"Now, cut a hole in it with your penknife, and clap it to your +mouth, old fellow," said Jack. + +Peterkin did as he was directed, and we both burst into +uncontrollable laughter at the changes that instantly passed over +his expressive countenance. No sooner had he put the nut to his +mouth, and thrown back his head in order to catch what came out of +it, than his eyes opened to twice their ordinary size with +astonishment, while his throat moved vigorously in the act of +swallowing. Then a smile and look of intense delight overspread +his face, except, indeed, the mouth, which, being firmly fixed to +the hole in the nut, could not take part in the expression; but he +endeavoured to make up for this by winking at us excessively with +his right eye. At length he stopped, and, drawing a long breath, +exclaimed - + +"Nectar! perfect nectar! I say, Jack, you're a Briton - the best +fellow I ever met in my life. Only taste that!" said he, turning +to me and holding the nut to my mouth. I immediately drank, and +certainly I was much surprised at the delightful liquid that flowed +copiously down my throat. It was extremely cool, and had a sweet +taste, mingled with acid; in fact, it was the likest thing to +lemonade I ever tasted, and was most grateful and refreshing. I +handed the nut to Jack, who, after tasting it, said, "Now, +Peterkin, you unbeliever, I never saw or tasted a cocoa nut in my +life before, except those sold in shops at home; but I once read +that the green nuts contain that stuff, and you see it is true!" + +"And pray," asked Peterkin, "what sort of 'stuff' does the ripe nut +contain?" + +"A hollow kernel," answered Jack, "with a liquid like milk in it; +but it does not satisfy thirst so well as hunger. It is very +wholesome food I believe." + +"Meat and drink on the same tree!" cried Peterkin; "washing in the +sea, lodging on the ground, - and all for nothing! My dear boys, +we're set up for life; it must be the ancient Paradise, - hurrah!" +and Peterkin tossed his straw hat in the air, and ran along the +beach hallooing like a madman with delight. + +We afterwards found, however, that these lovely islands were very +unlike Paradise in many things. But more of this in its proper +place. + +We had now come to the point of rocks on which the ship had struck, +but did not find a single article, although we searched carefully +among the coral rocks, which at this place jutted out so far as +nearly to join the reef that encircled the island. Just as we were +about to return, however, we saw something black floating in a +little cove that had escaped our observation. Running forward, we +drew it from the water, and found it to be a long thick leather +boot, such as fishermen at home wear; and a few paces farther on we +picked up its fellow. We at once recognised these as having +belonged to our captain, for he had worn them during the whole of +the storm, in order to guard his legs from the waves and spray that +constantly washed over our decks. My first thought on seeing them +was that our dear captain had been drowned; but Jack soon put my +mind more at rest on that point, by saying that if the captain had +been drowned with the boots on, he would certainly have been washed +ashore along with them, and that he had no doubt whatever he had +kicked them off while in the sea, that he might swim more easily. + +Peterkin immediately put them on, but they were so large that, as +Jack said, they would have done for boots, trousers, and vest too. +I also tried them, but, although I was long enough in the legs for +them, they were much too large in the feet for me; so we handed +them to Jack, who was anxious to make me keep them, but as they +fitted his large limbs and feet as if they had been made for him, I +would not hear of it, so he consented at last to use them. I may +remark, however, that Jack did not use them often, as they were +extremely heavy. + +It was beginning to grow dark when we returned to our encampment; +so we put off our visit to the top of a hill till next day, and +employed the light that yet remained to us in cutting down a +quantity of boughs and the broad leaves of a tree, of which none of +us knew the name. With these we erected a sort of rustic bower, in +which we meant to pass the night. There was no absolute necessity +for this, because the air of our island was so genial and balmy +that we could have slept quite well without any shelter; but we +were so little used to sleeping in the open air, that we did not +quite relish the idea of lying down without any covering over us: +besides, our bower would shelter us from the night dews or rain, if +any should happen to fall. Having strewed the floor with leaves +and dry grass, we bethought ourselves of supper. + +But it now occurred to us, for the first time, that we had no means +of making a fire. + +"Now, there's a fix! - what shall we do?" said Peterkin, while we +both turned our eyes to Jack, to whom we always looked in our +difficulties. Jack seemed not a little perplexed. + +"There are flints enough, no doubt, on the beach," said he, "but +they are of no use at all without a steel. However, we must try." +So saying, he went to the beach, and soon returned with two flints. +On one of these he placed the tinder, and endeavoured to ignite it; +but it was with great difficulty that a very small spark was struck +out of the flints, and the tinder, being a bad, hard piece, would +not catch. He then tried the bit of hoop iron, which would not +strike fire at all; and after that the back of the axe, with no +better success. During all these trials Peterkin sat with his +hands in his pockets, gazing with a most melancholy visage at our +comrade, his face growing longer and more miserable at each +successive failure. + +"Oh dear!" he sighed, "I would not care a button for the cooking of +our victuals, - perhaps they don't need it, - but it's so dismal to +eat one's supper in the dark, and we have had such a capital day, +that it's a pity to finish off in this glum style. Oh, I have it!" +he cried, starting up; "the spy-glass, - the big glass at the end +is a burning-glass!" + +"You forget that we have no sun," said I. + +Peterkin was silent. In his sudden recollection of the telescope +he had quite overlooked the absence of the sun. + +"Ah, boys, I've got it now!" exclaimed Jack, rising and cutting a +branch from a neighbouring bush, which be stripped of its leaves. +"I recollect seeing this done once at home. Hand me the bit of +whip-cord." With the cord and branch Jack soon formed a bow. Then +he cut a piece, about three inches long, off the end of a dead +branch, which he pointed at the two ends. Round this he passed the +cord of the bow, and placed one end against his chest, which was +protected from its point by a chip of wood; the other point he +placed against the bit of tinder, and then began to saw vigorously +with the bow, just as a blacksmith does with his drill while boring +a hole in a piece of iron. In a few seconds the tinder began to +smoke; in less than a minute it caught fire; and in less than a +quarter of an hour we were drinking our lemonade and eating cocoa +nuts round a fire that would have roasted an entire sheep, while +the smoke, flames, and sparks, flew up among the broad leaves of +the overhanging palm trees, and cast a warm glow upon our leafy +bower. + +That night the starry sky looked down through the gently rustling +trees upon our slumbers, and the distant roaring of the surf upon +the coral reef was our lullaby. + + + +CHAPTER V. + + + +Morning, and cogitations connected therewith - We luxuriate in the +sea, try our diving powers, and make enchanting excursions among +the coral groves at the bottom of the ocean - The wonders of the +deep enlarged upon. + + +WHAT a joyful thing it is to awaken, on a fresh glorious morning, +and find the rising sun staring into your face with dazzling +brilliancy! - to see the birds twittering in the bushes, and to +hear the murmuring of a rill, or the soft hissing ripples as they +fall upon the sea-shore! At any time and in any place such sights +and sounds are most charming, but more especially are they so when +one awakens to them, for the fist time, in a novel and romantic +situation, with the soft sweet air of a tropical climate mingling +with the fresh smell of the sea, and stirring the strange leaves +that flutter overhead and around one, or ruffling the plumage of +the stranger birds that fly inquiringly around, as if to demand +what business we have to intrude uninvited on their domains. When +I awoke on the morning after the shipwreck, I found myself in this +most delightful condition; and, as I lay on my back upon my bed of +leaves, gazing up through the branches of the cocoa-nut trees into +the clear blue sky, and watched the few fleecy clouds that passed +slowly across it, my heart expanded more and more with an exulting +gladness, the like of which I had never felt before. While I +meditated, my thoughts again turned to the great and kind Creator +of this beautiful world, as they had done on the previous day, when +I first beheld the sea and the coral reef, with the mighty waves +dashing over it into the calm waters of the lagoon. + +While thus meditating, I naturally bethought me of my Bible, for I +had faithfully kept the promise, which I gave at parting to my +beloved mother, that I would read it every morning; and it was with +a feeling of dismay that I remembered I had left it in the ship. I +was much troubled about this. However, I consoled myself with +reflecting that I could keep the second part of my promise to her, +namely, that I should never omit to say my prayers. So I rose +quietly, lest I should disturb my companions, who were still +asleep, and stepped aside into the bushes for this purpose. + +On my return I found them still slumbering, so I again lay down to +think over our situation. Just at that moment I was attracted by +the sight of a very small parrot, which Jack afterwards told me was +called a paroquet. It was seated on a twig that overhung +Peterkin's head, and I was speedily lost in admiration of its +bright green plumage, which was mingled with other gay colours. +While I looked I observed that the bird turned its head slowly from +side to side and looked downwards, fist with the one eye, and then +with the other. On glancing downwards I observed that Peterkin's +mouth was wide open, and that this remarkable bird was looking into +it. Peterkin used to say that I had not an atom of fun in my +composition, and that I never could understand a joke. In regard +to the latter, perhaps he was right; yet I think that, when they +were explained to me, I understood jokes as well as most people: +but in regard to the former he must certainly have been wrong, for +this bird seemed to me to be extremely funny; and I could not help +thinking that, if it should happen to faint, or slip its foot, and +fall off the twig into Peterkin's mouth, he would perhaps think it +funny too! Suddenly the paroquet bent down its head and uttered a +loud scream in his face. This awoke him, and, with a cry of +surprise, he started up, while the foolish bird flew precipitately +away. + +"Oh you monster!" cried Peterkin, shaking his fist at the bird. +Then he yawned and rubbed his eyes, and asked what o'clock it was. + +I smiled at this question, and answered that, as our watches were +at the bottom of the sea, I could not tell, but it was a little +past sunrise. + +Peterkin now began to remember where we were. As he looked up into +the bright sky, and snuffed the scented air, his eyes glistened +with delight, and he uttered a faint "hurrah!" and yawned again. +Then he gazed slowly round, till, observing the calm sea through an +opening in the bushes, he started suddenly up as if he had received +an electric shock, uttered a vehement shout, flung off his +garments, and, rushing over the white sands, plunged into the +water. The cry awoke Jack, who rose on his elbow with a look of +grave surprise; but this was followed by a quiet smile of +intelligence on seeing Peterkin in the water. With an energy that +he only gave way to in moments of excitement, Jack bounded to his +feet, threw off his clothes, shook back his hair, and with a lion- +like spring, dashed over the sands and plunged into the sea with +such force as quite to envelop Peterkin in a shower of spray. Jack +was a remarkably good swimmer and diver, so that after his plunge +we saw no sign of him for nearly a minute; after which he suddenly +emerged, with a cry of joy, a good many yards out from the shore. +My spirits were so much raised by seeing all this that I, too, +hastily threw off my garments and endeavoured to imitate Jack's +vigorous bound; but I was so awkward that my foot caught on a +stump, and I fell to the ground; then I slipped on a stone while +running over the mud, and nearly fell again, much to the amusement +of Peterkin, who laughed heartily, and called me a "slow coach," +while Jack cried out, "Come along, Ralph, and I'll help you." +However, when I got into the water I managed very well, for I was +really a good swimmer, and diver too. I could not, indeed, equal +Jack, who was superior to any Englishman I ever saw, but I +infinitely surpassed Peterkin, who could only swim a little, and +could not dive at all. + +While Peterkin enjoyed himself in the shallow water and in running +along the beach, Jack and I swam out into the deep water, and +occasionally dived for stones. I shall never forget my surprise +and delight on first beholding the bottom of the sea. As I have +before stated, the water within the reef was as calm as a pond; +and, as there was no wind, it was quite clear, from the surface to +the bottom, so that we could see down easily even at a depth of +twenty or thirty yards. When Jack and I dived in shallower water, +we expected to have found sand and stones, instead of which we +found ourselves in what appeared really to be an enchanted garden. +The whole of the bottom of the lagoon, as we called the calm water +within the reef, was covered with coral of every shape, size, and +hue. Some portions were formed like large mushrooms; others +appeared like the brain of a man, having stalks or necks attached +to them; but the most common kind was a species of branching coral, +and some portions were of a lovely pale pink colour, others pure +white. Among this there grew large quantities of sea-weed of the +richest hues imaginable, and of the most graceful forms; while +innumerable fishes - blue, red, yellow, green, and striped - +sported in and out amongst the flower-beds of this submarine +garden, and did not appear to be at all afraid of our approaching +them. + +On darting to the surface for breath, after our first dive, Jack +and I rose close to each other. + +"Did you ever in your life, Ralph, see anything so lovely?" said +Jack, as he flung the spray from his hair. + +"Never," I replied. "It appears to me like fairy realms. I can +scarcely believe that we are not dreaming." + +"Dreaming!" cried Jack, "do you know, Ralph, I'm half tempted to +think that we really are dreaming. But if so, I am resolved to +make the most of it, and dream another dive; so here goes, - down +again, my boy!" + +We took the second dive together, and kept beside each other while +under water; and I was greatly surprised to find that we could keep +down much longer than I ever recollect having done in our own seas +at home. I believe that this was owing to the heat of the water, +which was so warm that we afterwards found we could remain in it +for two and three hours at a time without feeling any unpleasant +effects such as we used to experience in the sea at home. When +Jack reached the bottom, he grasped the coral stems, and crept +along on his hands and knees, peeping under the sea-weed and among +the rocks. I observed him also pick up one or two large oysters, +and retain them in his grasp, as if he meant to take them up with +him, so I also gathered a few. Suddenly he made a grasp at a fish +with blue and yellow stripes on its back, and actually touched its +tail, but did not catch it. At this he turned towards me and +attempted to smile; but no sooner had he done so than he sprang +like an arrow to the surface, where, on following him, I found him +gasping and coughing, and spitting water from his mouth. In a few +minutes he recovered, and we both turned to swim ashore. + +"I declare, Ralph," said he, "that I actually tried to laugh under +water." + +"So I saw," I replied; "and I observed that you very nearly caught +that fish by the tail. It would have done capitally for breakfast +if you had." + +"Breakfast enough here," said he, holding up the oysters, as we +landed and ran up the beach. "Hallo! Peterkin, here you are, boy. +Split open these fellows while Ralph and I put on our clothes. +They'll agree with the cocoa nuts excellently, I have no doubt." + +Peterkin, who was already dressed, took the oysters, and opened +them with the edge of our axe, exclaiming, "Now, that IS capital. +There's nothing I'm so fond of." + +"Ah! that's lucky," remarked Jack. "I'll be able to keep you in +good order now, Master Peterkin. You know you can't dive any +better than a cat. So, sir, whenever you behave ill, you shall +have no oysters for breakfast." + +"I'm very glad that our prospect of breakfast is so good," said I, +"for I'm very hungry." + +"Here, then, stop your mouth with that, Ralph," said Peterkin, +holding a large oyster to my lips. I opened my mouth and swallowed +it in silence, and really it was remarkably good. + +We now set ourselves earnestly about our preparations for spending +the day. We had no difficulty with the fire this morning, as our +burning-glass was an admirable one; and while we roasted a few +oysters and ate our cocoa nuts, we held a long, animated +conversation about our plans for the future. What those plans +were, and how we carried them into effect, the reader shall see +hereafter. + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + + +An excursion into the interior, in which we make many valuable and +interesting discoveries - We get a dreadful fright - The bread- +fruit tree - Wonderful peculiarity of some of the fruit trees - +Signs of former inhabitants. + + +OUR first care, after breakfast, was to place the few articles we +possessed in the crevice of a rock at the farther end of a small +cave which we discovered near our encampment. This cave, we hoped, +might be useful to us afterwards as a store-house. Then we cut two +large clubs off a species of very hard tree which grew near at +hand. One of these was given to Peterkin, the other to me, and +Jack armed himself with the axe. We took these precautions because +we purposed to make an excursion to the top of the mountains of the +interior, in order to obtain a better view of our island. Of +course we knew not what dangers might befall us by the way, so +thought it best to be prepared. + +Having completed our arrangements and carefully extinguished our +fire, we sallied forth and walked a short distance along the sea- +beach, till we came to the entrance of a valley, through which +flowed the rivulet before mentioned. Here we turned our backs on +the sea and struck into the interior. + +The prospect that burst upon our view on entering the valley was +truly splendid. On either side of us there was a gentle rise in +the land, which thus formed two ridges about a mile apart on each +side of the valley. These ridges, - which, as well as the low +grounds between them, were covered with trees and shrubs of the +most luxuriant kind - continued to recede inland for about two +miles, when they joined the foot of a small mountain. This hill +rose rather abruptly from the head of the valley, and was likewise +entirely covered even to the top with trees, except on one +particular spot near the left shoulder, where was a bare and rocky +place of a broken and savage character. Beyond this hill we could +not see, and we therefore directed our course up the banks of the +rivulet towards the foot of it, intending to climb to the top, +should that be possible, as, indeed, we had no doubt it was. + +Jack, being the wisest and boldest among us, took the lead, +carrying the axe on his shoulder. Peterkin, with his enormous +club, came second, as he said he should like to be in a position to +defend me if any danger should threaten. I brought up the rear, +but, having been more taken up with the wonderful and curious +things I saw at starting than with thoughts of possible danger, I +had very foolishly left my club behind me. Although, as I have +said the trees and bushes were very luxuriant, they were not so +thickly crowded together as to hinder our progress among them. We +were able to wind in and out, and to follow the banks of the stream +quite easily, although, it is true, the height and thickness of the +foliage prevented us from seeing far ahead. But sometimes a +jutting-out rock on the hill sides afforded us a position whence we +could enjoy the romantic view and mark our progress towards the +foot of the hill. I wag particularly struck, during the walk, with +the richness of the undergrowth in most places, and recognised many +berries and plants that resembled those of my native land, +especially a tall, elegantly-formed fern, which emitted an +agreeable perfume. There were several kinds of flowers, too, but I +did not see so many of these as I should have expected in such a +climate. We also saw a great variety of small birds of bright +plumage, and many paroquets similar to the one that awoke Peterkin +so rudely in the morning. + +Thus we advanced to the foot of the hill without encountering +anything to alarm us, except, indeed, once, when we were passing +close under a part of the hill which was hidden from our view by +the broad leaves of the banana trees, which grew in great +luxuriance in that part. Jack was just preparing to force his way +through this thicket, when we were startled and arrested by a +strange pattering or rumbling sound, which appeared to us quite +different from any of the sounds we had heard during the previous +part of our walk. + +"Hallo!" cried Peterkin, stopping short and grasping his club with +both hands, "what's that?" + +Neither of us replied; but Jack seized his axe in his right hand, +while with the other he pushed aside the broad leaves and +endeavoured to peer amongst them. + +"I can see nothing," he said, after a short pause. + +"I think it - " + +Again the rumbling sound came, louder than before, and we all +sprang back and stood on the defensive. For myself, having +forgotten my club, and not having taken the precaution to cut +another, I buttoned my jacket, doubled my fists, and threw myself +into a boxing attitude. I must say, however, that I felt somewhat +uneasy; and my companions afterwards confessed that their thoughts +at this moment had been instantly filled with all they had ever +heard or read of wild beasts and savages, torturings at the stake, +roastings alive, and such like horrible things. Suddenly the +pattering noise increased with tenfold violence. It was followed +by a fearful crash among the bushes, which was rapidly repeated, as +if some gigantic animal were bounding towards us. In another +moment an enormous rock came crashing through the shrubbery, +followed by a cloud of dust and small stones, flew close past the +spot where we stood, carrying bushes and young trees along with it. + +"Pooh! is that all?" exclaimed Peterkin, wiping the perspiration +off his forehead. "Why, I thought it was all the wild men and +beasts in the South Sea Islands galloping on in one grand charge to +sweep us off the face of the earth, instead of a mere stone +tumbling down the mountain side." + +"Nevertheless," remarked Jack, "if that same stone had hit any of +us, it would have rendered the charge you speak of quite +unnecessary, Peterkin." + +This was true, and I felt very thankful for our escape. On +examining the spot more narrowly, we found that it lay close to the +foot of a very rugged precipice, from which stones of various sizes +were always tumbling at intervals. Indeed, the numerous fragments +lying scattered all around might have suggested the cause of the +sound, had we not been too suddenly alarmed to think of anything. + +We now resumed our journey, resolving that, in our future +excursions into the interior, we would be careful to avoid this +dangerous precipice. + +Soon afterwards we arrived at the foot of the hill and prepared to +ascend it. Here Jack made a discovery which caused us all very +great joy. This was a tree of a remarkably beautiful appearance, +which Jack confidently declared to be the celebrated bread-fruit +tree. + +"Is it celebrated?" inquired Peterkin, with a look of great +simplicity. + +"It is," replied Jack + +"That's odd, now," rejoined Peterkin; "never heard of it before." + +"Then it's not so celebrated as I thought it was," returned Jack, +quietly squeezing Peterkin's hat over his eyes; "but listen, you +ignorant boobie! and hear of it now." + +Peterkin re-adjusted his hat, and was soon listening with as much +interest as myself, while Jack told us that this tree is one of the +most valuable in the islands of the south; that it bears two, +sometimes three, crops of fruit in the year; that the fruit is very +like wheaten bread in appearance, and that it constitutes the +principal food of many of the islanders. + +"So," said Peterkin, "we seem to have everything ready prepared to +our hands in this wonderful island, - lemonade ready bottled in +nuts, and loaf-bread growing on the trees!" + +Peterkin, as usual, was jesting; nevertheless, it is a curious fact +that he spoke almost the literal truth. "Moreover," continued +Jack, "the bread-fruit tree affords a capital gum, which serves the +natives for pitching their canoes; the bark of the young branches +is made by them into cloth; and of the wood, which is durable and +of a good colour, they build their houses. So you see, lads, that +we have no lack of material here to make us comfortable, if we are +only clever enough to use it." + +"But are you sure that that's it?" asked Peterkin. + +"Quite sure," replied Jack; "for I was particularly interested in +the account I once read of it, and I remember the description well. +I am sorry, however, that I have forgotten the descriptions of many +other trees which I am sure we have seen to-day, if we could but +recognise them. So you see, Peterkin, I'm not up to everything +yet." + +"Never mind, Jack," said Peterkin, with a grave, patronizing +expression of countenance, patting his tall companion on the +shoulder, - "never mind, Jack; you know a good deal for your age. +You're a clever boy, sir, - a promising young man; and if you only +go on as you have begun, sir, you will - " + +The end of this speech was suddenly cut short by Jack tripping up +Peterkin's heels and tumbling him into a mass of thick shrubs, +where, finding himself comfortable, he lay still basking in the +sunshine, while Jack and I examined the bread-tree. + +We were much struck with the deep, rich green colour of its broad +leaves, which were twelve or eighteen inches long, deeply indented, +and of a glossy smoothness, like the laurel. The fruit, with which +it was loaded, was nearly round, and appeared to be about six +inches in diameter, with a rough rind, marked with lozenge-shaped +divisions. It was of various colours, from light pea-green to +brown and rich yellow. Jack said that the yellow was the ripe +fruit. We afterwards found that most of the fruit-trees on the +island were evergreens, and that we might, when we wished, pluck +the blossom and the ripe fruit from the same tree. Such a +wonderful difference from the trees of our own country surprised us +not a little. The bark of the tree was rough and light-coloured; +the trunk was about two feet in diameter, and it appeared to be +twenty feet high, being quite destitute of branches up to that +height, where it branched off into a beautiful and umbrageous head. +We noticed that the fruit hung in clusters of twos and threes on +the branches; but as we were anxious to get to the top of the hill, +we refrained from attempting to pluck any at that time. + +Our hearts were now very much cheered by our good fortune, and it +was with light and active steps that we clambered up the steep +sides of the hill. On reaching the summit, a new, and if possible +a grander, prospect met our gaze. We found that this was not the +highest part of the island, but that another hill lay beyond, with +a wide valley between it and the one on which we stood. This +valley, like the first, was also full of rich trees, some dark and +some light green, some heavy and thick in foliage, and others +light, feathery, and graceful, while the beautiful blossoms on many +of them threw a sort of rainbow tint over all, and gave to the +valley the appearance of a garden of flowers. Among these we +recognised many of the bread-fruit trees, laden with yellow fruit, +and also a great many cocoa-nut palms. After gazing our fill we +pushed down the hill side, crossed the valley, and soon began to +ascend the second mountain. It was clothed with trees nearly to +the top, but the summit was bare, and in some places broken. + +While on our way up we came to an object which filled us with much +interest. This was the stump of a tree that had evidently been cut +down with an axe! So, then, we were not the first who had viewed +this beautiful isle. The hand of man had been at work there before +us. It now began to recur to us again that perhaps the island was +inhabited, although we had not seen any traces of man until now; +but a second glance at the stump convinced us that we had not more +reason to think so now than formerly; for the surface of the wood +was quite decayed, and partly covered with fungus and green matter, +so that it must have been cut many years ago. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "some ship or other has touched here long +ago for wood, and only taken one tree." + +We did not think this likely, however, because, in such +circumstances, the crew of a ship would cut wood of small size, and +near the shore, whereas this was a large tree and stood near the +top of the mountain. In fact it was the highest large tree on the +mountain, all above it being wood of very recent growth. + +"I can't understand it," said Jack, scratching the surface of the +stump with his axe. "I can only suppose that the savages have been +here and cut it for some purpose known only to themselves. But, +hallo! what have we here?" + +As he spoke, Jack began carefully to scrape away the moss and +fungus from the stump, and soon laid bare three distinct traces of +marks, as if some inscription or initials had been cut thereon. +But although the traces were distinct, beyond all doubt, the exact +form of the letters could not be made out. Jack thought they +looked like J. S. but we could not be certain. They had apparently +been carelessly cut, and long exposure to the weather had so broken +them up that we could not make out what they were. We were +exceedingly perplexed at this discovery, and stayed a long time at +the place conjecturing what these marks could have been, but +without avail; so, as the day was advancing, we left it and quickly +reached the top of the mountain. + +We found this to be the highest point of the island, and from it we +saw our kingdom lying, as it were, like a map around us. As I have +always thought it impossible to get a thing properly into one's +understanding without comprehending it, I shall beg the reader's +patience for a little while I describe our island, thus, shortly:- + +It consisted of two mountains; the one we guessed at 500 feet; the +other, on which we stood, at 1000. Between these lay a rich, +beautiful valley, as already said. This valley crossed the island +from one end to the other, being high in the middle and sloping on +each side towards the sea. The large mountain sloped, on the side +farthest from where we had been wrecked, gradually towards the sea; +but although, when viewed at a glance, it had thus a regular +sloping appearance, a more careful observation showed that it was +broken up into a multitude of very small vales, or rather dells and +glens, intermingled with little rugged spots and small but abrupt +precipices here and there, with rivulets tumbling over their edges +and wandering down the slopes in little white streams, sometimes +glistening among the broad leaves of the bread-fruit and cocoa-nut +trees, or hid altogether beneath the rich underwood. At the base +of this mountain lay a narrow bright green plain or meadow, which +terminated abruptly at the shore. On the other side of the island, +whence we had come, stood the smaller hill, at the foot of which +diverged three valleys; one being that which we had ascended, with +a smaller vale on each side of it, and separated from it by the two +ridges before mentioned. In these smaller valleys there were no +streams, but they were clothed with the same luxuriant vegetation. + +The diameter of the island seemed to be about ten miles, and, as it +was almost circular in form, its circumference must have been +thirty miles; - perhaps a little more, if allowance be made for the +numerous bays and indentations of the shore. The entire island was +belted by a beach of pure white sand, on which laved the gentle +ripples of the lagoon. We now also observed that the coral reef +completely encircled the island; but it varied its distance from it +here and there, in some places being a mile from the beach, in +others, a few hundred yards, but the average distance was half a +mile. The reef lay very low, and the spray of the surf broke quite +over it in many places. This surf never ceased its roar, for, +however calm the weather might be, there is always a gentle swaying +motion in the great Pacific, which, although scarce noticeable out +at sea, reaches the shore at last in a huge billow. The water +within the lagoon, as before said, was perfectly still. There were +three narrow openings in the reef; one opposite each end of the +valley which I have described as crossing the island; the other +opposite our own valley, which we afterwards named the Valley of +the Wreck. At each of these openings the reef rose into two small +green islets, covered with bushes and having one or two cocoa-nut +palms on each. These islets were very singular, and appeared as if +planted expressly for the purpose of marking the channel into the +lagoon. Our captain was making for one of these openings the day +we were wrecked, and would have reached it too, I doubt not, had +not the rudder been torn away. Within the lagoon were several +pretty, low coral islands, just opposite our encampment; and, +immediately beyond these, out at sea, lay about a dozen other +islands, at various distances, from half a mile to ten miles; all +of them, as far as we could discern, smaller than ours and +apparently uninhabited. They seemed to be low coral islands, +raised but little above the sea, yet covered with cocoa-nut trees. + +All this we noted, and a great deal more, while we sat on the top +of the mountain. After we had satisfied ourselves we prepared to +return; but here again we discovered traces of the presence of man. +These were a pole or staff and one or two pieces of wood which had +been squared with an axe. All of these were, however, very much +decayed, and they had evidently not been touched for many years. + +Full of these discoveries we returned to our encampment. On the +way we fell in with the traces of some four-footed animal, but +whether old or of recent date none of us were able to guess. This +also tended to raise our hopes of obtaining some animal food on the +island, so we reached home in good spirits, quite prepared for +supper, and highly satisfied with our excursion. + +After much discussion, in which Peterkin took the lead, we came to +the conclusion that the island was uninhabited, and went to bed. + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + + +Jack's ingenuity - We get into difficulties about fishing, and get +out of them by a method which gives us a cold bath - Horrible +encounter with a shark. + + +FOR several days after the excursion related in the last chapter we +did not wander far from our encampment, but gave ourselves up to +forming plans for the future and making our present abode +comfortable. + +There were various causes that induced this state of comparative +inaction. In the first place, although everything around us was so +delightful, and we could without difficulty obtain all that we +required for our bodily comfort, we did not quite like the idea of +settling down here for the rest of our lives, far away from our +friends and our native land. To set energetically about +preparations for a permanent residence seemed so like making up our +minds to saying adieu to home and friends for ever, that we tacitly +shrank from it and put off our preparations, for one reason and +another, as long as we could. Then there was a little uncertainty +still as to there being natives on the island, and we entertained a +kind of faint hope that a ship might come and take us off. But as +day after day passed, and neither savages nor ships appeared, we +gave up all hope of an early deliverance and set diligently to work +at our homestead. + +During this time, however, we had not been altogether idle. We +made several experiments in cooking the cocoa-nut, most of which +did not improve it. Then we removed our goods, and took up our +abode in the cave, but found the change so bad that we returned +gladly to the bower. Besides this we bathed very frequently, and +talked a great deal; at least Jack and Peterkin did, - I listened. +Among other useful things, Jack, who was ever the most active and +diligent, converted about three inches of the hoop-iron into an +excellent knife. First he beat it quite flat with the axe. Then +he made a rude handle, and tied the hoop-iron to it with our piece +of whip-cord, and ground it to an edge on a piece of sand-stone. +When it was finished he used it to shape a better handle, to which +he fixed it with a strip of his cotton handkerchief; - in which +operation he had, as Peterkin pointed out, torn off one of Lord +Nelson's noses. However, the whip-cord, thus set free, was used by +Peterkin as a fishing line. He merely tied a piece of oyster to +the end of it. This the fish were allowed to swallow, and then +they were pulled quickly ashore. But as the line was very short +and we had no boat, the fish we caught were exceedingly small. + +One day Peterkin came up from the beach, where he had been angling, +and said in a very cross tone, "I'll tell you what, Jack, I'm not +going to be humbugged with catching such contemptible things any +longer. I want you to swim out with me on your back, and let me +fish in deep water!" + +"Dear me, Peterkin," replied Jack, "I had no idea you were taking +the thing so much to heart, else I would have got you out of that +difficulty long ago. Let me see," - and Jack looked down at a +piece of timber on which he had been labouring, with a peculiar +gaze of abstraction, which he always assumed when trying to invent +or discover anything. + +"What say you to building a boat?" he inquired, looking up hastily. + +"Take far too long," was the reply; "can't be bothered waiting. I +want to begin at once!" + +Again Jack considered. "I have it!" he cried. "We'll fell a large +tree and launch the trunk of it in the water, so that when you want +to fish you've nothing to do but to swim out to it." + +"Would not a small raft do better?" said I. + +"Much better; but we have no ropes to bind it together with. +Perhaps we may find something hereafter that will do as well, but, +in the meantime, let us try the tree." + +This was agreed on, so we started off to a spot not far distant, +where we knew of a tree that would suit us, which grew near the +water's edge. As soon as we reached it Jack threw off his coat, +and, wielding the axe with his sturdy arms, hacked and hewed at it +for a quarter of an hour without stopping. Then he paused, and, +while he sat down to rest, I continued the work. Then Peterkin +made a vigorous attack on it, so that when Jack renewed his +powerful blows, a few minutes cutting brought it down with a +terrible crash. + +"Hurrah! now for it," cried Jack; "let us off with its head." + +So saying he began to cut through the stem again, at about six +yards from the thick end. This done, he cut three strong, short +poles or levers from the stout branches, with which to roll the log +down the beach into the sea; for, as it was nearly two feet thick +at the large end, we could not move it without such helps. With +the levers, however, we rolled it slowly into the sea. + +Having been thus successful in launching our vessel, we next shaped +the levers into rude oars or paddles, and then attempted to embark. +This was easy enough to do; but, after seating ourselves astride +the log, it was with the utmost difficulty we kept it from rolling +round and plunging us into the water. Not that we minded that +much; but we preferred, if possible, to fish in dry clothes. To be +sure, our trousers were necessarily wet, as our legs were dangling +in the water on each side of the log; but, as they could be easily +dried, we did not care. After half an hour's practice, we became +expert enough to keep our balance pretty steadily. Then Peterkin +laid down his paddle, and having baited his line with a whole +oyster, dropt it into deep water. + +"Now, then, Jack," said he, "be cautious; steer clear o' that sea- +weed. There; that's it; gently, now, gently. I see a fellow at +least a foot long down there, coming to - ha! that's it! Oh! +bother, he's off." + +"Did he bite?" said Jack, urging the log onwards a little with his +paddle. + +"Bite? ay! He took it into his mouth, but the moment I began to +haul he opened his jaws and let it out again." + +"Let him swallow it next time," said Jack, laughing at the +melancholy expression of Peterkin's visage. + +"There he's again," cried Peterkin, his eyes flashing with +excitement. "Look out! Now then! No! Yes! No! Why, the brute +WON'T swallow it!" + +"Try to haul him up by the mouth, then," cried Jack. "Do it +gently." + +A heavy sigh and a look of blank despair showed that poor Peterkin +had tried and failed again. + +"Never mind, lad," said Jack, in a voice of sympathy; "we'll move +on, and offer it to some other fish." So saying, Jack plied his +paddle; but scarcely had he moved from the spot, when a fish with +an enormous head and a little body darted from under a rock and +swallowed the bait at once. + +"Got him this time, - that's a fact!" cried Peterkin, hauling in +the line. "He's swallowed the bait right down to his tail, I +declare. Oh what a thumper!" + +As the fish came struggling to the surface, we leaned forward to +see it, and overbalanced the log. Peterkin threw his arms round +the fish's neck; and, in another instant, we were all floundering +in the water! + +A shout of laughter burst from us as we rose to the surface like +three drowned rats, and seized hold of the log. We soon recovered +our position, and sat more warily, while Peterkin secured the fish, +which had well-nigh escaped in the midst of our struggles. It was +little worth having, however; but, as Peterkin remarked, it was +better than the smouts he had been catching for the last two or +three days; so we laid it on the log before us, and having re- +baited the line, dropt it in again for another. + +Now, while we were thus intent upon our sport, our attention was +suddenly attracted by a ripple on the sea, just a few yards away +from us. Peterkin shouted to us to paddle in that direction, as he +thought it was a big fish, and we might have a chance of catching +it. But Jack, instead of complying, said, in a deep, earnest tone +of voice, which I never before heard him use, - + +"Haul up your line, Peterkin; seize your paddle; quick, - it's a +shark!" + +The horror with which we heard this may well be imagined, for it +must be remembered that our legs were hanging down in the water, +and we could not venture to pull them up without upsetting the log. +Peterkin instantly hauled up the line; and, grasping his paddle, +exerted himself to the utmost, while we also did our best to make +for shore. But we were a good way off, and the log being, as I +have before said, very heavy, moved but slowly through the water. +We now saw the shark quite distinctly swimming round and round us, +its sharp fin every now and then protruding above the water. From +its active and unsteady motions, Jack knew it was making up its +mind to attack us, so he urged us vehemently to paddle for our +lives, while he himself set us the example. Suddenly he shouted +"Look out! - there he comes!" and in a second we saw the monstrous +fish dive close under us, and turn half over on his side. But we +all made a great commotion with our paddles, which no doubt +frightened it away for that time, as we saw it immediately after +circling round us as before. + +"Throw the fish to him," cried Jack, in a quick, suppressed voice; +"we'll make the shore in time yet if we can keep him off for a few +minutes." + +Peterkin stopped one instant to obey the command, and then plied +his paddle again with all his might. No sooner had the fish fallen +on the water than we observed the shark to sink. In another second +we saw its white breast rising; for sharks always turn over on +their sides when about to seize their prey, their mouths being not +at the point of their heads like those of other fish, but, as it +were, under their chins. In another moment his snout rose above +the water, - his wide jaws, armed with a terrific double row of +teeth, appeared. The dead fish was engulfed, and the shark sank +out of sight. But Jack was mistaken in supposing that it would be +satisfied. In a very few minutes it returned to us, and its quick +motions led us to fear that it would attack us at once. + +"Stop paddling," cried Jack suddenly. "I see it coming up behind +us. Now, obey my orders quickly. Our lives may depend on it +Ralph. Peterkin, do your best to BALANCE THE LOG. Don't look out +for the shark. Don't glance behind you. Do nothing but balance +the log." + +Peterkin and I instantly did as we were ordered, being only too +glad to do anything that afforded us a chance or a hope of escape, +for we had implicit confidence in Jack's courage and wisdom. For a +few seconds, that seemed long minutes to my mind, we sat thus +silently; but I could not resist glancing backward, despite the +orders to the contrary. On doing so, I saw Jack sitting rigid like +a statue, with his paddle raised, his lips compressed, and his eye- +brows bent over his eyes, which glared savagely from beneath them +down into the water. I also saw the shark, to my horror, quite +close under the log, in the act of darting towards Jack's foot. I +could scarce suppress a cry on beholding this. In another moment +the shark rose. Jack drew his leg suddenly from the water, and +threw it over the log. The monster's snout rubbed against the log +as it passed, and revealed its hideous jaws, into which Jack +instantly plunged the paddle, and thrust it down its throat. So +violent was the act that Jack rose to his feet in performing it; +the log was thereby rolled completely over, and we were once more +plunged into the water. We all rose, spluttering and gasping, in a +moment. + +"Now then, strike out for shore," cried Jack. "Here, Peterkin, +catch hold of my collar, and kick out with a will." + +Peterkin did as he was desired, and Jack struck out with such force +that he cut through the water like a boat; while I, being free from +all encumbrance, succeeded in keeping up with him. As we had by +this time drawn pretty near to the shore, a few minutes more +sufficed to carry us into shallow water; and, finally, we landed in +safety, though very much exhausted, and not a little frightened by +our terrible adventure. + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + + +The beauties of the bottom of the sea tempt Peterkin to dive - How +he did it - More difficulties overcome - The water garden - Curious +creatures of the sea - The tank - Candles missed very much, and the +candle-nut tree discovered - Wonderful account of Peterkin's first +voyage - Cloth found growing on a tree - A plan projected, and arms +prepared for offence and defence - A dreadful cry. + + +OUR encounter with the shark was the first great danger that had +befallen us since landing on this island, and we felt very +seriously affected by it, especially when we considered that we had +so often unwittingly incurred the same danger before while bathing. +We were now forced to take to fishing again in the shallow water, +until we should succeed in constructing a raft. What troubled us +most, however, was, that we were compelled to forego our morning +swimming excursions. We did, indeed, continue to enjoy our bathe +in the shallow water, but Jack and I found that one great source of +our enjoyment was gone, when we could no longer dive down among the +beautiful coral groves at the bottom of the lagoon. We had come to +be so fond of this exercise, and to take such an interest in +watching the formations of coral and the gambols of the many +beautiful fish amongst the forests of red and green sea-weeds, that +we had become quite familiar with the appearance of the fish and +the localities that they chiefly haunted. We had also become +expert divers. But we made it a rule never to stay long under +water at a time. Jack told me that to do so often was bad for the +lungs, and, instead of affording us enjoyment, would ere long do us +a serious injury. So we never stayed at the bottom as long as we +might have done, but came up frequently to the top for fresh air, +and dived down again immediately. Sometimes, when Jack happened to +be in a humorous frame, he would seat himself at the bottom of the +sea on one of the brain corals, as if he were seated on a large +paddock-stool, and then make faces at me, in order, if possible, to +make me laugh under water. At first, when he took me unawares, he +nearly succeeded, and I had to shoot to the surface in order to +laugh; but afterwards I became aware of his intentions, and, being +naturally of a grave disposition, I had no difficulty in +restraining myself. I used often to wonder how poor Peterkin would +have liked to be with us; and he sometimes expressed much regret at +being unable to join us. I used to do my best to gratify him, poor +fellow, by relating all the wonders that we saw; but this, instead +of satisfying, seemed only to whet his curiosity the more, so one +day we prevailed on him to try to go down with us. But, although a +brave boy in every other way, Peterkin was very nervous in the +water, and it was with difficulty we got him to consent to be taken +down, for he could never have managed to push himself down to the +bottom without assistance. But no sooner had we pulled him down a +yard or so into the deep clear water, than he began to struggle and +kick violently, so we were forced to let him go, when he rose out +of the water like a cork, gave a loud gasp and a frightful roar, +and struck out for the land with the utmost possible haste. + +Now, all this pleasure we were to forego, and when we thought +thereon, Jack and I felt very much depressed in our spirits. I +could see, also, that Peterkin grieved and sympathized with us, +for, when talking about this matter, he refrained from jesting and +bantering us upon it. + +As, however, a man's difficulties usually set him upon devising +methods to overcome them, whereby he often discovers better things +than those he may have lost, so this our difficulty induced us to +think of searching for a large pool among the rocks, where the +water should be deep enough for diving yet so surrounded by rocks +as to prevent sharks from getting at us. And such a pool we +afterwards found, which proved to be very much better than our most +sanguine hopes anticipated. It was situated not more than ten +minutes' walk from our camp, and was in the form of a small deep +bay or basin, the entrance to which, besides being narrow, was so +shallow that no fish so large as a shark could get in, at least not +unless he should be a remarkably thin one. + +Inside of this basin, which we called our Water Garden, the coral +formations were much more wonderful, and the sea-weed plants far +more lovely and vividly coloured, than in the lagoon itself. And +the water was so clear and still, that, although very deep, you +could see the minutest object at the bottom. Besides this, there +was a ledge of rock which overhung the basin at its deepest part, +from which we could dive pleasantly and whereon Peterkin could sit +and see not only all the wonders I had described to him, but also +see Jack and me creeping amongst the marine shrubbery at the +bottom, like, as - he expressed it, - "two great white sea- +monsters." During these excursions of ours to the bottom of the +sea, we began to get an insight into the manners and customs of its +inhabitants, and to make discoveries of wonderful things, the like +of which we never before conceived. Among other things, we were +deeply interested with the operations of the little coral insect +which, I was informed by Jack, is supposed to have entirely +constructed many of the numerous islands in Pacific Ocean. And, +certainly, when we considered the great reef which these insects +had formed round the island on which we were cast, and observed +their ceaseless activity in building their myriad cells, it did at +first seem as if this might be true; but then, again, when I looked +at the mountains of the island, and reflected that there were +thousands of such, many of them much higher, in the South Seas, I +doubted that there must be some mistake here. But more of this +hereafter. + +I also became much taken up with the manners and appearance of the +anemones, and star-fish, and crabs, and sea-urchins, and such-like +creatures; and was not content with watching those I saw during my +dives in the Water Garden, but I must needs scoop out a hole in the +coral rock close to it, which I filled with salt water, and stocked +with sundry specimens of anemones and shell-fish, in order to watch +more closely how they were in the habit of passing their time. Our +burning-glass also now became a great treasure to me, as it enabled +me to magnify, and so to perceive more clearly the forms and +actions of these curious creatures of the deep. + +Having now got ourselves into a very comfortable condition, we +began to talk of a project which we had long had in contemplation, +- namely, to travel entirely round the island; in order, first, to +ascertain whether it contained any other productions which might be +useful to us; and, second, to see whether there might be any place +more convenient and suitable for our permanent residence than that +on which we were now encamped. Not that we were in any degree +dissatisfied with it; on the contrary, we entertained quite a home- +feeling to our bower and its neighbourhood; but if a better place +did exist, there was no reason why we should not make use of it. +At any rate, it would be well to know of its existence. + +We had much earnest talk over this matter. But Jack proposed that, +before undertaking such an excursion, we should supply ourselves +with good defensive arms, for, as we intended not only to go round +all the shore, but to ascend most of the valleys, before returning +home, we should be likely to meet in with, he would not say +dangers, but, at least, with everything that existed on the island, +whatever that might be. + +"Besides," said Jack, "it won't do for us to live on cocoa-nuts and +oysters always. No doubt they are very excellent in their way, but +I think a little animal food, now and then, would be agreeable as +well as good for us; and as there are many small birds among the +trees, some of which are probably very good to eat, I think it +would be a capital plan to make bows and arrows, with which we +could easily knock them over." + +"First rate!" cried Peterkin. "You will make the bows, Jack, and +I'll try my hand at the arrows. The fact is, I'm quite tired of +throwing stones at the birds. I began the very day we landed, I +think, and have persevered up to the present time, but I've never +hit anything yet." + +"You forget," said I, "you hit me one day on the shin." + +"Ah, true," replied Peterkin, "and a precious shindy you kicked up +in consequence. But you were at least four yards away from the +impudent paroquet I aimed at; so you see what a horribly bad shot I +am." + +"But," said I, "Jack, you cannot make three bows and arrows before +to-morrow, and would it not be a pity to waste time, now that we +have made up our minds to go on this expedition? Suppose that you +make one bow and arrow for yourself, and we can take our clubs?" + +"That's true, Ralph. The day is pretty far advanced, and I doubt +if I can make even one bow before dark. To be sure I might work by +fire-light, after the sun goes down." + +We had, up to this time, been in the habit of going to bed with the +sun, as we had no pressing call to work o' nights; and, indeed, our +work during the day was usually hard enough, - what between +fishing, and improving our bower, and diving in the Water Garden, +and rambling in the woods; so that, when night came, we were +usually very glad to retire to our beds. But now that we had a +desire to work at night, we felt a wish for candles. + +"Won't a good blazing fire give you light enough?" inquired +Peterkin. + +"Yes," replied Jack, "quite enough; but then it will give us a +great deal more than enough of heat in this warm climate of ours." + +"True," said Peterkin; "I forgot that. It would roast us." + +"Well, as you're always doing that at any rate," remarked Jack, "we +could scarcely call it a change. But the fact is, I've been +thinking over this subject before. There is a certain nut growing +in these islands which is called the candle-nut, because the +natives use it instead of candles, and I know all about it, and how +to prepare it for burning - " + +"Then why don't you do it?" interrupted Peterkin. "Why have you +kept us in the dark so long, you vile philosopher?" + +"Because," said Jack, "I have not seen the tree yet, and I'm not +sure that I should know either the tree or the nuts if I did see +them. You see, I forget the description." + +"Ah! that's just the way with me," said Peterkin with a deep sigh. +"I never could keep in my mind for half an hour the few +descriptions I ever attempted to remember. The very first voyage I +ever made was caused by my mistaking a description, or forgetting +it, which is the same thing. And a horrible voyage it was. I had +to fight with the captain the whole way out, and made the homeward +voyage by swimming!" + +"Come, Peterkin," said I, "you can't get even ME to believe that." + +"Perhaps not, but it's true, notwithstanding," returned Peterkin, +pretending to be hurt at my doubting his word. + +"Let us hear how it happened," said Jack, while a good-natured +smile overspread his face. + +"Well, you must know," began Peterkin, "that the very day before I +went to sea, I was greatly taken up with a game at hockey, which I +was playing with my old school-fellows for the last time before +leaving them. You see I was young then, Ralph." Peterkin gazed, +in an abstracted and melancholy manner, out to sea! "Well, in the +midst of the game, my uncle, who had taken all the bother and +trouble of getting me bound 'prentice and rigged out, came and took +me aside, and told me that he was called suddenly away from home, +and would not be able to see me aboard, as he had intended. +'However,' said he, 'the captain knows you are coming, so that's +not of much consequence; but as you'll have to find the ship +yourself, you must remember her name and description. D'ye hear, +boy?' I certainly did hear, but I'm afraid I did not understand, +for my mind was so taken up with the game, which I saw my side was +losing, that I began to grow impatient, and the moment my uncle +finished his description of the ship, and bade me good-bye, I +bolted back to my game, with only a confused idea of three masts, +and a green painted tafferel, and a gilt figure-head of Hercules +with his club at the bow. Next day I was so much cast down with +everybody saying good-bye, and a lot o' my female friends cryin' +horribly over me, that I did not start for the harbour, where the +ship was lying among a thousand others, till it was almost too +late. So I had to run the whole way. When I reached the pier, +there were so many masts, and so much confusion, that I felt quite +humblebumbled in my faculties. 'Now,' said I to myself, 'Peterkin, +you're in a fix.' Then I fancied I saw a gilt figure-head and +three masts, belonging to a ship just about to start; so I darted +on board, but speedily jumped on shore again, when I found that two +of the masts belonged to another vessel, and the figurehead to a +third! At last I caught sight of what I made sure was it, - a fine +large vessel just casting off her moorings. The tafferel was +green. Three masts, - yes, that must be it, - and the gilt figure- +head of Hercules. To be sure it had a three-pronged pitchfork in +its hand instead of a club; but that might be my uncle's mistake; +or perhaps Hercules sometimes varied his weapons. 'Cast off!' +roared a voice from the quarter-deck. 'Hold on!' cried I, rushing +frantically through the crowd. 'Hold on! hold on!' repeated some +of the bystanders, while the men at the ropes delayed for a minute. +This threw the captain into a frightful rage; for some of his +friends had come down to see him off, and having his orders +contradicted so flatly was too much for him. However, the delay +was sufficient. I took a race and a good leap; the ropes were cast +off; the steam-tug gave a puff, and we started. Suddenly the +captain was up to me: 'Where did you come from, you scamp, and +what do you want here?' + +"'Please, sir,' said I, touching my cap, 'I'm you're new 'prentice +come aboard.' + +"'New 'Prentice,' said he, stamping, 'I've got no new 'prentice. +My boys are all aboard already. This is a trick, you young +blackguard. You've run away, you have;' and the captain stamped +about the deck and swore dreadfully; for, you see, the thought of +having to stop the ship and lower a boat and lose half an hour, all +for the slake of sending a small boy ashore, seemed to make him +very angry. Besides, it was blowin' fresh outside the harbour, so +that, to have let the steamer alongside to put me into it was no +easy job. Just as we were passing the pier-head, where several +boats were rowing into harbour, the captain came up to me, - + +"'You've run away, you blackguard,' he said, giving me a box on the +ear. + +"'No I haven't,' said I, angrily; for the box was by no means a +light one. + +"Hark'ee, boy, can you swim?' + +"'Yes,' said I. + +"'Then do it,' and, seizing me by my trousers and the nape of my +neck, he tossed me over the side into the sea. The fellows in the +boats at the end of the pier, backed their oars on seeing this; but +observing that I could swim, they allowed me to make the best of my +way to the pier-head. So, you see, Ralph, that I really did swim +my first homeward voyage." + +Jack laughed and patted Peterkin on the shoulder. "But tell us +about the candle-nut tree," said I; "you were talking about it." + +"Very true," said Jack, "but I fear I can remember little about it. +I believe the nut is about the size of a walnut; and I think that +the leaves are white, but I am not sure." + +"Eh! ha! hum!" exclaimed Peterkin, "I saw a tree answering to that +description this very day." + +"Did you?" cried Jack. "Is it far from this?" + +"No, not half a mile." + +"Then lead me to it," said Jack, seizing his axe. + +In a few minutes we were all three pushing through the underwood of +the forest, headed by Peterkin. + +We soon came to the tree in question, which, after Jack had closely +examined it, we concluded must be the candle-nut tree. Its leaves +were of a beautiful silvery white, and formed a fine contrast to +the dark-green foliage of the surrounding trees. We immediately +filled our pockets with the nuts, after which Jack said, - + +"Now, Peterkin, climb that cocoa-nut tree and cut me one of the +long branches." + +This was soon done, but it cost some trouble, for the stem was very +high, and as Peterkin usually pulled nuts from the younger trees, +he was not much accustomed to climbing the high ones. The leaf or +branch was a very large one, and we were surprised at its size and +strength. Viewed from a little distance, the cocoa-nut tree seems +to be a tall, straight stem, without a single branch except at the +top, where there is a tuft of feathery-looking leaves, that seem to +wave like soft plumes in the wind. But when we saw one of these +leaves or branches at our feet, we found it to be a strong stalk, +about fifteen feet long, with a number of narrow, pointed leaflets +ranged alternately on each side. But what seemed to us the most +wonderful thing about it was a curious substance resembling cloth, +which was wrapped round the thick end of the stalk, where it had +been cut from the tree. Peterkin told us that he had the greatest +difficulty in separating the branch from the stem, on account of +this substance, as it was wrapped quite round the tree, and, he +observed, round all the other branches, thus forming a strong +support to the large leaves while exposed to high winds. When I +call this substance cloth I do not exaggerate. Indeed, with regard +to all the things I saw during my eventful career in the South +Seas, I have been exceedingly careful not to exaggerate, or in any +way to mislead or deceive my readers. This cloth, I say, was +remarkably like to coarse brown cotton cloth. It had a seam or +fibre down the centre of it, from which diverged other fibres, +about the size of a bristle. There were two layers of these +fibres, very long and tough, the one layer crossing the other +obliquely, and the whole was cemented together with a still finer +fibrous and adhesive substance. When we regarded it attentively, +we could with difficulty believe that it had not been woven by +human hands. This remarkable piece of cloth we stripped carefully +off, and found it to be above two feet long, by a foot broad, and +we carried it home with us as a great prize. + +Jack now took one of the leaflets, and, cutting out the central +spine or stalk, hurried back with it to our camp. Having made a +small fire, he baked the nuts slightly, and then pealed off the +husks. After this he wished to bore a hole in them, which, not +having anything better at hand at the time, he did with the point +of our useless pencil-case. Then he strung them on the cocoa-nut +spine, and on putting a light to the topmost nut, we found to our +joy that it burned with a clear, beautiful flame; upon seeing +which, Peterkin sprang up and danced round the fire for at least +five minutes in the excess of his satisfaction. + +"Now lads," said Jack, extinguishing our candle, the sun will set +in an hour, so we have no time to lose. "I shall go and cut a +young tree to make my bow out of, and you had better each of you go +and select good strong sticks for clubs, and we'll set to work at +them after dark." + +So saying he shouldered his axe and went off, followed by Peterkin, +while I took up the piece of newly discovered cloth, and fell to +examining its structure. So engrossed was I in this that I was +still sitting in the same attitude and occupation when my +companions returned. + +"I told you so!" cried Peterkin, with a loud laugh. "Oh, Ralph, +you're incorrigible. See, there's a club for you. I was sure, +when we left you looking at that bit of stuff, that we would find +you poring over it when we came back, so I just cut a club for you +as well as for myself." + +"Thank you, Peterkin," said I. "It was kind of you to do that, +instead of scolding me for a lazy fellow, as I confess I deserve." + +"Oh! as to that," returned Peterkin, "I'll blow you up yet, if you +wish it - only it would be of no use if I did, for you're a perfect +mule!" + +As it was now getting dark we lighted our candle, and placing it in +a holder made of two crossing branches, inside of our bower, we +seated ourselves on our leafy beds and began to work. + +"I intend to appropriate the bow for my own use," said Jack, +chipping the piece of wood he had brought with his axe. "I used to +be a pretty fair shot once. But what's that you're doing?" he +added, looking at Peterkin, who had drawn the end of a long pole +into the tent, and was endeavouring to fit a small piece of the +hoop-iron to the end of it. + +"I'm going to enlist into the Lancers," answered Peterkin. "You +see, Jack, I find the club rather an unwieldy instrument for my +delicately-formed muscles, and I flatter myself I shall do more +execution with a spear." + +"Well, if length constitutes power," said Jack, "you'll certainly +be invincible." + +The pole which Peterkin had cut was full twelve feet long, being a +very strong but light and tough young tree, which merely required +thinning at the butt to be a serviceable weapon. + +"That's a very good idea," said I. + +"Which - this?" inquired Peterkin, pointing to the spear. + +"Yes;" I replied. + +"Humph!" said he; "you'd find it a pretty tough and matter-of-fact +idea, if you had it stuck through your gizzard, old boy!" + +"I mean the idea of making it is a good one," said I, laughing. +"And, now I think of it, I'll change my plan, too. I don't think +much of a club, so I'll make me a sling out of this piece of cloth. +I used to be very fond of slinging, ever since I read of David +slaying Goliath the Philistine, and I was once thought to be expert +at it." + +So I set to work to manufacture a sling. For a long time we all +worked very busily without speaking. At length Peterkin looked up: +"I say, Jack, I'm sorry to say I must apply to you for another +strip of your handkerchief, to tie on this rascally head with. +It's pretty well torn at any rate, so you won't miss it." + +Jack proceeded to comply with this request when Peterkin suddenly +laid his hand on his arm and arrested him. + +"Hist, man," said he, "be tender; you should never be needlessly +cruel if you can help it. Do try to shave past Lord Nelson's mouth +without tearing it, if possible! Thanks. There are plenty more +handkerchiefs on the cocoa-nut trees." + +Poor Peterkin! with what pleasant feelings I recall and record his +jests and humorous sayings now! + +While we were thus engaged, we were startled by a distant but most +strange and horrible cry. It seemed to come from the sea, but was +so far away that we could not clearly distinguish its precise +direction. Rushing out of our bower, we hastened down to the beach +and stayed to listen. Again it came quite loud and distinct on the +night air, - a prolonged, hideous cry, something like the braying +of an ass. The moon had risen, and we could see the islands in and +beyond the lagoon quite plainly, but there was no object visible to +account for such a cry. A strong gust of wind was blowing from the +point whence the sound came, but this died away while we were +gazing out to sea. + +"What can it be?" said Peterkin, in a low whisper, while we all +involuntarily crept closer to each other. + +"Do you know," said Jack, "I have heard that mysterious sound twice +before, but never so loud as to-night. Indeed it was so faint that +I thought I must have merely fancied it, so, as I did not wish to +alarm you, I said nothing about it." + +We listened for a long time for the sound again, but as it did not +come, we returned to the bower and resumed our work. + +"Very strange," said Peterkin, quite gravely. "Do you believe in +ghosts, Ralph?" + +"No," I answered, "I do not. Nevertheless I must confess that +strange, unaccountable sounds, such as we have just heard, make me +feel a little uneasy." + +"What say you to it, Jack?" + +"I neither believe in ghosts nor feel uneasy," he replied. "I +never saw a ghost myself, and I never met with any one who had; and +I have generally found that strange and unaccountable things have +almost always been accounted for, and found to be quite simple, on +close examination. I certainly can't imagine what THAT sound is; +but I'm quite sure I shall find out before long, - and if it's a +ghost I'll - " + +"Eat it," cried Peterkin. + +"Yes, I'll eat it! Now, then, my bow and two arrows are finished; +so if you're ready we had better turn in." + +By this time Peterkin had thinned down his spear and tied an iron +point very cleverly to the end of it; I had formed a sling, the +lines of which were composed of thin strips of the cocoa-nut cloth, +plaited; and Jack had made a stout bow, nearly five feet long, with +two arrows, feathered with two or three large plumes which some +bird had dropt. They had no barbs, but Jack said that if arrows +were well feathered, they did not require iron points, but would +fly quite well if merely sharpened at the point; which I did not +know before. + +"A feathered arrow without a barb," said he, "is a good weapon, but +a barbed arrow without feathers is utterly useless." + +The string of the bow was formed of our piece of whip-cord, part of +which, as he did not like to cut it, was rolled round the bow. + +Although thus prepared for a start on the morrow, we thought it +wise to exercise ourselves a little in the use of our weapons +before starting, so we spent the whole of the next day in +practising. And it was well we did so, for we found that our arms +were very imperfect, and that we were far from perfect in the use +of them. First, Jack found that the bow was much too strong, and +he had to thin it. Also the spear was much too heavy, and so had +to be reduced in thickness, although nothing would induce Peterkin +to have it shortened. My sling answered very well, but I had +fallen so much out of practice that my first stone knocked off +Peterkin's hat, and narrowly missed making a second Goliath of him. +However, after having spent the whole day in diligent practice, we +began to find some of our former expertness returning - at least +Jack and I did. As for Peterkin, being naturally a neat-handed +boy, he soon handled his spear well, and could run full tilt at a +cocoa nut, and hit it with great precision once out of every five +times. + +But I feel satisfied that we owed much of our rapid success to the +unflagging energy of Jack, who insisted that, since we had made him +Captain, we should obey him; and he kept us at work from morning +till night, perseveringly, at the same thing. Peterkin wished very +much to run about and stick his spear into everything he passed; +but Jack put up a cocoa nut, and would not let him leave off +running at that for a moment, except when he wanted to rest. We +laughed at Jack for this, but we were both convinced that it did us +much good. + +That night we examined and repaired our arms ere we lay down to +rest, although we were much fatigued, in order that we might be in +readiness to set out on our expedition at daylight on the following +morning. + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + + +Prepare for a journey round the island - Sagacious reflections - +Mysterious appearances and startling occurrences. + + +SCARCELY had the sun shot its first ray across the bosom of the +broad Pacific, when Jack sprang to his feet, and, hallooing in +Peterkin's ear to awaken him, ran down the beach to take his +customary dip in the sea. We did not, as was our wont, bathe that +morning in our Water Garden, but, in order to save time, refreshed +ourselves in the shallow water just opposite the bower. Our +breakfast was also despatched without loss of time, and in less +than an hour afterwards all our preparations for the journey were +completed. + +In addition to his ordinary dress, Jack tied a belt of cocoa-nut +cloth round his waist, into which he thrust the axe. I was also +advised to put on a belt and carry a short cudgel or bludgeon in +it; for, as Jack truly remarked, the sling would be of little use +if we should chance to come to close quarters with any wild animal. +As for Peterkin, notwithstanding that he carried such a long, and I +must add, frightful-looking spear over his shoulder, we could not +prevail on him to leave his club behind; "for," said he, "a spear +at close quarters is not worth a button." I must say that it +seemed to me that the club was, to use his own style of language, +not worth a button-hole; for it was all knotted over at the head, +something like the club which I remember to have observed in +picture-books of Jack the Giant Killer, besides being so heavy that +he required to grasp it with both hands in order to wield it at +all. However, he took it with him, and, in this manner we set out +upon our travels. + +We did not consider it necessary to carry any food with us, as we +knew that wherever we went we should be certain to fall in with +cocoa-nut trees; having which, we were amply supplied, as Peterkin +said, with meat and drink and pocket-handkerchiefs! I took the +precaution, however, to put the burning-glass into my pocket, lest +we should want fire. + +The morning was exceeding lovely. It was one of that very still +and peaceful sort which made the few noises that we heard seem to +be QUIET noises. I know no other way of expressing this idea. +Noises which so far from interrupting the universal tranquillity of +earth, sea, and sky - rather tended to reveal to us how quiet the +world around us really was. Such sounds as I refer to were, the +peculiarly melancholy - yet, it seemed to me, cheerful - plaint of +sea-birds floating on the glassy water, or sailing in the sky, also +the subdued twittering of little birds among the bushes, the faint +ripples on the beach, and the solemn boom of the surf upon the +distant coral reef. We felt very glad in our hearts as we walked +along the sands side by side. For my part, I felt so deeply +overjoyed, that I was surprised at my own sensations, and fell into +a reverie upon the causes of happiness. I came to the conclusion +that a state of profound peace and repose, both in regard to +outward objects and within the soul, is the happiest condition in +which man can be placed; for, although I had many a time been most +joyful and happy when engaged in bustling, energetic, active +pursuits or amusements, I never found that such joy or satisfaction +was so deep or so pleasant to reflect upon as that which I now +experienced. And I was the more confirmed in this opinion when I +observed, and, indeed, was told by himself, that Peterkin's +happiness was also very great; yet he did not express this by +dancing, as was his wont, nor did he give so much as a single +shout, but walked quietly between us with his eye sparkling, and a +joyful smile upon his countenance. My reader must not suppose that +I thought all this in the clear and methodical manner in which I +have set it down here. These thoughts did, indeed, pass through my +mind, but they did so in a very confused and indefinite manner, for +I was young at that time, and not much given to deep reflections. +Neither did I consider that the peace whereof I write is not to be +found in this world - at least in its perfection, although I have +since learned that by religion a man may attain to a very great +degree of it. + +I have said that Peterkin walked along the sands between us. We +had two ways of walking together about our island. When we +travelled through the woods, we always did so in single file, as by +this method we advanced with greater facility, the one treading in +the other's footsteps. In such cases Jack always took the lead, +Peterkin followed, and I brought up the rear. But when we +travelled along the sands, which extended almost in an unbroken +line of glistening white round the island, we marched abreast, as +we found this method more sociable, and every way more pleasant. +Jack, being the tallest, walked next the sea, and Peterkin marched +between us, as by this arrangement either of us could talk to him +or he to us, while if Jack and I happened to wish to converse +together, we could conveniently do so over Peterkin's head. +Peterkin used to say, in reference to this arrangement, that had he +been as tall as either of us, our order of march might have been +the same, for, as Jack often used to scold him for letting +everything we said to him pass in at one ear and out at the other, +his head could of course form no interruption to our discourse. + +We were now fairly started. Half a mile's walk conveyed us round a +bend in the land which shut out our bower from view, and for some +time we advanced at a brisk pace without speaking, though our eyes +were not idle, but noted everything, in the woods, on the shore, or +in the sea, that was interesting. After passing the ridge of land +that formed one side of our valley - the Valley of the Wreck - we +beheld another small vale lying before us in all the luxuriant +loveliness of tropical vegetation. We had, indeed, seen it before +from the mountain-top, but we had no idea that it would turn out to +be so much more lovely when we were close to it. We were about to +commence the exploration of this valley, when Peterkin stopped us, +and directed our attention to a very remarkable appearance in +advance along the shore. + +"What's yon, think you?" said he, levelling his spear, as if he +expected an immediate attack from the object in question, though it +was full half a mile distant. + +As he spoke, there appeared a white column above the rocks, as if +of steam or spray. It rose upwards to a height of several feet, +and then disappeared. Had this been near the sea, we would not +have been so greatly surprised, as it might in that case have been +the surf, for at this part of the coast the coral reef approached +so near to the island that in some parts it almost joined it. +There was therefore no lagoon between, and the heavy surf of the +ocean beat almost up to the rocks. But this white column appeared +about fifty yards inland. The rocks at the place were rugged, and +they stretched across the sandy beach into the sea. Scarce had we +ceased expressing our surprise at this sight, when another column +flew upwards for a few seconds, not far from the spot where the +first had been seen, and disappeared; and so, at long irregular +intervals, these strange sights recurred. We were now quite sure +that the columns were watery or composed of spray, but what caused +them we could not guess, so we determined to go and see. + +In a few minutes we gained the spot, which was very rugged and +precipitous, and, moreover, quite damp with the falling of the +spray. We had much ado to pass over dry-shod. The ground also was +full of holes here and there. Now, while we stood anxiously +waiting for the re-appearance of these water-spouts, we heard a +low, rumbling sound near us, which quickly increased to a gargling +and hissing noise, and a moment afterwards a thick spout of water +burst upwards from a hole in the rock, and spouted into the air +with much violence, and so close to where Jack and I were standing +that it nearly touched us. We sprang to one side, but not before a +cloud of spray descended, and drenched us both to the skin. + +Peterkin, who was standing farther off, escaped with a few drops, +and burst into an uncontrollable fit of laughter on beholding our +miserable plight. + +"Mind your eye!" he shouted eagerly, "there goes another!" The +words were scarcely out of his mouth when there came up a spout +from another hole, which served us exactly in the same manner as +before. + +Peterkin now shrieked with laughter; but his merriment was abruptly +put a stop to by the gurgling noise occurring close to where he +stood. + +"Where'll it spout this time, I wonder?" he said, looking about +with some anxiety, and preparing to run. Suddenly there came a +loud hiss or snort; a fierce spout of water burst up between +Peterkin's legs, blew him off his feet, enveloped him in its spray, +and hurled him to the ground. He fell with so much violence that +we feared he must have broken some of his bones, and ran anxiously +to his assistance; but fortunately he had fallen on a clump of +tangled herbage, in which he lay sprawling in a most deplorable +condition. + +It was now our turn to laugh; but as we were not yet quite sure +that he was unhurt, and as we knew not when or where the next spout +might arise, we assisted him hastily to jump up and hurry from the +spot. + +I may here add, that although I am quite certain that the spout of +water was very strong, and that it blew Peterkin completely off his +legs, I am not quite certain of the exact height to which it lifted +him, being somewhat startled by the event, and blinded partially by +the spray, so that my power of observation was somewhat impaired +for the moment. + +"What's to be done now?" inquired Peterkin ruefully. + +"Make a fire, lad, and dry ourselves," replied Jack. + +"And here is material ready to our hand," said I, picking up a +dried branch of a tree, as we hurried up to the woods. + +In about an hour after this mishap our clothes were again dried. +While they were hanging up before the fire, we walked down to the +beach, and soon observed that these curious spouts took place +immediately after the fall of a huge wave, never before it; and, +moreover, that the spouts did not take place excepting when the +billow was an extremely large one. From this we concluded that +there must be a subterraneous channel in the rock into which the +water was driven by the larger waves, and finding no way of escape +except through these small holes, was thus forced up violently +through them. At any rate, we could not conceive any other reason +for these strange water-spouts, and as this seemed a very simple +and probable one, we forthwith adopted it. + +"I say, Ralph, what's that in the water? is it a shark?" said Jack, +just as we were about to quit the place. + +I immediately ran to the overhanging ledge of rock, from which he +was looking down into the sea, and bent over it. There I saw a +very faint pale object of a greenish colour, which seemed to move +slightly while I looked at it. + +"It's like a fish of some sort," said I. + +"Hallo, Peterkin!" cried Jack, "fetch your spear; here's work for +it." + +But when we tried to reach the object, the spear proved to be too +short. + +"There, now," said Peterkin with a sneer, "you were always telling +me it was too long." + +Jack now drove the spear forcibly towards the object, and let go +his hold; but, although it seemed to be well aimed, he must have +missed, for the handle soon rose again; and when the spear was +drawn up, there was the pale green object in exactly the same spot, +slowly moving its tail. + +"Very odd," said Jack. + +But although it was undoubtedly very odd, and, although Jack and +all of us plunged the spear at it repeatedly, we could neither hit +it nor drive it away, so we were compelled to continue our journey +without discovering what it was. I was very much perplexed at this +strange appearance in the water, and could not get it out of my +mind for a long time afterwards. However, I quieted myself by +resolving that I would pay a visit to it again at some more +convenient season. + + + +CHAPTER X. + + + +Make discovery of many excellent roots and fruits - The resources +of the Coral Island gradually unfolded - The banian-tree - Another +tree which is supported by natural planks - Water-fowl found - A +very remarkable discovery, and a very peculiar murder - We +luxuriate on the fat of the land. + + +OUR examination of the little valley proved to be altogether most +satisfactory. We found in it not only similar trees to those we +had already seen in our own valley, but also one or two others of a +different species. We had also the satisfaction of discovering a +peculiar vegetable, which Jack concluded must certainly be that of +which he had read as being very common among the South Sea +islanders, and which was named TARO. Also we found a large supply +of yams, and another root like a potato in appearance. As these +were all quite new to us, we regarded our lot as a most fortunate +one, in being thus cast on an island which was so prolific and so +well stored with all the necessaries of life. Long afterwards we +found out that this island of ours was no better in these respects +than thousands of other islands in those seas. Indeed, many of +them were much richer and more productive; but that did not render +us the less grateful for our present good fortune. We each put one +of these roots in our pocket, intending to use them for our supper; +of which more hereafter. We also saw many beautiful birds here, +and traces of some four-footed animal again. Meanwhile the sun +began to descend, so we returned to the shore, and pushed on round +the spouting rocks into the next valley. This was that valley of +which I have spoken as running across the entire island. It was by +far the largest and most beautiful that we had yet looked upon. +Here were trees of every shape and size and hue which it is +possible to conceive of, many of which we had not seen in the other +valleys; for, the stream in this valley being larger, and the mould +much richer than in the Valley of the Wreck, it was clothed with a +more luxuriant growth of trees and plants. Some trees were dark +glossy green, others of a rich and warm hue, contrasting well with +those of a pale light green, which were everywhere abundant. Among +these we recognised the broad dark heads of the bread-fruit, with +its golden fruit; the pure, silvery foliage of the candle-nut, and +several species which bore a strong resemblance to the pine; while +here and there, in groups and in single trees, rose the tall forms +of the cocoa-nut palms, spreading abroad, and waving their graceful +plumes high above all the rest, as if they were a superior race of +stately giants keeping guard over these luxuriant forests. Oh! it +was a most enchanting scene, and I thanked God for having created +such delightful spots for the use of man. + +Now, while we were gazing around us in silent admiration, Jack +uttered an exclamation of surprise, and, pointing to an object a +little to one side of us, said, - + +"That's a banian-tree." + +"And what's a banian-tree?" inquired Peterkin, as we walked towards +it. + +"A very curious one, as you shall see presently," replied Jack. +"It is called the AOA here, if I recollect rightly, and has a +wonderful peculiarity about it. What an enormous one it is, to be +sure." + +"IT!" repeated Peterkin; "why, there are dozens of banians here! +What do you mean by talking bad grammar? Is your philosophy +deserting you, Jack?" + +"There is but one tree here of this kind," returned Jack, "as you +will perceive if you will examine it." And, sure enough, we did +find that what we had supposed was a forest of trees was in reality +only one. Its bark was of a light colour, and had a shining +appearance, the leaves being lance-shaped, small, and of a +beautiful pea-green. But the wonderful thing about it was, that +the branches, which grew out from the stem horizontally, sent down +long shoots or fibres to the ground, which, taking root, had +themselves become trees, and were covered with bark like the tree +itself. Many of these fibres had descended from the branches at +various distances, and thus supported them on natural pillars, some +of which were so large and strong, that it was not easy at first to +distinguish the offspring from the parent stem. The fibres were of +all sizes and in all states of advancement, from the pillars we +have just mentioned to small cords which hung down and were about +to take root, and thin brown threads still far from the ground, +which swayed about with every motion of wind. In short, it seemed +to us that, if there were only space afforded to it, this single +tree would at length cover the whole island. + +Shortly after this we came upon another remarkable tree, which, as +its peculiar formation afterwards proved extremely useful to us, +merits description. It was a splendid chestnut, but its proper +name Jack did not know. However, there were quantities of fine +nuts upon it, some of which we put in our pockets. But its stem +was the wonderful part of it. It rose to about twelve feet without +a branch, and was not of great thickness; on the contrary, it was +remarkably slender for the size of the tree; but, to make up for +this, there were four or five wonderful projections in this stem, +which I cannot better describe than by asking the reader to suppose +that five planks of two inches thick and three feet broad had been +placed round the trunk of the tree, with their EDGES closely fixed +to it, from the ground up to the branches, and that these planks +bad been covered over with the bark of the tree and incorporated +with it. In short, they were just natural buttresses, without +which the stem could not have supported its heavy and umbrageous +top. We found these chestnuts to be very numerous. They grew +chiefly on the banks of the stream, and were of all sizes. + +While we were examining a small tree of this kind, Jack chipped a +piece off a buttress with his axe, and found the wood to be firm +and easily cut. He then struck the axe into it with all his force, +and very soon split it off close to the tree, first, however, +having cut it across transversely above and below. By this means +he satisfied himself that we could now obtain short planks, as it +were all ready sawn, of any size and thickness that we desired; +which was a very great discovery indeed, perhaps the most important +we had yet made. + +We now wended our way back to the coast, intending to encamp near +the beach, as we found that the mosquitoes were troublesome in the +forest. On our way we could not help admiring the birds which flew +and chirped around us. Among them we observed a pretty kind of +paroquet, with a green body, a blue head, and a red breast; also a +few beautiful turtledoves, and several flocks of wood-pigeons. The +hues of many of these birds were extremely vivid, - bright green, +blue, and scarlet, being the prevailing tints. We made several +attempts throughout the day to bring down one of these, both with +the bow and the sling, - not for mere sport, but to ascertain +whether they were good for food. But we invariably missed, +although once or twice we were very near hitting. As evening drew +on, however, a flock of pigeons flew past. I slung a stone into +the midst of them at a venture, and had the good fortune to kill +one. We were startled, soon after, by a loud whistling noise above +our heads; and on looking up, saw a flock of wild ducks making for +the coast. We watched these, and, observing where they alighted, +followed them up until we came upon a most lovely blue lake, not +more than two hundred yards long, imbosomed in verdant trees. Its +placid surface, which reflected every leaf and stem, as if in a +mirror, was covered with various species of wild ducks, feeding +among the sedges and broad-leaved water-plants which floated on it, +while numerous birds like water-hens ran to and fro most busily on +its margin. These all with one accord flew tumultuously away the +instant we made our appearance. While walking along the margin we +observed fish in the water, but of what sort we could not tell. + +Now, as we neared the shore, Jack and I said we would go a little +out of our way to see if we could procure one of those ducks; so, +directing Peterkin to go straight to the shore and kindle a fire, +we separated, promising to rejoin him speedily. But we did not +find the ducks, although we made a diligent search for half an +hour. We were about to retrace our steps, when we were arrested by +one of the strangest sights that we had yet beheld. + +Just in front of us, at the distance of about ten yards, grew a +superb tree, which certainly was the largest we had yet seen on the +island. Its trunk was at least five feet in diameter, with a +smooth gray bark; above this the spreading branches were clothed +with light green leaves, amid which were clusters of bright yellow +fruit, so numerous as to weigh down the boughs with their great +weight. This fruit seemed to be of the plum species, of an oblong +form, and a good deal larger than the magnum bonum plum. The +ground at the foot of this tree was thickly strewn with the fallen +fruit, in the midst of which lay sleeping, in every possible +attitude, at least twenty hogs of all ages and sizes, apparently +quite surfeited with a recent banquet. + +Jack and I could scarce restrain our laughter as we gazed at these +coarse, fat, ill-looking animals, while they lay groaning and +snoring heavily amid the remains of their supper. + +"Now, Ralph," said Jack, in a low whisper, "put a stone in your +sling, - a good big one, - and let fly at that fat fellow with his +back toward you. I'll try to put an arrow into yon little pig." + +"Don't you think we had better put them up first?" I whispered; "it +seems cruel to kill them while asleep." + +"If I wanted SPORT, Ralph, I would certainly set them up; but as we +only want PORK, we'll let them lie. Besides, we're not sure of +killing them; so, fire away." + +Thus admonished, I slung my stone with so good aim that it went +bang against the hog's flank as if against the head of a drum; but +it had no other effect than that of causing the animal to start to +its feet, with a frightful yell of surprise, and scamper away. At +the same instant Jack's bow twanged, and the arrow pinned the +little pig to the ground by the ear. + +"I've missed, after all," cried Jack, darting forward with uplifted +axe, while the little pig uttered a loud squeal, tore the arrow +from the ground, and ran away with it, along with the whole drove, +into the bushes and disappeared, though we heard them screaming +long afterwards in the distance. + +"That's very provoking, now," said Jack, rubbing the point of his +nose. + +"Very," I replied, stroking my chin. + +"Well, we must make haste and rejoin Peterkin," said Jack. "It's +getting late." And, without further remark, we threaded our way +quickly through the woods towards the shore. + +When we reached it, we found wood laid out, the fire lighted and +beginning to kindle up, with other signs of preparation for our +encampment, but Peterkin was nowhere to be found. We wondered very +much at this; but Jack suggested that he might have gone to fetch +water; so he gave a shout to let him know that we had arrived, and +sat down upon a rock, while I threw off my jacket and seized the +axe, intending to split up one or two billets of wood. But I had +scarce moved from the spot when, in the distance, we heard a most +appalling shriek, which was followed up by a chorus of yells from +the hogs, and a loud "hurrah!" + +"I do believe," said I, "that Peterkin has met with the hogs." + +"When Greek meets Greek," said Jack, soliloquizing, "then comes the +tug of - " + +"Hurrah!" shouted Peterkin in the distance. + +We turned hastily towards the direction whence the sound came, and +soon descried Peterkin walking along the beach towards us with a +little pig transfixed on the end of his long spear! + +"Well done, my boy!" exclaimed Jack, slapping him on the shoulder +when he came up, "you're the best shot amongst us." + +"Look here Jack!" cried Peterkin, as he disengaged the animal from +his spear. "Do you recognise that hole?" said he, pointing to the +pig's ear; "and are you familiar with this arrow, eh?" + +"Well, I declare!" said Jack. + +"Of course you do," interrupted Peterkin; "but, pray, restrain your +declarations at this time, and let's have supper, for I'm +uncommonly hungry, I can tell you; and it's no joke to charge a +whole herd of swine with their great-grandmother bristling like a +giant porcupine at the head of them!" + +We now set about preparing supper; and, truly, a good display of +viands we made, when all was laid out on a flat rock in the light +of the blazing fire. There was, first of all, the little pig; then +there was the taro-root, and the yam, and the potato, and six +plums; and, lastly, the wood-pigeon. To these Peterkin added a bit +of sugar-cane, which he had cut from a little patch of that plant +which he had found not long after separating from us; "and," said +he, "the patch was somewhat in a square form, which convinces me it +must have been planted by man." + +"Very likely," replied Jack. "From all we have seen, I'm inclined +to think that some of the savages must have dwelt here long ago." + +We found no small difficulty in making up our minds how we were to +cook the pig. None of us had ever cut up one before, and we did +not know exactly how to begin; besides, we had nothing but the axe +to do it with, our knife having been forgotten. At last Jack +started up and said, - + +"Don't let us waste more time talking about it, boys. Hold it up, +Peterkin. There, lay the hind leg on this block of wood, so;" and +he cut it off, with a large portion of the haunch, at a single blow +of the axe. "Now the other, - that's it." And having thus cut off +the two hind legs, he made several deep gashes in them, thrust a +sharp-pointed stick through each, and stuck them up before the +blaze to roast. The wood-pigeon was then split open, quite flat, +washed clean in salt water, and treated in a similar manner. While +these were cooking, we scraped a hole in the sand and ashes under +the fire, into which we put our vegetables, and covered them up. + +The taro-root was of an oval shape, about ten inches long and four +or five thick. It was of a mottled-gray colour, and had a thick +rind. We found it somewhat like an Irish potato, and exceedingly +good. The yam was roundish, and had a rough brown skin. It was +very sweet and well-flavoured. The potato, we were surprised to +find, was quite sweet and exceedingly palatable, as also were the +plums; and, indeed, the pork and pigeon too, when we came to taste +them. Altogether this was decidedly the most luxurious supper we +had enjoyed for many a day; and Jack said it was out-of-sight +better than we ever got on board ship; and Peterkin said he feared +that if we should remain long on the island he would infallibly +become a glutton or an epicure: whereat Jack remarked that he need +not fear that, for he was BOTH already! And so, having eaten our +fill, not forgetting to finish off with a plum, we laid ourselves +comfortably down to sleep upon a couch of branches under the +overhanging ledge of a coral rock. + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + + +Effects of over-eating, and reflections thereon - Humble advice +regarding cold water - The "horrible cry" accounted for - The +curious birds called penguins - Peculiarity of the cocoa nut palm - +Questions on the formation of coral islands - Mysterious footsteps +- Strange discoveries and sad sights. + + +WHEN we awoke on the following morning, we found that the sun was +already a good way above the horizon, so I came to the conclusion +that a heavy supper is not conducive to early rising. +Nevertheless, we felt remarkably strong and well, and much disposed +to have our breakfast. First, however, we had our customary +morning bathe, which refreshed us greatly. + +I have often wondered very much in after years that the inhabitants +of my own dear land did not make more frequent use of this most +charming element, water. I mean in the way of cold bathing. Of +course, I have perceived that it is not convenient for them to go +into the sea or the rivers in winter, as we used to do on the Coral +Island; but then, I knew from experience that a large washing-tub +and a sponge do form a most pleasant substitute. The feelings of +freshness, of cleanliness, of vigour, and extreme hilarity, that +always followed my bathes in the sea, and even, when in England, my +ablutions in the wash-tub, were so delightful, that I would sooner +have gone without my breakfast than without my bathe in cold water. +My readers will forgive me for asking whether they are in the habit +of bathing thus every morning; and if they answer "No," they will +pardon me for recommending them to begin at once. Of late years, +since retiring from the stirring life of adventure which I have led +so long in foreign climes, I have heard of a system called the +cold-water-cure. Now, I do not know much about that system, so I +do not mean to uphold it, neither do I intend to run it down. +Perhaps, in reference to it, I may just hint that there may be too +much of a good thing. I know not; but of this I am quite certain, +that there may also be too little of a good thing; and the great +delight I have had in cold bathing during the course of my +adventurous career inclines me to think that it is better to risk +taking too much than to content one's self with too little. Such +is my opinion, derived from much experience; but I put it before my +readers with the utmost diffidence and with profound modesty, +knowing that it may possibly jar with their feelings of confidence +in their own ability to know and judge as to what is best and +fittest in reference to their own affairs. But, to return from +this digression, for which I humbly crave forgiveness. + +We had not advanced on our journey much above a mile or so, and +were just beginning to feel the pleasant glow that usually +accompanies vigorous exercise, when, on turning a point that +revealed to us a new and beautiful cluster of islands, we were +suddenly arrested by the appalling cry which had so alarmed us a +few nights before. But this time we were by no means so much +alarmed as on the previous occasion, because, whereas at that time +it was night, now it was day; and I have always found, though I am +unable to account for it, that daylight banishes many of the fears +that are apt to assail us in the dark. + +On hearing the sound, Peterkin instantly threw forward his spear. + +"Now, what can it be?" said he, looking round at Jack. "I tell you +what it is, if we are to go on being pulled up in a constant state +of horror and astonishment, as we have been for the last week, the +sooner we're out o' this island the better, notwithstanding the +yams and lemonade, and pork and plums!" + +Peterkin's remark was followed by a repetition of the cry, louder +than before. + +"It comes from one of these islands," said Jack. + +"It must be the ghost of a jackass, then," said Peterkin, "for I +never heard anything so like." + +We all turned our eyes towards the cluster of islands, where, on +the largest, we observed curious objects moving on the shore. + +"Soldiers they are, - that's flat!" cried Peterkin, gazing at them +in the utmost amazement. + +And, in truth, Peterkin's remark seemed to me to be correct; for, +at the distance from which we saw them, they appeared to be an army +of soldiers. There they stood, rank and file, in lines and in +squares, marching and countermarching, with blue coats and white +trousers. While we were looking at them, the dreadful cry came +again over the water, and Peterkin suggested that it must be a +regiment sent out to massacre the natives in cold blood. At this +remark Jack laughed and said, - + +"Why, Peterkin, they are penguins!" + +"Penguins?" repeated Peterkin. + +"Ay, penguins, Peterkin, penguins, - nothing more or less than big +sea-birds, as you shall see one of these days, when we pay them a +visit in our boat, which I mean to set about building the moment we +return to our bower." + +"So, then, our dreadful yelling ghosts and our murdering army of +soldiers," remarked Peterkin, "have dwindled down to penguins, - +big sea-birds! Very good. Then I propose that we continue our +journey as fast as possible, lest our island should be converted +into a dream before we get completely round it." + +Now, as we continued on our way, I pondered much over this new +discovery, and the singular appearance of these birds, of which +Jack could only give us a very slight and vague account; and I +began to long to commence to our boat, in order that we might go +and inspect them more narrowly. But by degrees these thoughts left +me, and I began to be much taken up again with the interesting +peculiarities of the country which we were passing through. + +The second night we passed in a manner somewhat similar to the +first, at about two-thirds of the way round the island, as we +calculated, and we hoped to sleep on the night following at our +bower. I will not here note so particularly all that we said and +saw during the course of this second day, as we did not make any +further discoveries of great importance. The shore along which we +travelled, and the various parts of the woods through which we +passed, were similar to those which have been already treated of. +There were one or two observations that we made, however, and these +were as follows:- + +We saw that, while many of the large fruit-bearing trees grew only +in the valleys, and some of them only near the banks of the +streams, where the soil was peculiarly rich, the cocoa-nut palm +grew in every place whatsoever, - not only on the hill sides, but +also on the sea shore, and even, as has been already stated, on the +coral reef itself, where the soil, if we may use the name, was +nothing better than loose sand mingled with broken shells and coral +rock. So near to the sea, too, did this useful tree grow, that in +many places its roots were washed by the spray from the breakers. +Yet we found the trees growing thus on the sands to be quite as +luxuriant as those growing in the valleys, and the fruit as good +and refreshing also. Besides this, I noticed that, on the summit +of the high mountain, which we once more ascended at a different +point from our first ascent, were found abundance of shells and +broken coral formations, which Jack and I agreed proved either that +this island must have once been under the sea, or that the sea must +once have been above the island. In other words, that as shells +and coral could not possibly climb to the mountain top, they must +have been washed upon it while the mountain top was on a level with +the sea. We pondered this very much; and we put to ourselves the +question, "What raised the island to its present height above the +sea?" But to this we could by no means give to ourselves a +satisfactory reply. Jack thought it might have been blown up by a +volcano; and Peterkin said he thought it must have jumped up of its +own accord! We also noticed, what had escaped us before, that the +solid rocks of which the island was formed were quite different +from the live coral rocks on the shore, where the wonderful little +insects were continually working. They seemed, indeed, to be of +the sauce material, - a substance like limestone; but, while the +coral rocks were quite full of minute cells in which the insects +lived, the other rocks inland were hard and solid, without the +appearance of cells at all. Our thoughts and conversations on this +subject were sometimes so profound that Peterkin said we should +certainly get drowned in them at last, even although we were such +good divers! Nevertheless we did not allow his pleasantry on this +and similar points to deter us from making our notes and +observations as we went along. + +We found several more droves of hogs in the woods, but abstained +from killing any of them, having more than sufficient for our +present necessities. We saw also many of their foot-prints in this +neighbourhood. Among these we also observed the footprints of a +smaller animal, which we examined with much care, but could form no +certain opinion as to them. Peterkin thought they were those of a +little dog, but Jack and I thought differently. We became very +curious on this matter, the more so that we observed these foot- +prints to lie scattered about in one locality, as if the animal +which had made them was wandering round about in a very irregular +manner, and without any object in view. Early in the forenoon of +our third day we observed these footprints to be much more numerous +than ever, and in one particular spot they diverged off into the +woods in a regular beaten track, which was, however, so closely +beset with bushes, that we pushed through it with difficulty. We +had now become so anxious to find out what animal this was, and +where it went to, that we determined to follow the track, and, if +possible, clear up the mystery. Peterkin said, in a bantering +tone, that he was sure it would be cleared up as usual in some +frightfully simple way, and prove to be no mystery at all! + +The beaten track seemed much too large to have been formed by the +animal itself, and we concluded that some larger animal had made +it, and that the smaller one made use of it. But everywhere the +creeping plants and tangled bushes crossed our path, so that we +forced our way along with some difficulty. Suddenly, as we came +upon an open space, we heard a faint cry, and observed a black +animal standing in the track before us. + +"A wild-cat!" cried Jack, fitting an arrow to his bow, and +discharging it so hastily that he missed the animal, and hit the +earth about half a foot to one side of it. To our surprise the +wild-cat did not fly, but walked slowly towards the arrow, and +snuffed at it. + +"That's the most comical wild-cat I ever saw!" cried Jack. + +"It's a tame wild-cat, I think," said Peterkin, levelling his spear +to make a charge. + +"Stop!" cried I, laying my hand on his shoulder; "I do believe the +poor beast is blind. See, it strikes against the branches as it +walks along. It must be a very old one;" and I hastened towards +it. + +"Only think," said Peterkin, with a suppressed laugh, "of a +superannuated wild-cat!" + +We now found that the poor cat was not only blind, or nearly so, +but extremely deaf, as it did not hear our footsteps until we were +quite close behind it. Then it sprang round, and, putting up its +back and tail, while the black hair stood all on end, uttered a +hoarse mew and a fuff. + +"Poor thing," said Peterkin, gently extending his hand, and +endeavouring to pat the cat's head. "Poor pussy; chee, chee, chee; +puss, puss, puss; cheetie pussy!" + +No sooner did the cat hear these sounds than all signs of anger +fled, and, advancing eagerly to Peterkin, it allowed itself to be +stroked, and rubbed itself against his legs, purring loudly all the +time, and showing every symptom of the most extreme delight. + +"It's no more a wild cat than I am!" cried Peterkin, taking it in +his arms. "It's quite tame. Poor pussy, cheetie pussy!" + +We now crowded around Peterkin, and were not a little surprised, +and, to say truth, a good deal affected, by the sight of the poor +animal's excessive joy. It rubbed its head against Peterkin's +cheek, licked his chin, and thrust its head almost violently into +his neck, while it purred more loudly than I ever heard a cat purr +before, and appeared to be so much overpowered by its feelings, +that it occasionally mewed and purred almost in the same breath. +Such demonstrations of joy and affection led us at once to conclude +that this poor cat must have known man before, and we conjectured +that it had been left either accidentally or by design on the +island many years ago, and was now evincing its extreme joy at +meeting once more with human beings. While we were fondling the +cat and talking about it, Jack glanced round the open space in the +midst of which we stood. + +"Hallo!" exclaimed he; "this looks something like a clearing. The +axe has been at work here. Just look at these tree-stumps." + +We now turned to examine these, and, without doubt, we found trees +that had been cut down here and there, also stumps and broken +branches; all of which, however, were completely covered over with +moss, and bore evidence of having been in this condition for some +years. No human foot-prints were to be seen, either on the track +or among the bushes; but those of the cat were found everywhere. +We now determined to follow up the track as far as it went, and +Peterkin put the cat down; but it seemed to be so weak, and mewed +so very pitifully, that he took it up again and carried it in his +arms, where, in a few minutes, it fell sound asleep. + +About ten yards farther on, the felled trees became more numerous, +and the track, diverging to the right, followed for a short space +the banks of a stream. Suddenly we came to a spot where once must +have been a rude bridge, the stones of which were scattered in the +stream, and those on each bank entirely covered over with moss. In +silent surprise and expectancy we continued to advance, and, a few +yards farther on, beheld, under the shelter of some bread-fruit +trees, a small hut or cottage. I cannot hope to convey to my +readers a very correct idea of the feelings that affected us on +witnessing this unexpected sight. We stood for a long time in +silent wonder, for there was a deep and most melancholy stillness +about the place that quite overpowered us; and when we did at +length speak, it was in subdued whispers, as if we were surrounded +by some awful or supernatural influence. Even Peterkin's voice, +usually so quick and lively on all occasions, was hushed now; for +there was a dreariness about this silent, lonely, uninhabited +cottage, - so strange in its appearance, so far away from the usual +dwellings of man, so old, decayed, and deserted in its aspect, - +that fell upon our spirits like a thick cloud, and blotted out as +with a pall the cheerful sunshine that had filled us since the +commencement of our tour round the island. + +The hut or cottage was rude and simple in its construction. It was +not more than twelve feet long by ten feet broad, and about seven +or eight feet high. It had one window, or rather a small frame in +which a window might, perhaps, once have been, but which was now +empty. The door was exceedingly low, and formed of rough boards, +and the roof was covered with broad cocoa-nut and plantain leaves. +But every part of it was in a state of the utmost decay. Moss and +green matter grew in spots all over it. The woodwork was quite +perforated with holes; the roof had nearly fallen in, and appeared +to be prevented from doing so altogether by the thick matting of +creeping-plants and the interlaced branches which years of neglect +had allowed to cover it almost entirely; while the thick, luxuriant +branches of the bread-fruit and other trees spread above it, and +flung a deep, sombre shadow over the spot, as if to guard it from +the heat and the light of day. We conversed long and in whispers +about this strange habitation ere we ventured to approach it; and +when at length we did so it was, at least on my part, with feelings +of awe. + +At first Jack endeavoured to peep in at the window, but from the +deep shadow of the trees already mentioned, and the gloom within, +he could not clearly discern objects; so we lifted the latch and +pushed open the door. We observed that the latch was made of iron, +and almost eaten away with rust. In the like condition were also +the hinges, which creaked as the door swung back. On entering, we +stood still and gazed around us, while we were much impressed with +the dreary stillness of the room. But what we saw there surprised +and shocked us not a little. There was no furniture in the +apartment save a little wooden stool and an iron pot, the latter +almost eaten through with rust. In the corner farthest from the +door was a low bedstead, on which lay two skeletons, imbedded in a +little heap of dry dust. With beating hearts we went forward to +examine them. One was the skeleton of a man, the other that of a +dog, which was extended close beside that of the man, with its head +resting on his bosom + +Now we were very much concerned about this discovery, and could +scarce refrain from tears on beholding these sad remains. After +some time, we began to talk about what we had seen, and to examine +in and around the hut, in order to discover some clue to the name +or history of this poor man, who had thus died in solitude, with +none to mourn his loss save his cat and his faithful dog. But we +found nothing, - neither a book nor a scrap of paper. We found, +however, the decayed remnants of what appeared to have been +clothing, and an old axe. But none of these things bore marks of +any kind; and, indeed, they were so much decayed as to convince us +that they had lain in the condition in which we found them for many +years. + +This discovery now accounted to us for the tree stump at the top of +the mountain with the initials cut on it; also for the patch of +sugar-cane and other traces of man which we had met with in the +course of our rambles over the island. And we were much saddened +by the reflection that the lot of this poor wanderer might possibly +be our own, after many years' residence on the island, unless we +should be rescued by the visit of some vessel or the arrival of +natives. Having no clue whatever to account for the presence of +this poor human being in such a lonely spot, we fell to +conjecturing what could have brought him there. I was inclined to +think that he must have been a shipwrecked sailor, whose vessel had +been lost here, and all the crew been drowned except himself and +his dog and cat. But Jack thought it more likely that he had run +away from his vessel, and had taken the dog and cat to keep him +company. We were also much occupied in our minds with the +wonderful difference between the cat and the dog. For here we saw +that while the one perished, like a loving friend, by its master's +side, with its head resting on his bosom, the other had sought to +sustain itself by prowling abroad in the forest, and had lived in +solitude to a good old age. However, we did not conclude from this +that the cat was destitute of affection, for we could not forget +its emotions on first meeting with us; but we saw from this, that +the dog had a great deal more of generous love in its nature than +the cat, because it not only found it impossible to live after the +death of its master, but it must needs, when it came to die, crawl +to his side and rest its head upon his lifeless breast. + +While we were thinking on these things, and examining into +everything about the room, we were attracted by an exclamation from +Peterkin. + +"I say, Jack," said he, "here is something that will be of use to +us." + +"What is it?" said Jack, hastening across the room. + +"An old pistol," replied Peterkin, holding up the weapon, which he +had just pulled from under a heap of broken wood and rubbish that +lay in a corner. + +"That, indeed, might have been useful," said Jack, examining it, +"if we had any powder; but I suspect the bow and the sling will +prove more serviceable." + +"True, I forgot that," said Peterkin; "but we may as well take it +with us, for the flint will serve to strike fire with when the sun +does not shine." + +After having spent more than an hour at this place without +discovering anything of further interest, Peterkin took up the old +cat, which had lain very contentedly asleep on the stool whereon he +had placed it, and we prepared to take our departure. In leaving +the hut, Jack stumbled heavily against the door-post, which was so +much decayed as to break across, and the whole fabric of the hut +seemed ready to tumble about our ears. This put into our heads +that we might as well pull it down, and so form a mound over the +skeleton. Jack, therefore, with his axe, cut down the other door- +post, which, when it was done, brought the whole hut in ruins to +the ground, and thus formed a grave to the bones of the poor +recluse and his dog. Then we left the spot, having brought away +the iron pot, the pistol, and the old axe, as they might be of much +use to us hereafter. + +During the rest of this day we pursued our journey, and examined +the other end of the large valley, which we found to be so much +alike to the parts already described, that I shall not recount the +particulars of what we saw in this place. I may, however, remark, +that we did not quite recover our former cheerful spirits until we +arrived at our bower, which we did late in the evening, and found +everything just in the same condition as we had left it three days +before. + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + + +Something wrong with the tank - Jack's wisdom and Peterkin's +impertinence - Wonderful behaviour of a crab - Good wishes for +those who dwell far from the sea - Jack commences to build a little +boat. + + +REST is sweet as well for the body as for the mind. During my long +experience, amid the vicissitudes of a chequered life, I have found +that periods of profound rest at certain intervals, in addition to +the ordinary hours of repose, are necessary to the wellbeing of +man. And the nature as well as the period of this rest varies, +according to the different temperaments of individuals, and the +peculiar circumstances in which they may chance to be placed. To +those who work with their minds, bodily labour is rest. To those +who labour with the body, deep sleep is rest. To the downcast, the +weary, and the sorrowful, joy and peace are rest. Nay, further, I +think that to the gay, the frivolous, the reckless, when sated with +pleasures that cannot last, even sorrow proves to be rest of a +kind, although, perchance, it were better that I should call it +relief than rest. There is, indeed, but one class of men to whom +rest is denied. There is no rest to the wicked. At this I do but +hint, however, as I treat not of that rest which is spiritual, but, +more particularly, of that which applies to the mind and to the +body. + +Of this rest we stood much in need on our return home, and we found +it exceedingly sweet, when we indulged in it, after completing the +journey just related. It had not, indeed, been a very long +journey, nevertheless we had pursued it so diligently that our +frames were not a little prostrated. Our minds were also very much +exhausted in consequence of the many surprises, frequent alarms, +and much profound thought, to which they had been subjected; so +that when we lay down on the night of our return under the shelter +of the bower, we fell immediately into very deep repose. I can +state this with much certainty, for Jack afterwards admitted the +fact, and Peterkin, although he stoutly denied it, I heard snoring +loudly at least two minutes after lying down. In this condition we +remained all night and the whole of the following day without +awaking once, or so much as moving our positions. When we did +awake it was near sunset, and we were all in such a state of +lassitude that we merely rose to swallow a mouthful of food. As +Peterkin remarked, in the midst of a yawn, we took breakfast at +tea-time, and then went to bed again, where we lay till the +following forenoon. + +After this we arose very greatly refreshed, but much alarmed lest +we had lost count of a day. I say we were much alarmed on this +head, for we had carefully kept count of the days since we were +cast upon our island, in order that we might remember the Sabbath- +day, which day we had hitherto with one accord kept as a day of +rest, and refrained from all work whatsoever. However, on +considering the subject, we all three entertained the same opinion +as to how long we had slept, and so our minds were put at ease. + +We now hastened to our Water Garden to enjoy a bathe, and to see +how did the animals which I had placed in the tank. We found the +garden more charming, pelucid, and inviting than ever, and Jack and +I plunged into its depth, and gambolled among its radiant coral +groves; while Peterkin wallowed at the surface, and tried +occasionally to kick us as we passed below. Having dressed, I then +hastened to the tank; but what was my surprise and grief to find +nearly all the animals dead, and the water in a putrid condition! +I was greatly distressed at this, and wondered what could be the +cause of it. + +"Why, you precious humbug," said Peterkin, coming up to me, "how +could you expect it to be otherwise? When fishes are accustomed to +live in the Pacific Ocean, how can you expect them to exist in a +hole like that?" + +"Indeed, Peterkin," I replied, "there seems to be truth in what you +say. Nevertheless, now I think of it, there must be some error in +your reasoning; for, if I put in but a few very small animals, they +will bear the same proportion to this pond that the millions of +fish bear to the ocean." + +"I say, Jack," cried Peterkin, waving his hand, "come here, like a +good fellow. Ralph is actually talking philosophy. Do come to our +assistance, for he's out o' sight beyond me already!" + +"What's the matter?" inquired Jack, coming up, while he endeavoured +to scrub his long hair dry with a towel of cocoa-nut cloth. + +I repeated my thoughts to Jack, who, I was happy to find, quite +agreed with me. "Your best plan," he said, "will be to put very +few animals at first into your tank, and add more as you find it +will bear them. And look here," he added, pointing to the sides of +the tank, which, for the space of two inches above the water-level, +were incrusted with salt, "you must carry your philosophy a little +farther, Ralph. That water has evaporated so much that it is too +salt for anything to live in. You will require to add FRESH water +now and then, in order to keep it at the same degree of saltness as +the sea." + +"Very true, Jack, that never struck me before," said I. + +"And, now I think of it," continued Jack, "it seems to me that the +surest way of arranging your tank so as to get it to keep pure and +in good condition, will be to imitate the ocean in it. In fact +make it a miniature Pacific. I don't see how you can hope to +succeed unless you do that." + +"Most true," said I, pondering what my companion said. "But I fear +that that will be very difficult." + +"Not at all," cried Jack, rolling his towel up into a ball, and +throwing it into the face of Peterkin, who had been grinning and +winking at him during the last five minutes. "Not at all. Look +here. There is water of a certain saltness in the sea; well, fill +your tank with sea water, and keep it at that saltness by marking +the height at which the water stands on the sides. When it +evaporates a little, pour in FRESH water from the brook till it +comes up to the mark, and then it will be right, for the salt does +not evaporate with the water. Then, there's lots of sea-weed in +the sea; - well, go and get one or two bits of sea-weed, and put +them into your tank. Of course the weed must be alive, and growing +to little stones; or you can chip a bit off the rocks with the weed +sticking to it. Then, if you like, you can throw a little sand and +gravel into your tank, and the thing's complete." + +"Nay, not quite," said Peterkin, who had been gravely attentive to +this off-hand advice, "not quite; you must first make three little +men to dive in it before it can be said to be perfect, and that +would be rather difficult, I fear, for two of them would require to +be philosophers. But hallo! what's this? I say, Ralph, look here. +There's one o' your crabs up to something uncommon. It's +performing the most remarkable operation for a crab I ever saw, - +taking off its coat, I do believe, before going to bed!" + +We hastily stooped over the tank, and certainly were not a little +amused at the conduct of one of the crabs which still survived it +companions. It was one of the common small crabs, like to those +that are found running about everywhere on the coasts of England. +While we gazed at it, we observed its back to split away from the +lower part of its body, and out of the gap thus formed came a soft +lump which moved and writhed unceasingly. This lump continued to +increase in size until it appeared like a bunch of crab's legs: +and, indeed, such it proved in a very few minutes to be; for the +points of the toes were at length extricated from this hole in its +back, the legs spread out, the body followed, and the crab walked +away quite entire, even to the points of its nipper-claws, leaving +a perfectly entire shell behind it, so that, when we looked, it +seemed as though there were two complete crabs instead of one! + +"Well!" exclaimed Peterkin, drawing a long breath, "I've HEARD of a +man jumping out of his skin and sitting down in his skeleton in +order to cool himself, but I never expected to SEE a crab do it!" + +We were, in truth, much amazed at this spectacle, and the more so +when we observed that the new crab was larger than the crab that it +came out of. It was also quite soft, but by next morning its skin +had hardened into a good shell. We came thus to know that crabs +grow in this way, and not by the growing of their shells, as we had +always thought before we saw this wonderful operation. + +Now I considered well the advice which Jack had given me about +preparing my tank, and the more I thought of it, the more I came to +regard it as very sound and worthy of being acted on. So I +forthwith put his plan in execution, and found it to answer +excellently well, indeed much beyond my expectation; for I found +that after a little experience had taught me the proper proportion +of sea-weed and animals to put into a certain amount of water, the +tank needed no farther attendance; and, moreover, I did not require +ever afterwards to renew or change the sea-water, but only to add a +very little fresh water from the brook, now and then, as the other +evaporated. I therefore concluded that if I had been suddenly +conveyed, along with my tank, into some region where there was no +salt sea at all, my little sea and my sea-fish would have continued +to thrive and to prosper notwithstanding. This made me greatly to +desire that those people in the world who live far inland might +know of my wonderful tank, and, by having materials like to those +of which it was made conveyed to them, thus be enabled to watch the +habits of those most mysterious animals that reside in the sea, and +examine with their own eyes the wonders of the great deep. + +For many days after this, while Peterkin and Jack were busily +employed in building a little boat out of the curious natural +planks of the chestnut tree, I spent much of my time in examining +with the burning-glass the marvellous operations that were +constantly going on in my tank. Here I saw those anemones which +cling, like little red, yellow, and green blobs of jelly, to the +rocks, put forth, as it were, a multitude of arms and wait till +little fish or other small animalcules unwarily touched them, when +they would instantly seize them, fold arm after arm around their +victims, and so engulf them in their stomachs. Here I saw the +ceaseless working of those little coral insects whose efforts have +encrusted the islands of the Pacific with vast rocks, and +surrounded them with enormous reefs. And I observed that many of +these insects, though extremely minute, were very beautiful, coming +out of their holes in a circle of fine threads, and having the form +of a shuttle-cock. Here I saw curious little barnacles opening a +hole in their backs and constantly putting out a thin feathery +hand, with which, I doubt not, they dragged their food into their +mouths. Here, also, I saw those crabs which have shells only on +the front of their bodies, but no shell whatever on their +remarkably tender tails, so that, in order to find a protection to +them, they thrust them into the empty shells of wilks, or some such +fish, and when they grow too big for one, change into another. +But, most curious of all, I saw an animal which had the wonderful +power, when it became ill, of casting its stomach and its teeth +away from it, and getting an entirely new set in the course of a +few months! All this I saw, and a great deal more, by means of my +tank and my burning-glass, but I refrain from setting down more +particulars here, as I have still much to tell of the adventures +that befell us while we remained on this island. + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + + +Notable discovery at the spouting cliffs - The mysterious green +monster explained - We are thrown into unutterable terror by the +idea that Jack is drowned - The Diamond Cave. + + +"COME, Jack," cried Peterkin, one morning about three weeks after +our return from our long excursion, "let's be jolly to-day, and do +something vigorous. I'm quite tired of hammering and hammering, +hewing and screwing, cutting and butting, at that little boat of +ours, that seems as hard to build as Noah's ark; let us go on an +excursion to the mountain top, or have a hunt after the wild ducks, +or make a dash at the pigs. I'm quite flat - flat as bad ginger- +beer - flat as a pancake; in fact, I want something to rouse me, to +toss me up, as it were. Eh! what do you say to it?" + +"Well," answered Jack, throwing down the axe with which he was just +about to proceed towards the boat, "if that's what you want, I +would recommend you to make an excursion to the water-spouts; the +last one we had to do with tossed you up a considerable height, +perhaps the next will send you higher, who knows, if you're at all +reasonable or moderate in your expectations!" + +"Jack, my dear boy," said Peterkin, gravely, "you are really +becoming too fond of jesting. It's a thing I don't at all approve +of, and if you don't give it up, I fear that, for our mutual good, +we shall have to part." + +"Well, then, Peterkin," replied Jack, with a smile, "what would you +have?" + +"Have?" said Peterkin, "I would HAVE nothing. I didn't say I +wanted to HAVE; I said that I wanted to DO." + +"By the by," said I, interrupting their conversation, "I am +reminded by this that we have not yet discovered the nature of yon +curious appearance that we saw near the water-spouts, on our +journey round the island. Perhaps it would be well to go for that +purpose." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Peterkin, "I know the nature of it well +enough." + +"What was it?" said I. + +"It was of a MYSTERIOUS nature to be sure!" said he, with a wave of +his hand, while he rose from the log on which he had been sitting, +and buckled on his belt, into which he thrust his enormous club. + +"Well then, let us away to the water-spouts," cried Jack, going up +to the bower for his bow and arrows; "and bring your spear, +Peterkin. It may be useful." + +We now, having made up our minds to examine into this matter, +sallied forth eagerly in the direction of the water-spout rocks, +which, as I have before mentioned, were not far from our present +place of abode. On arriving there we hastened down to the edge of +the rocks, and gazed over into the sea, where we observed the pale- +green object still distinctly visible, moving its tail slowly to +and fro in the water. + +"Most remarkable!" said Jack. + +"Exceedingly curious," said I. + +"Beats everything!" said Peterkin. + +"Now, Jack," he added, "you made such a poor figure in your last +attempt to stick that object, that I would advise you to let me try +it. If it has got a heart at all, I'll engage to send my spear +right through the core of it; if it hasn't got a heart, I'll send +it through the spot where its heart ought to be." + +"Fire away, then, my boy," replied Jack with a laugh. + +Peterkin immediately took the spear, poised it for a second or two +above his head, then darted it like an arrow into the sea. Down it +went straight into the centre of the green object, passed quite +through it, and came up immediately afterwards, pure and unsullied, +while the mysterious tail moved quietly as before! + +"Now," said Peterkin, gravely, "that brute is a heartless monster; +I'll have nothing more to do with it." + +"I'm pretty sure now," said Jack, "that it is merely a phosphoric +light; but I must say I'm puzzled at its staying always in that +exact spot." + +I also was much puzzled, and inclined to think with Jack that it +must be phosphoric light; of which luminous appearance we had seen +much while on our voyage to these seas. "But," said I, "there is +nothing to hinder us from diving down to it, now that we are sure +it is not a shark." + +"True," returned Jack, stripping off his clothes; "I'll go down, +Ralph, as I'm better at diving than you are. Now then, Peterkin, +out o' the road!" Jack stepped forward, joined his hands above his +head, bent over the rocks, and plunged into the sea. For a second +or two the spray caused by his dive hid him from view, then the +water became still, and we saw him swimming far down in the midst +of the green object. Suddenly he sank below it, and vanished +altogether from our sight! We gazed anxiously down at the spot +where he had disappeared, for nearly a minute, expecting every +moment to see him rise again for breath; but fully a minute passed, +and still he did not reappear. Two minutes passed! and then a +flood of alarm rushed in upon my soul, when I considered that +during all my acquaintance with him, Jack had never stayed +underwater more than a minute at a time; indeed seldom so long. + +"Oh, Peterkin!" I said, in a voice that trembled with increasing +anxiety, "something has happened. It is more than three minutes +now!" But Peterkin did not answer and I observed that he was +gazing down into the water with a look of intense fear mingled with +anxiety, while his face was overspread with a deadly paleness. +Suddenly he sprang to his feet and rushed about in a frantic state, +wringing his hands, and exclaiming, "Oh, Jack, Jack! he is gone! +It must have been a shark, and he is gone for ever!" + +For the next five minutes I know not what I did. The intensity of +my feelings almost bereft me of my senses. But I was recalled to +myself by Peterkin seizing me by the shoulder and staring wildly +into my face, while he exclaimed, "Ralph! Ralph! perhaps he has +only fainted. Dive for him, Ralph!" + +It seemed strange that this did not occur to me sooner. In a +moment I rushed to the edge of the rocks, and, without waiting to +throw off my garments, was on the point to spring into the waves, +when I observed something black rising up through the green object. +In another moment Jack's head rose to the surface, and he gave a +wild shout, flinging back the spray from his locks, as was his wont +after a dive. Now we were almost as much amazed at seeing him re- +appear, well and strong, as we had been at first at his non- +appearance; for, to the best of our judgment, he had been nearly +ten minutes under water, perhaps longer, and it required no +exertion of our reason to convince us that this was utterly +impossible for mortal man to do and retain his strength and +faculties. It was therefore with a feeling akin to superstitious +awe that I held down my hand and assisted him to clamber up the +steep rocks. But no such feeling affected Peterkin. No sooner did +Jack gain the rocks and seat himself on one, panting for breath, +than he threw his arms round his neck, and burst into a flood of +tears. "Oh, Jack, Jack!" said he, "where were you? What kept you +so long?" + +After a few moments Peterkin became composed enough to sit still +and listen to Jack's explanation, although he could not restrain +himself from attempting to wink every two minutes at me, in order +to express his joy at Jack's safety. I say he attempted to wink, +but I am bound to add that he did not succeed, for his eyes were so +much swollen with weeping, that his frequent attempts only resulted +in a series of violent and altogether idiotical contortions of the +face, that were very far from expressing what he intended. +However, I knew what the poor fellow meant by it, so I smiled to +him in return, and endeavoured to make believe that he was winking. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, when we were composed enough to listen to +him, "yon green object is not a shark; it is a stream of light +issuing from a cave in the rocks. Just after I made my dive, I +observed that this light came from the side of the rock above which +we are now sitting; so I struck out for it, and saw an opening into +some place or other that appeared to be luminous within. For one +instant I paused to think whether I ought to venture. Then I made +up my mind, and dashed into it. For you see, Peterkin, although I +take some time to tell this, it happened in the space of a few +seconds, so that I knew I had wind enough in me to serve to bring +me out o' the hole and up to the surface again. Well, I was just +on the point of turning, - for I began to feel a little +uncomfortable in such a place, - when it seemed to me as if there +was a faint light right above me. I darted upwards, and found my +head out of water. This relieved me greatly, for I now felt that I +could take in air enough to enable me to return the way I came. +Then it all at once occurred to me that I might not be able to find +the way out again; but, on glancing downwards, my mind was put +quite at rest by seeing the green light below me streaming into the +cave, just like the light that we had seen streaming out of it, +only what I now saw was much brighter. + +"At first I could scarcely see anything as I gazed around me, it +was so dark; but gradually my eyes became accustomed to it, and I +found that I was in a huge cave, part of the walls of which I +observed on each side of me. The ceiling just above me was also +visible, and I fancied that I could perceive beautiful glittering +objects there, but the farther end of the cave was shrouded in +darkness. While I was looking around me in great wonder, it came +into my head that you two would think I was drowned; so I plunged +down through the passage again in a great hurry, rose to the +surface, and - here I am!" + +When Jack concluded his recital of what he had seen in this +remarkable cave, I could not rest satisfied till I had dived down +to see it; which I did, but found it so dark, as Jack had said, +that I could scarcely see anything. When I returned, we had a long +conversation about it, during which I observed that Peterkin had a +most lugubrious expression on his countenance. + +"What's the matter, Peterkin?" said I. + +"The matter?" he replied. "It's all very well for you two to be +talking away like mermaids about the wonders of this cave, but you +know I must be content to hear about it, while you are enjoying +yourselves down there like mad dolphins. It's really too bad." + +"I'm very sorry for you, Peterkin, indeed I am," said Jack, "but we +cannot help you. If you would only learn to dive - " + +"Learn to fly, you might as well say!" retorted Peterkin, in a very +sulky tone. + +"If you would only consent to keep still," said I, "we would take +you down with us in ten seconds." + +"Hum!" returned Peterkin; "suppose a salamander was to propose to +you 'only to keep still,' and he would carry you through a blazing +fire in a few seconds, what would you say?" + +We both laughed and shook our heads, for it was evident that +nothing was to be made of Peterkin in the water. But we could not +rest satisfied till we had seen more of this cave; so, after +further consultation, Jack and I determined to try if we could take +down a torch with us, and set fire to it in the cavern. This we +found to be an undertaking of no small difficulty; but we +accomplished it at last by the following means:- First, we made a +torch of a very inflammable nature out of the bark of a certain +tree, which we cut into strips, and, after twisting, cemented +together with a kind of resin or gum, which we also obtained from +another tree; neither of which trees, however, was known by name to +Jack. This, when prepared, we wrapped up in a great number of +plies of cocoa-nut cloth, so that we were confident it could not +get wet during the short time it should be under water. Then we +took a small piece of the tinder, which we had carefully treasured +up lest we should require it, as before said, when the sun should +fail us; also, we rolled up some dry grass and a few chips, which, +with a little bow and drill, like those described before, we made +into another bundle, and wrapped it up in cocoa-nut cloth. When +all was ready we laid aside our garments, with the exception of our +trousers, which, as we did not know what rough scraping against the +rocks we might be subjected to, we kept on. + +Then we advanced to the edge of the rocks, Jack carrying one +bundle, with the torch; I the other, with the things for producing +fire. + +"Now don't weary for us, Peterkin, should we be gone some time," +said Jack; "we'll be sure to return in half-an-hour at the very +latest, however interesting the cave should be, that we may relieve +your mind." + +"Farewell!" said Peterkin, coming up to us with a look of deep but +pretended solemnity, while he shook hands and kissed each of us on +the cheek. "Farewell! and while you are gone I shall repose my +weary limbs under the shelter of this bush, and meditate on the +changefulness of all things earthly, with special reference to the +forsaken condition of a poor ship-wrecked sailor boy!" So saying, +Peterkin waved his hand, turned from us, and cast himself upon the +ground with a look of melancholy resignation, which was so well +feigned, that I would have thought it genuine had he not +accompanied it with a gentle wink. We both laughed, and, springing +from the rocks together, plunged head first into the sea. + +We gained the interior of the submarine cave without difficulty, +and, on emerging from the waves, supported ourselves for some time +by treading-water, while we held the two bundles above our heads. +This we did in order to let our eyes become accustomed to the +obscurity. Then, when we could see sufficiently, we swam to a +shelving rock, and landed in safety. Having wrung the water from +our trousers, and dried ourselves as well as we could under the +circumstances, we proceeded to ignite the torch. This we +accomplished without difficulty in a few minutes; and no sooner did +it flare up than we were struck dumb with the wonderful objects +that were revealed to our gaze. The roof of the cavern just above +us seemed to be about ten feet high, but grew higher as it receded +into the distance, until it was lost in darkness. It seemed to be +made of coral, and was supported by massive columns of the same +material. Immense icicles (as they appeared to us) hung from it in +various places. These, however, were formed, not of ice, but of a +species of limestone, which seemed to flow in a liquid form towards +the point of each, where it became solid. A good many drops fell, +however, to the rock below, and these formed little cones, which +rose to meet the points above. Some of them had already met, and +thus we saw how the pillars were formed, which at first seemed to +us as if they had been placed there by some human architect to +support the roof. As we advanced farther in, we saw that the floor +was composed of the same material as the pillars; and it presented +the curious appearance of ripples, such as are formed on water when +gently ruffled by the wind. There were several openings on either +hand in the walls, that seemed to lead into other caverns; but +these we did not explore at this time. We also observed that the +ceiling was curiously marked in many places, as if it were the +fret-work of a noble cathedral; and the walls, as well as the roof, +sparkled in the light of our torch, and threw back gleams and +flashes, as if they were covered with precious stones. Although we +proceeded far into this cavern, we did not come to the end of it; +and we were obliged to return more speedily than we would otherwise +have done, as our torch was nearly expended. We did not observe +any openings in the roof, or any indications of places whereby +light might enter; but near the entrance to the cavern stood an +immense mass of pure white coral rock, which caught and threw back +the little light that found an entrance through the cave's mouth, +and thus produced, we conjectured, the pale-green object which had +first attracted our attention. We concluded, also, that the +reflecting power of this rock was that which gave forth the dim +light that faintly illumined the first part of the cave. + +Before diving through the passage again we extinguished the small +piece of our torch that remained, and left it in a dry spot; +conceiving that we might possibly stand in need of it, if at any +future time we should chance to wet our torch while diving into the +cavern. As we stood for a few minutes after it was out, waiting +till our eyes became accustomed to the gloom, we could not help +remarking the deep, intense stillness and the unutterable gloom of +all around us; and, as I thought of the stupendous dome above, and +the countless gems that had sparkled in the torch-light a few +minutes before, it came into my mind to consider how strange it is +that God should make such wonderful and extremely-beautiful works +never to be seen at all, except, indeed, by chance visitors such as +ourselves. + +I afterwards found that there were many such caverns among the +islands of the South Seas, some of them larger and more beautiful +than the one I have just described. + +"Now, Ralph, are you ready?" said Jack, in a low voice, that seemed +to echo up into the dome above. + +"Quite ready." + +"Come along, then," said he; and, plunging off the ledge of the +rock into the water, we dived through the narrow entrance. In a +few seconds we were panting on the rocks above, and receiving the +congratulations of our friend Peterkin. + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + + +Strange peculiarity of the tides - Also of the twilight - +Peterkin's remarkable conduct in embracing a little pig and killing +a big sow - Sage remarks on jesting - Also on love. + + +IT was quite a relief to us to breathe the pure air and to enjoy +the glad sunshine after our long ramble in the Diamond Cave, as we +named it; for, although we did not stay more than half an hour +away, it seemed to us much longer. While we were dressing, and +during our walk home, we did our best to satisfy the curiosity of +poor Peterkin, who seemed to regret, with lively sincerity, his +inability to dive. + +There was no help for it, however, so we condoled with him as we +best could. Had there been any great rise or fall in the tide of +these seas, we might perhaps have found it possible to take him +down with us at low water; but as the tide never rose or fell more +than eighteen inches or two feet, this was impossible. + +This peculiarity of the tide - its slight rise and fall - had not +attracted our observation till some time after our residence on the +island. Neither had we observed another curious circumstance until +we had been some time there. This was the fact, that the tide rose +and fell with constant regularity, instead of being affected by the +changes of the moon as in our own country, and as it is in most +other parts of the world, - at least in all those parts with which +I am acquainted. Every day and every night, at twelve o'clock +precisely, the tide is at the full; and at six o'clock every +morning and evening it is ebb. I can speak with much confidence on +this singular circumstance, as we took particular note of it, and +never found it to alter. Of course, I must admit, we had to guess +the hour of twelve midnight, and I think we could do this pretty +correctly; but in regard to twelve noon we are quite positive, +because we easily found the highest point that the sun reached in +the sky by placing ourselves at a certain spot whence we observed +the sharp summit of a cliff resting against the sky, just where the +sun passed. + +Jack and I were surprised that we had not noticed this the first +few days of our residence here, and could only account for it by +our being so much taken up with the more obvious wonders of our +novel situation. I have since learned, however, that this want of +observation is a sad and very common infirmity of human nature, +there being hundreds of persons before whose eyes the most +wonderful things are passing every day, who nevertheless are +totally ignorant of them. I therefore have to record my sympathy +with such persons, and to recommend to them a course of conduct +which I have now for a long time myself adopted, - namely, the +habit of forcing my attention upon ALL things that go on around me, +and of taking some degree of interest in them, whether I feel it +naturally or not. I suggest this the more earnestly, though +humbly, because I have very frequently come to know that my +indifference to a thing has generally been caused by my ignorance +in regard to it. + +We had much serious conversation on this subject of the tides; and +Jack told us, in his own quiet, philosophical way, that these tides +did great good to the world in many ways, particularly in the way +of cleansing the shores of the land, and carrying off the filth +that was constantly poured into the sea there-from; which, Peterkin +suggested, was remarkably TIDY of it to do. Poor Peterkin could +never let slip an opportunity to joke, however inopportune it might +be: which at first we found rather a disagreeable propensity, as +it often interrupted the flow of very agreeable conversation; and, +indeed, I cannot too strongly record my disapprobation of this +tendency in general: but we became so used to it at last that we +found it no interruption whatever; indeed, strange to say, we came +to feel that it was a necessary part of our enjoyment (such is the +force of habit), and found the sudden outbursts of mirth, resulting +from his humorous disposition, quite natural and refreshing to us +in the midst of our more serious conversations. But I must not +misrepresent Peterkin. We often found, to our surprise, that he +knew many things which we did not; and I also observed that those +things which he learned from experience were never forgotten. From +all these things I came at length to understand that things very +opposite and dissimilar in themselves, when united, do make an +agreeable whole; as, for example, we three on this our island, +although most unlike in many things, when united, made a trio so +harmonious that I question if there ever met before such an +agreeable triumvirate. There was, indeed, no note of discord +whatever in the symphony we played together on that sweet Coral +Island; and I am now persuaded that this was owing to our having +been all tuned to the same key, namely, that of LOVE! Yes, we +loved one another with much fervency while we lived on that island; +and, for the matter of that, we love each other still. + +And while I am on this subject, or rather the subject that just +preceded it - namely, the tides - I may here remark on another +curious natural phenomenon. We found that there was little or no +twilight in this island. We had a distinct remembrance of the +charming long twilight at home, which some people think the most +delightful part of the day, though for my part I have always +preferred sunrise; and when we first landed, we used to sit down on +some rocky point or eminence, at the close of our day's work, to +enjoy the evening breeze; but no sooner had the sun sunk below the +horizon than all became suddenly dark. This rendered it necessary +that we should watch the sun when we happened to be out hunting, +for to be suddenly left in the dark while in the woods was very +perplexing, as, although the stars shone with great beauty and +brilliancy, they could not pierce through the thick umbrageous +boughs that interlaced above our heads. + +But, to return: After having told all we could to Peterkin about +the Diamond Cave under Spouting Cliff, as we named the locality, we +were wending our way rapidly homewards, when a grunt and a squeal +were borne down by the land breeze to our ears. + +"That's the ticket!" was Peterkin's remarkable exclamation, as he +started convulsively, and levelled his spear. + +"Hist!" cried Jack; "these are your friends, Peterkin. They must +have come over expressly to pay you a friendly visit, for it is the +first time we have seen them on this side the island." + +"Come along!" cried Peterkin, hurrying towards the wood, while Jack +and I followed, smiling at his impatience. + +Another grunt and half a dozen squeals, much louder than before, +came down the valley. At this time we were just opposite the small +vale which lay between the Valley of the Wreck and Spouting Cliff. + +"I say, Peterkin," cried Jack, in a hoarse whisper. + +"Well, what is't?" + +"Stay a bit, man. These grunters are just up there on the hill +side. If you go and stand with Ralph in the lee of yon cliff, I'll +cut round behind and drive them through the gorge, so that you'll +have a better chance of picking out a good one. Now, mind you +pitch into a fat young pig, Peterkin," added Jack, as he sprang +into the bushes. + +"Won't I, just!" said Peterkin, licking his lips, as we took our +station beside the cliff. "I feel quite a tender affection for +young pigs in my heart. Perhaps it would be more correct to say in +my s-." + +"There they come!" cried I, as a terrific yell from Jack sent the +whole herd screaming down the hill. Now, Peterkin, being unable to +hold back, crept a short way up a very steep grassy mound, in order +to get a better view of the hogs before they came up; and just as +he raised his head above its summit, two little pigs, which had +outrun their companions, rushed over the top with the utmost +precipitation. One of these brushed close past Peterkin's ear; the +other, unable to arrest its headlong flight, went, as Peterkin +himself afterwards expressed it, "bash" into his arms with a sudden +squeal, which was caused more by the force of the blow than the +will of the animal, and both of them rolled violently down to the +foot of the mound. No sooner was this reached than the little pig +recovered its feet, tossed up its tail, and fled shrieking from the +spot. But I slang a large stone after it, which, being fortunately +well aimed, hit it behind the ear, and felled it to the earth. + +"Capital, Ralph! that's your sort!" cried Peterkin, who, to my +surprise and great relief, had risen to his feet. Apparently +unhurt, though much dishevelled, he rushed franticly towards the +gorge, which the yells of the hogs told us they were now +approaching. I had made up my mind that I would abstain from +killing another, as, if Peterkin should be successful, two were +more than sufficient for our wants at the present time. Suddenly +they all burst forth, - two or three little round ones in advance, +and an enormous old sow with a drove of hogs at her heels. + +"Now, Peterkin," said I, "there's a nice little fat one; just spear +it." + +But Peterkin did not move; he allowed it to pass unharmed. I +looked at him in surprise, and saw that his lips were compressed +and his eyebrows knitted, as if he were about to fight with some +awful enemy. + +"What is it?" I inquired, with some trepidation. + +Suddenly he levelled his spear, darted forward, and, with a yell +that nearly froze the blood in my veins, stabbed the old sow to the +heart. Nay, so vigorously was it done that the spear went in at +one side and came out at the other! + +"Oh, Peterkin!" said I, going up to him, "what have you done?" + +"Done? I've killed their great-great-grandmother, that's all," +said he, looking with a somewhat awe-struck expression at the +transfixed animal. + +"Hallo! what's this?" said Jack, as he came up. "Why, Peterkin, +you must be fond of a tough chop. If you mean to eat this old hog, +she'll try your jaws, I warrant. What possessed you to stick HER, +Peterkin?" + +"Why, the fact is I want a pair of shoes." + +"What have your shoes to do with the old hog?' said I, smiling. + +"My present shoes have certainly nothing to do with her," replied +Peterkin; "nevertheless she will have a good deal to do with my +future shoes. The fact is, when I saw you floor that pig so +neatly, Ralph, it struck me that there was little use in killing +another. Then I remembered all at once that I had long wanted some +leather or tough substance to make shoes of, and this old +grandmother seemed so tough that I just made up my mind to stick +her, and you see I've done it!" + +"That you certainly have, Peterkin," said Jack, as he was examining +the transfixed animal. + +We now considered how we were to carry our game home, for, although +the distance was short, the hog was very heavy. At length we hit +on the plan of tying its four feet together, and passing the spear +handle between them. Jack took one end on his shoulder, I took the +other on mine, and Peterkin carried the small pig. + +Thus we returned in triumph to our bower, laden, as Peterkin +remarked, with the glorious spoils of a noble hunt. As he +afterwards spoke in similarly glowing terms in reference to the +supper that followed, there is every reason to believe that we +retired that night to our leafy beds in a high state of +satisfaction. + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + + +Boat-building extraordinary - Peterkin tries his hand at cookery +and fails most signally - The boat finished - Curious conversation +with the cat, and other matters. + + +FOR many days after this Jack applied himself with unremitting +assiduity to the construction of our boat, which at length began to +look somewhat like one. But those only who have had the thing to +do can entertain a right idea of the difficulty involved in such an +undertaking, with no other implements than an axe, a bit of hoop- +iron, a sail-needle, and a broken pen-knife. But Jack did it. He +was of, that disposition which WILL not be conquered. When he +believed himself to be acting rightly, he overcame all obstacles. +I have seen Jack, when doubtful whether what he was about to do +were right or wrong, as timid and vacillating as a little girl, - +and I honour him for it! + +As this boat was a curiosity in its way, a few words here relative +to the manner of its construction may not be amiss. + +I have already mentioned the chestnut tree with its wonderful +buttresses or planks. This tree, then, furnished us with the chief +part of our material. First of all Jack sought out a limb of a +tree of such a form and size as, while it should form the keel a +bend at either end should form the stem and stern posts. Such a +piece, however, was not easy to obtain, but at last he procured it, +by rooting up a small tree which had a branch growing at the proper +angle about ten feet up its stem, with two strong roots growing in +such a form as enabled him to make a flat-sterned boat. This +placed, he procured three branching roots of suitable size, which +he fitted to the keel at equal distances, thus forming three strong +ribs. Now, the squaring and shaping of these, and the cutting of +the grooves in the keel, was an easy enough matter, as it was all +work for the axe, in the use of which Jack was become wonderfully +expert; but it was quite a different affair when he came to nailing +the ribs to the keel, for we had no instrument capable of boring a +large hole, and no nails to fasten them with. We were, indeed, +much perplexed here; but Jack at length devised an instrument that +served very well. He took the remainder of our hoop-iron and beat +it into the form of a pipe or cylinder, about as thick as a man's +finger. This he did by means of our axe and the old rusty axe we +had found at the house of the poor man at the other side of the +island. This, when made red hot, bored slowly though the timbers; +and, the better to retain the heat, Jack shut up one end of it and +filled it with sand. True, the work was very slowly done, but it +mattered not - we had little else to do. Two holes were bored in +each timber, about an inch and a half apart, and also down into the +keel, but not quite through. Into these were placed stout pegs +made of a tree called iron-wood; and, when they were hammered well +home, the timbers were as firmly fixed as if they had been nailed +with iron. The gunwales, which were very stout, were fixed in a +similar manner. But, besides the wooden nails, they were firmly +lashed to the stem and stern posts and ribs by means of a species +of cordage which we had contrived to make out of the fibrous husk +of the cocoa nut. This husk was very tough, and when a number of +the threads were joined together they formed excellent cordage. At +first we tied the different lengths together, but this was such a +clumsy and awkward complication of knots, that we contrived, by +careful interlacing of the ends together before twisting, to make +good cordage of any size or length we chose. Of course it cost us +much time and infinite labour, but Jack kept up our spirits when we +grew weary, and so all that we required was at last constructed. + +Planks were now cut off the chestnut trees of about an inch thick. +These were dressed with the axe, - but clumsily, for an axe is ill +adapted for such work. Five of these planks on each side were +sufficient, and we formed the boat in a very rounded, barrel-like +shape, in order to have as little twisting of the planks as +possible; for, although we could easily bend them, we could not +easily twist them. Having no nails to rivet the planks with, we +threw aside the ordinary fashion of boat building and adopted one +of our own. The planks were therefore placed on each other's +edges, and sewed together with the tough cordage already mentioned. +They were also thus sewed to the stem, the stern, and the keel. +Each stitch or tie was six inches apart, and was formed thus: +Three holes were bored in the upper plank and three in the lower, - +the holes being above each other, that is, in a vertical line. +Through these holes the cord was passed, and, when tied, formed a +powerful stitch of three ply. Besides this, we placed between the +edges of the planks, layers of cocoa-nut fibre, which, as it +swelled when wetted, would, we hoped, make our little vessel water- +tight. But in order further to secure this end, we collected a +large quantity of pitch from the bread-fruit tree, with which, when +boiled in our old iron pot, we payed the whole of the inside of the +boat, and, while it was yet hot, placed large pieces of cocoa-nut +cloth on it, and then gave it another coat above that. Thus the +interior was covered with a tough water-tight material; while the +exterior, being uncovered, and so exposed to the swelling action of +the water, was we hoped, likely to keep the boat quite dry. I may +add that our hopes were not disappointed. + +While Jack was thus engaged, Peterkin and I sometimes assisted him, +but, as our assistance was not much required, we more frequently +went a-hunting on the extensive mud-flats at the entrance of the +long valley which lay nearest to our bower. Here we found large +flocks of ducks of various kinds, some of them bearing so much +resemblance to the wild ducks of our own country that I think they +must have been the same. On these occasions we took the bow and +the sling, with both of which we were often successful, though I +must confess I was the least so. Our suppers were thus pleasantly +varied, and sometimes we had such a profusion spread out before us +that we frequently knew not with which of the dainties to begin. + +I must also add, that the poor old cat which we had brought home +had always a liberal share of our good things, and so well was it +looked after, especially by Peterkin, that it recovered much of its +former strength, and seemed to improve in sight as well as hearing. + +The large flat stone, or rock of coral, which stood just in front +of the entrance to our bower, was our table. On this rock we had +spread out the few articles we possessed the day we were +shipwrecked; and on the same rock, during many a day afterwards, we +spread out the bountiful supply with which we had been blessed on +our Coral Island. Sometimes we sat down at this table to a feast +consisting of hot rolls, - as Peterkin called the newly baked bread +fruit, - a roast pig, roast duck, boiled and roasted yams, cocoa +nuts, taro, and sweet potatoes; which we followed up with a dessert +of plums, apples, and plantains, - the last being a large-sized and +delightful fruit, which grew on a large shrub or tree not more than +twelve feet high, with light-green leaves of enormous length and +breadth. These luxurious feasts were usually washed down with +cocoa-nut lemonade. + +Occasionally Peterkin tried to devise some new dish, - "a +conglomerate," as he used to say; but these generally turned out +such atrocious compounds that he was ultimately induced to give up +his attempts in extreme disgust. Not forgetting, however, to point +out to Jack that his failure was a direct contradiction to the +proverb which he, Jack, was constantly thrusting down his throat, +namely, that "where there's a will there's a way." For he had a +great will to become a cook, but could by no means find a way to +accomplish that end. + +One day, while Peterkin and I were seated beside our table on which +dinner was spread, Jack came up from the beach, and, flinging down +his axe, exclaimed, - + +"There, lads, the boat's finished at last! so we've nothing to do +now but shape two pair of oars, and then we may put to sea as soon +as we like." + +This piece of news threw us into a state of great joy; for although +we were aware that the boat had been gradually getting near its +completion, it had taken so long that we did not expect it to be +quite ready for at least two or three weeks. But Jack had wrought +hard and said nothing, in order to surprise us. + +"My dear fellow," cried Peterkin, "you're a perfect trump. But why +did you not tell us it was so nearly ready? won't we have a jolly +sail to-morrow? eh?" + +"Don't talk so much, Peterkin," said Jack; "and, pray, hand me a +bit of that pig." + +"Certainly, my dear," cried Peterkin, seizing the axe; "what part +will you have? a leg, or a wing, or a piece of the breast; which?" + +"A hind leg, if you please," answered Jack; "and, pray, be so good +as to include the tail." + +"With all my heart," said Peterkin, exchanging the axe for his +hoop-iron knife, with which he cut off the desired portion. "I'm +only too glad, my dear boy, to see that your appetite is so +wholesale; and there's no chance whatever of its dwindling down +into re-tail again, at least in so far as this pig is concerned. +Ralph, lad, why don't you laugh? - eh?" he added turning suddenly +to me with a severe look of inquiry. + +"Laugh?" said I; "what at, Peterkin? why should I laugh?" + +Both Jack and Peterkin answered this inquiry by themselves laughing +so immoderately that I was induced to believe I had missed noticing +some good joke, so I begged that it might be explained to me; but +as this only produced repeated roars of laughter, I smiled and +helped myself to another slice of plantain. + +"Well, but," continued Peterkin, "I was talking of a sail to- +morrow. Can't we have one, Jack?" + +"No," replied Jack, "we can't have a sail, but I hope we shall have +a row, as I intend to work hard at the oars this afternoon, and, if +we can't get them finished by sunset we'll light our candle-nuts, +and turn them out of hands before we turn into bed." + +"Very good," said Peterkin, tossing a lump of pork to the cat, who +received it with a mew of satisfaction. "I'll help you, if I can." + +"Afterwards," continued Jack, "we will make a sail out of the +cocoa-nut cloth, and rig up a mast, and then we shall be able to +sail to some of the other islands, and visit our old friends the +penguins." + +The prospect of being so soon in a position to extend our +observations to the other islands, and enjoy a sail over the +beautiful sea, afforded us much delight, and, after dinner, we set +about making the oars in good earnest. Jack went into the woods +and blocked them roughly out with the axe, and I smoothed them down +with the knife, while Peterkin remained in the bower, spinning, or, +rather, twisting some strong thick cordage with which to fasten +them to the boat. + +We worked hard and rapidly, so that, when the sun went down, Jack +and I returned to the bower with four stout oars, which required +little to be done to them save a slight degree of polishing with +the knife. As we drew near we were suddenly arrested by the sound +of a voice! We were not a little surprised at this - indeed I may +almost say alarmed - for, although Peterkin was undoubtedly fond of +talking, we had never, up to this time, found him talking to +himself. We listened intently, and still heard the sound of a +voice as if in conversation. Jack motioned me to be silent, and, +advancing to the bower on tip-toe, we peeped in. + +The sight that met our gaze was certainly not a little amusing. On +the top of a log which we sometimes used as a table, sat the black +cat, with a very demure expression on its countenance; and in front +of it, sitting on the ground, with his legs extended on either side +of the log, was Peterkin. At the moment we saw him he was gazing +intently into the cat's face, with his nose about four inches from +it, - his hands being thrust into his breeches pockets. + +"Cat," said Peterkin, turning his head a little on one side, "I +love you!" + +There was a pause, as if Peterkin awaited a reply to this +affectionate declaration but the cat said nothing. + +"Do you hear me?" cried Peterkin, sharply. "I love you - I do. +Don't you love me?" + +To this touching appeal the cat said "Mew," faintly. + +"Ah! that's right. You're a jolly old rascal. Why did you not +speak at once? eh?" and Peterkin put forward his mouth and kissed +the cat on the nose! + +"Yes," continued Peterkin, after a pause, "I love you. D'you think +I'd say so if I didn't, you black villain? I love you because I've +got to take care of you, and to look after you, and to think about +you, and to see that you don't die - " + +"Mew, me-a-w!" said the cat. + +"Very good," continued Peterkin, "quite true, I have no doubt; but +you've no right to interrupt me, sir. Hold your tongue till I have +done speaking. Moreover, cat, I love you because you came to me +the first time you ever saw me, and didn't seem to be afraid, and +appeared to be fond of me, though you didn't know that I wasn't +going to kill you. Now, that was brave, that was bold, and very +jolly, old boy, and I love you for it - I do!" + +Again there was a pause of a few minutes, during which the cat +looked placid, and Peterkin dropped his eyes upon its toes as if in +contemplation. Suddenly he looked up. + +"Well, cat, what are you thinking about now? won't speak? eh? Now, +tell me; don't you think it's a monstrous shame that these two +scoundrels, Jack and Ralph, should keep us waiting for our supper +so long?" + +Here the cat arose, put up its back and stretched itself; yawned +slightly, and licked the point of Peterkin's nose! + +"Just so, old boy, you're a clever fellow, - I really do believe +the brute understands me!" said Peterkin, while a broad grin +overspread his face, as he drew back and surveyed the cat. + +At this point Jack burst into a loud fit of laughter. The cat +uttered an angry fuff and fled, while Peterkin sprang up and +exclaimed, - + +"Bad luck to you, Jack! you've nearly made the heart jump out of my +body, you have." + +"Perhaps I have," replied Jack, laughing, as we entered the bower, +"but, as I don't intend to keep you or the cat any longer from your +supper, I hope that you'll both forgive me." + +Peterkin endeavoured to turn this affair off with a laugh, but I +observed that he blushed very deeply at the time we discovered +ourselves, and he did not seem to relish any allusion to the +subject afterwards; so we refrained from remarking on it ever +after, - though it tickled us not a little at the time. + +After supper we retired to rest and to dream of wonderful +adventures in our little boat, and distant voyages upon the sea. + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + + +The boat launched - We visit the coral reef - The great breaker +that never goes down - Coral insects - The way in which coral +islands are made - The boat's sail - We tax our ingenuity to form +fish-hooks - Some of the fish we saw - And a monstrous whale - +Wonderful shower of little fish - Water-spouts. + + +IT was a bright, clear, beautiful morning, when we first launched +our little boat and rowed out upon the placid waters of the lagoon. +Not a breath of wind ruffled the surface of the deep. Not a cloud +spotted the deep blue sky. Not a sound that was discordant broke +the stillness of the morning, although there were many sounds, +sweet, tiny, and melodious, that mingled in the universal harmony +of nature. The sun was just rising from the Pacific's ample bosom +and tipping the mountain tops with a red glow. The sea was shining +like a sheet of glass, yet heaving with the long deep swell that, +all the world round, indicates the life of ocean; and the bright +sea-weeds and the brilliant corals shone in the depths of that +pellucid water, as we rowed over it, like rare and precious gems. +Oh! it was a sight fitted to stir the soul of man to its +profoundest depths, and, if he owned a heart at all, to lift that +heart in adoration and gratitude to the great Creator of this +magnificent and glorious universe. + +At first, in the strength of our delight, we rowed hither and +thither without aim or object. But after the effervescence of our +spirits was abated, we began to look about us and to consider what +we should do. + +"I vote that we row to the reef," cried Peterkin. + +"And I vote that we visit the islands within the lagoon," said I. + +"And I vote we do both," cried Jack, "so pull away, boys." + +As I have already said, we had made four oars, but our boat was so +small that only two were necessary. The extra pair were reserved +in case any accident should happen to the others. It was therefore +only needful that two of us should row, while the third steered, by +means of an oar, and relieved the rowers occasionally. + +First we landed on one of the small islands and ran all over it, +but saw nothing worthy of particular notice. Then we landed on a +larger island, on which were growing a few cocoa-nut trees. Not +having eaten anything that morning, we gathered a few of the nuts +and breakfasted. After this we pulled straight out to sea and +landed on the coral reef. + +This was indeed a novel and interesting sight to us. We had now +been so long on shore that we had almost forgotten the appearance +of breakers, for there were none within the lagoon; but now, as we +stood beside the foam-crested billow of the open sea, all the +enthusiasm of the sailor was awakened in our breasts; and, as we +gazed on the wide-spread ruin of that single magnificent breaker +that burst in thunder at our feet, we forgot the Coral Island +behind us; we forgot our bower and the calm repose of the scented +woods; we forgot all that had passed during the last few months, +and remembered nothing but the storms, the calms, the fresh breezes +and the surging billows of the open sea. + +This huge, ceaseless breaker, to which I have so often alluded, was +a much larger and more sublime object than we had at all imagined +it to be. It rose many yards above the level of the sea, and could +be seen approaching at some distance from the reef. Slowly and +majestically it came on, acquiring greater volume and velocity as +it advanced, until it assumed the form of a clear watery arch, +which sparkled in the bright sun. On it came with resistless and +solemn majesty, - the upper edge lipped gently over, and it fell +with a roar that seemed as though the heart of Ocean were broken in +the crash of tumultuous water, while the foam-clad coral reef +appeared to tremble beneath the mighty shock! + +We gazed long and wonderingly at this great sight, and it was with +difficulty we could tear ourselves away from it. As I have once +before mentioned, this wave broke in many places over the reef and +scattered some of its spray into the lagoon, but in most places the +reef was sufficiently broad and elevated to receive and check its +entire force. In many places the coral rocks were covered with +vegetation, - the beginning, as it appeared to us, of future +islands. Thus, on this reef, we came to perceive how most of the +small islands of those seas are formed. On one part we saw the +spray of the breaker washing over the rocks, and millions of +little, active, busy creatures continuing the work of building up +this living rampart. At another place, which was just a little too +high for the waves to wash over it, the coral insects were all +dead; for we found that they never did their work above water. +They had faithfully completed the mighty work which their Creator +had given them to do, and they were now all dead. Again, in other +spots the ceaseless lashing of the sea had broken the dead coral in +pieces, and cast it up in the form of sand. Here sea-birds had +alighted, little pieces of sea-weed and stray bits of wood had been +washed up, seeds of plants had been carried by the wind and a few +lovely blades of bright green had already sprung up, which, when +they died, would increase the size and fertility of these emeralds +of Ocean. At other places these islets had grown apace, and were +shaded by one or two cocoa-nut trees, which grew, literally, in the +sand, and were constantly washed by the ocean spray; yet, as I have +before remarked, their fruit was most refreshing and sweet to our +taste. + +Again at this time Jack and I pondered the formation of the large +coral islands. We could now understand how the low ones were +formed, but the larger islands cost us much consideration, yet we +could arrive at no certain conclusion on the subject. + +Having satisfied our curiosity and enjoyed ourselves during the +whole day, in our little boat, we returned, somewhat wearied, and, +withal, rather hungry, to our bower. + +"Now," said Jack, "as our boat answers so well, we will get a mast +and sail made immediately." + +"So we will," cried Peterkin, as we all assisted to drag the boat +above high-water mark; "we'll light our candle and set about it +this very night. Hurrah, my boys, pull away!" + +As we dragged our boat, we observed that she grated heavily on her +keel; and, as the sands were in this place mingled with broken +coral rocks, we saw portions of the wood being scraped off. + +"Hallo!" cried Jack, on seeing this. "That won't do. Our keel +will be worn off in no time at this rate." + +"So it will," said I, pondering deeply as to how this might be +prevented. But I am not of a mechanical turn, naturally, so I +could conceive no remedy save that of putting a plate of iron on +the keel, but as we had no iron I knew not what was to be done. +"It seems to me, Jack," I added, "that it is impossible to prevent +the keel being worn off thus." + +"Impossible!" cried Peterkin, "my dear Ralph, you are mistaken, +there is nothing so easy - " + +"How?" I inquired, in some surprise. + +"Why, by not using the boat at all!" replied Peterkin. + +"Hold your impudent tongue, Peterkin," said Jack, as he shouldered +the oars, "come along with me and I'll give you work to do. In the +first place, you will go and collect cocoa-nut fibre, and set to +work to make sewing twine with it - " + +"Please, captain," interrupted Peterkin, "I've got lots of it made +already, - more than enough, as a little friend of mine used to be +in the habit of saying every day after dinner." + +"Very well," continued Jack; "then you'll help Ralph to collect +cocoa-nut cloth, and cut it into shape, after which we'll make a +sail of it. I'll see to getting the mast and the gearing; so let's +to work." + +And to work we went right busily, so that in three days from that +time we had set up a mast and sail, with the necessary rigging, in +our little boat. The sail was not, indeed, very handsome to look +at, as it was formed of a number of oblong patches of cloth; but we +had sewed it well by means of our sail-needle, so that it was +strong, which was the chief point. Jack had also overcome the +difficulty about the keel, by pinning to it a FALSE keel. This was +a piece of tough wood, of the same length and width as the real +keel, and about five inches deep. He made it of this depth because +the boat would be thereby rendered not only much more safe, but +more able to beat against the wind; which, in a sea where the +trade-winds blow so long and so steadily in one direction, was a +matter of great importance. This piece of wood was pegged very +firmly to the keel; and we now launched our boat with the +satisfaction of knowing that when the false keel should be scraped +off we could easily put on another; whereas, should the real keel +have been scraped away, we could not have renewed it without taking +our boat to pieces, which Peterkin said made his "marrow quake to +think upon." + +The mast and sail answered excellently; and we now sailed about in +the lagoon with great delight, and examined with much interest the +appearance of our island from a distance. Also, we gazed into the +depths of the water, and watched for hours the gambols of the +curious and bright-coloured fish among the corals and sea-weed. +Peterkin also made a fishing line, and Jack constructed a number of +hooks, some of which were very good, others remarkably bad. Some +of these hooks were made of iron-wood, which did pretty well, the +wood being extremely hard, and Jack made them very thick and large. +Fish there are not particular. Some of the crooked bones in fish- +heads also answered for this purpose pretty well. But that which +formed our best and most serviceable hook was the brass finger-ring +belonging to Jack. It gave him not a little trouble to manufacture +it. First he cut it with the axe; then twisted it into the form of +a hook. The barb took him several hours to cut. He did it by +means of constant sawing with the broken pen-knife. As for the +point, an hour's rubbing on a piece of sandstone made an excellent +one. + +It would be a matter of much time and labour to describe the +appearance of the multitudes of fish that were day after day drawn +into our boat by means of the brass hook. Peterkin always caught +them, - for we observed that he derived much pleasure from fishing, +- while Jack and I found ample amusement in looking on, also in +gazing down at the coral groves, and in baiting the hook. Among +the fish that we saw, but did not catch, were porpoises and sword- +fish, whales and sharks. The porpoises came frequently into our +lagoon in shoals, and amused us not a little by their bold leaps +into the air, and their playful gambols in the sea. The sword-fish +were wonderful creatures; some of them apparently ten feet in +length, with an ivory spear, six or eight feet long, projecting +from their noses. We often saw them darting after other fish, and +no doubt they sometimes killed them with their ivory swords. Jack +remembered having heard once of a sword-fish attacking a ship, - +which seemed strange indeed; but, as they are often in the habit of +attacking whales, perhaps it mistook the ship for one. This sword- +fish ran against the vessel with such force, that it drove its +sword quite through the thick planks; and when the ship arrived in +harbour, long afterwards, the sword was found still sticking in it! + +Sharks did not often appear; but we took care never again to bathe +in deep water without leaving one of our number in the boat to give +us warning, if he should see a shark approaching. As for the +whales, they never came into our lagoon, but we frequently saw them +spouting in the deep water beyond the reef. I shall never forget +my surprise the first day I saw one of these huge monsters close to +me. We had been rambling about on the reef during the morning, and +were about to re-embark in our little boat, to return home, when a +loud blowing sound caused us to wheel rapidly round. We were just +in time to see a shower of spray falling, and the flukes or tail of +some monstrous fish disappear in the sea a few hundred yards off. +We waited some time to see if he would rise again. As we stood, +the sea seemed to open up at our very feet; an immense spout of +water was sent with a snort high into the air, and the huge blunt +head of a sperm whale arose before us. It was so large that it +could easily have taken our little boat, along with ourselves, into +its mouth! It plunged slowly back into the sea, like a large ship +foundering, and struck the water with its tail so forcibly as to +cause a sound like a cannon shot. We also saw a great number of +flying fish, although we caught none; and we noticed that they +never flew out of the water except when followed by their bitter +foe, the dolphin, from whom they thus endeavoured to escape. But +of all the fish that we saw, none surprised us so much as those +that we used to find in shallow pools after a shower of rain; and +this not on account of their appearance, for they were ordinary- +looking and very small, but on account of their having descended in +a shower of rain! We could account for them in no other way, +because the pools in which we found these fish were quite dry +before the shower, and at some distance above high-water mark. +Jack, however, suggested a cause which seemed to me very probable. +We used often to see water-spouts in the sea. A water-spout is a +whirling body of water, which rises from the sea like a sharp- +pointed pillar. After rising a good way, it is met by a long +tongue, which comes down from the clouds; and when the two have +joined, they look something like an hour-glass. The water-spout is +then carried by the wind, sometimes gently, sometimes with +violence, over the sea, sometimes up into the clouds, and then, +bursting asunder, it descends in a deluge. This often happens over +the land as well as over the sea; and it sometimes does much +damage, but frequently it passes gently away. Now, Jack thought +that the little fish might perhaps have been carried up in a water- +spout, and so sent down again in a shower of rain. But we could +not be certain as to this point; yet we thought it likely. + +During these delightful fishing and boating excursions we caught a +good many eels, which we found to be very good to eat. We also +found turtles among the coral rocks, and made excellent soup in our +iron kettle. Moreover, we discovered many shrimps and prawns, so +that we had no lack of variety in our food; and, indeed, we never +passed a week without making some new and interesting discovery of +some sort or other, either on the land or in the sea. + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + + +A monster wave and its consequences - The boat lost and found - +Peterkin's terrible accident - Supplies of food for a voyage in the +boat - We visit Penguin Island, and are amazed beyond measure - +Account of the penguins. + + +ONE day, not long after our little boat was finished, we were +sitting on the rocks at Spouting Cliff, and talking of an excursion +which we intended to make to Penguin Island the next day. + +"You see," said Peterkin, "it might be all very well for a stupid +fellow like me to remain here and leave the penguins alone, but it +would be quite inconsistent with your characters as philosophers to +remain any longer in ignorance of the habits and customs of these +birds; so the sooner we go the better." + +"Very true," said I; "there is nothing I desire so much as to have +a closer inspection of them." + +"And I think," said Jack, "that you had better remain at home, +Peterkin, to take care of the cat; for I'm sure the hogs will be at +it in your absence, out of revenge for your killing their great- +grandmother so recklessly." + +"Stay at home?" cried Peterkin; "my dear fellow, you would +certainly lose your way, or get upset, if I were not there to take +care of you." + +"Ah, true," said Jack, gravely, "that did not occur to me; no doubt +you must go. Our boat does require a good deal of ballast; and all +that you say, Peterkin, carries so much weight with it, that we +won't need stones if you go." + +Now, while my companions were talking, a notable event occurred, +which, as it is not generally known, I shall be particular in +recording here. + +While we were talking, as I have said, we noticed a dark line, like +a low cloud or fog-bank, on the seaward horizon. The day was a +fine one, though cloudy, and a gentle breeze was blowing, but the +sea was not rougher, or the breaker on the reef higher, than usual. +At first we thought that this looked like a thunder-cloud; and, as +we had had a good deal of broken weather of late, accompanied by +occasional peals of thunder, we supposed that a storm must be +approaching. Gradually, however, this line seemed to draw nearer, +without spreading up over the sky, as would certainly have been the +case if it had been a storm-cloud. Still nearer it came, and soon +we saw that it was moving swiftly towards the island; but there was +no sound till it reached the islands out at sea. As it passed +these islands, we observed, with no little anxiety, that a cloud of +white foam encircled them, and burst in spray into the air: it was +accompanied by a loud roar. This led us to conjecture that the +approaching object was an enormous wave of the sea; but we had no +idea how large it was till it came near to ourselves. When it +approached the outer reef, however, we were awe-struck with its +unusual magnitude; and we sprang to our feet, and clambered hastily +up to the highest point of the precipice, under an indefinable +feeling of fear. + +I have said before that the reef opposite Spouting Cliff was very +near to the shore, while, just in front of the bower, it was at a +considerable distance out to sea. Owing to this formation, the +wave reached the reef at the latter point before it struck at the +foot of Spouting Cliff. The instant it touched the reef we became +aware, for the first time, of its awful magnitude. It burst +completely over the reef at all points, with a roar that seemed +louder to me than thunder; and this roar continued for some +seconds, while the wave rolled gradually along towards the cliff on +which we stood. As its crest reared before us, we felt that we +were in great danger, and turned to flee; but we were too late. +With a crash that seemed to shake the solid rocks the gigantic +billow fell, and instantly the spouting-holes sent up a gush of +water-spouts with such force that they shrieked on issuing from +their narrow vents. It seemed to us as if the earth had been blown +up with water. We were stunned and confused by the shock, and so +drenched and blinded with spray, that we knew not for a few moments +whither to flee for shelter. At length we all three gained an +eminence beyond the reach of the water; but what a scene of +devastation met our gaze as we looked along the shore! This +enormous wave not only burst over the reef, but continued its way +across the lagoon, and fell on the sandy beach of the island with +such force that passed completely over it and dashed into the +woods, levelling the smaller trees and bushes in its headlong +course! + +On seeing this, Jack said he feared our bower must have been swept +away, and that the boat, which was on the beach, must have been +utterly destroyed. Our hearts sank within us as we thought of +this, and we hastened round through the woods towards our home. On +reaching it we found, to our great relief of mind, that the force +of the wave had been expended just before reaching the bower; but +the entrance to it was almost blocked up by the torn-up bushes and +tangled heaps of sea-weed. Having satisfied ourselves as to the +bower, we hurried to the spot where the boat had been left; but no +boat was there! The spot on which it had stood was vacant, and no +sign of it could we see on looking around us. + +"It may have been washed up into the woods," said Jack, hurrying up +the beach as he spoke. Still, no boat was to be seen, and we were +about to give ourselves over to despair, when Peterkin called to +Jack and said, - + +"Jack, my friend, you were once so exceedingly sagacious and wise +as to make me acquainted with the fact that cocoa nuts grow upon +trees; will you now be so good as to inform me what sort of fruit +that is growing on the top of yonder bush? for I confess to being +ignorant, or, at least, doubtful on the point." + +We looked towards the bush indicated, and there, to our surprise, +beheld our little boat snugly nestled among the leaves! We were +very much overjoyed at this, for we would have suffered any loss +rather than the loss of our boat. We found that the wave had +actually borne the boat on its crest from the beach into the woods, +and there launched it into the heart of this bush; which was +extremely fortunate, for had it been tossed against a rock or a +tree, it would have been dashed to pieces, whereas it had not +received the smallest injury. It was no easy matter, however, to +get it out of the bush and down to the sea again. This cost us two +days of hard labour to accomplish. + +We had also much ado to clear away the rubbish from before the +bower, and spent nearly a week in constant labour ere we got the +neighbourhood to look as clean and orderly as before; for the +uprooted bushes and sea-weed that lay on the beach formed a more +dreadfully confused-looking mass than one who had not seen the +place after the inundation could conceive. + +Before leaving the subject I may mention, for the sake of those who +interest themselves in the curious natural phenomena of our world, +that this gigantic wave occurs regularly on some of the islands of +the Pacific, once, and sometimes twice in the year. I heard this +stated by the missionaries during my career in those seas. They +could not tell me whether it visited all of the islands, but I was +certainly assured that it occurred periodically in some of them. + +After we had got our home put to rights and cleared of the DEBRIS +of the inundation, we again turned our thoughts to paying the +penguins a visit. The boat was therefore overhauled and a few +repairs done. Then we prepared a supply of provisions, for we +intended to be absent at least a night or two, perhaps longer. +This took us some time to do, for while Jack was busy with the +boat, Peterkin was sent into the woods to spear a hog or two, and +had to search long, sometimes, ere he found them. Peterkin was +usually sent on this errand, when we wanted a pork chop (which was +not seldom), because he was so active, and could run so wonderfully +fast that he found no difficulty in overtaking the hogs; but, being +dreadfully reckless, he almost invariably tumbled over stumps and +stones in the course of his wild chase, and seldom returned home +without having knocked the skin off his shins. Once, indeed, a +more serious accident happened to him. He had been out all morning +alone and did not return at the usual time to dinner. We wondered +at this, for Peterkin was always very punctual at the dinner hour. +As supper-time drew near we began to be anxious about him, and at +length sallied forth to search the woods. For a long time we +sought in vain, but a little before dark we came upon the tracks of +the hogs, which we followed up until we came to the brow of a +rather steep bank or precipice. Looking over this we beheld +Peterkin lying in a state of insensibility at the foot, with his +cheek resting on the snout of a little pig, which was pinned to the +earth by the spear! We were dreadfully alarmed, but hastened to +bathe his forehead with water, and had soon the satisfaction of +seeing him revive. After we had carried him home he related to as +how the thing had happened. + +"You must know," said he, "I walked about all the forenoon, till I +was as tired as an old donkey, without seeing a single grunter, not +so much as a track of one; but, as I was determined not to return +empty-handed, I resolved to go without my dinner and - " + +"What!" exclaimed Jack, "did you REALLY resolve to do that?" + +"Now, Jack, hold your tongue," returned Peterkin; "I say that I +resolved to forego my dinner and to push to the head of the small +valley, where I felt pretty sure of discovering the hogs. I soon +found that I was on the right scent, for I had scarcely walked half +a mile in the direction of the small plum tree we found there the +other day, when a squeak fell on my ear. 'Ho, ho,' said I, 'there +you go, my boys;' and I hurried up the glen. I soon started them, +and singling out a fat pig, ran tilt at him. In a few seconds I +was up with him, and stuck my spear right through his dumpy body. +Just as I did so, I saw that we were on the edge of a precipice, +whether high or low I knew not, but I had been running at such a +pace that I could not stop, so the pig and I gave a howl in concert +and went plunging over together. I remembered nothing more after +that, till I came to my senses and found you bathing my temples, +and Ralph wringing his hands over me." + +But although Peterkin was often unfortunate, in the way of getting +tumbles, he was successful on the present occasion in hunting, and +returned before evening with three very nice little hogs. I, also, +was successful in my visit to the mud-flats, where I killed several +ducks. So that, when we launched and loaded our boat at sunrise +the following morning, we found our store of provisions to be more +than sufficient. Part had been cooked the night before, and, on +taking note of the different items, we found the account to stand +thus:- + + +10 Bread-fruits, (two baked, eight unbaked.) +20 Yams, (six roasted, the rest raw.) +6 Taro roots. +50 Fine large plums. +6 Cocoa nuts, ripe. +6 Ditto green, (for drinking.) +4 Large ducks and two small ones, raw. +3 Cold roast pigs, with stuffing. + + +I may here remark that the stuffing had been devised by Peterkin +specially for the occasion. He kept the manner of its compounding +a profound secret, so I cannot tell what it was; but I can say, +with much confidence, that we found it to be atrociously bad, and, +after the first tasting, scraped it carefully out and threw it +overboard. We calculated that this supply would last us for +several days, but we afterwards found that it was much more than we +required, especially in regard to the cocoa nuts, of which we found +large supplies wherever we went. However, as Peterkin remarked, it +was better to have too much than too little, as we knew not to what +straits we might be put during our voyage. + +It was a very calm sunny morning when we launched forth and rowed +over the lagoon towards the outlet in the reef, and passed between +the two green islets that guard the entrance. We experienced some +difficulty and no little danger in passing the surf of the breaker, +and shipped a good deal of water in the attempt; but, once past the +billow, we found ourselves floating placidly on the long oily swell +that rose and fell slowly as it rolled over the wide ocean. + +Penguin Island lay on the other side of our own island, at about a +mile beyond the outer reef, and we calculated that it must be at +least twenty miles distant by the way we should have to go. We +might, indeed, have shortened the way by coasting round our island +inside of the lagoon, and going out at the passage in the reef +nearly opposite to Penguin Island, but we preferred to go by the +open sea; first, because it was more adventurous; and, secondly, +because we should have the pleasure of again feeling the motion of +the deep, which we all loved very much, not being liable to sea +sickness. + +"I wish we had a breeze," said Jack. + +"So do I," cried Peterkin, resting on his oar and wiping his heated +brow; "pulling is hard work. Oh dear, if we could only catch a +hundred or two of these gulls, tie them to the boat with long +strings, and make them fly as we want them, how capital it would +be!" + +"Or bore a hole through a shark's tail, and reeve a rope through +it, eh?" remarked Jack. "But, I say, it seems that my wish is +going to be granted, for here comes a breeze. Ship your oar, +Peterkin. Up with the mast, Ralph; I'll see to the sail. Mind +your helm; look out for squalls!" + +This last speech was caused by the sudden appearance of a dark blue +line on the horizon, which, in an incredibly short space of time, +swept down on us, lashing up the sea in white foam as it went. We +presented the stern of the boat to its first violence, and, in a +few seconds, it moderated into a steady breeze, to which we spread +our sail and flew merrily over the waves. Although the breeze died +away soon afterwards, it had been so stiff while it lasted, that we +were carried over the greater part of our way before it fell calm +again; so that, when the flapping of the sail against the mast told +us that it was time to resume the oars, we were not much more than +a mile from Penguin Island. + +"There go the soldiers!" cried Peterkin as we came in sight of it; +"how spruce their white trousers look, this morning! I wonder if +they will receive us kindly. D'you think they are hospitable, +Jack?" + +"Don't talk, Peterkin, but pull away, and you shall see shortly." + +As we drew near to the island we were much amused by the manoeuvres +and appearance of these strange birds. They seemed to be of +different species, for some had crests on their heads while others +had none, and while some were about the size of a goose others +appeared nearly as large as a swan. We also saw a huge albatross +soaring above the heads of the penguins. It was followed and +surrounded by numerous flocks of sea-gulls. Having approached to +within a few yards of the island, which was a low rock, with no +other vegetation on it than a few bushes, we lay on our oars and +gazed at the birds with surprise and pleasure, they returning our +gaze with interest. We now saw that their soldier-like appearance +was owing to the stiff, erect manner in which they sat on their +short legs, - "Bolt-up-right," as Peterkin expressed it. They had +black heads, long sharp beaks, white breasts, and bluish backs. +Their wings were so short that they looked more like the fins of a +fish, and, indeed, we soon saw that they used them for the purpose +of swimming under water. There were no quills on these wings, but +a sort of scaly feathers; which also thickly covered their bodies. +Their legs were short, and placed so far back that the birds, while +on land, were obliged to stand quite upright in order to keep their +balance; but in the water they floated like other water-fowl. At +first we were so stunned with the clamour which they and other sea- +birds kept up around us, that we knew not which way to look, - for +they covered the rocks in thousands; but, as we continued to gaze, +we observed several quadrupeds (as we thought) walking in the midst +of the penguins. + +"Pull in a bit," cried Peterkin, "and let's see what these are. +They must be fond of noisy company, to consort with such +creatures." + +To our surprise we found that these were no other than penguins +which had gone down on all fours, and were crawling among the +bushes on their feet and wings, just like quadrupeds. Suddenly one +big old bird, that had been sitting on a point very near to us, +gazing in mute astonishment, became alarmed, and, scuttling down +the rocks, plumped or fell, rather than ran, into the sea. It +dived in a moment, and, a few seconds afterwards, came out of the +water far a-head, with such a spring, and such a dive back into the +sea again, that we could scarcely believe it was not a fish that +had leaped in sport. + +"That beats everything," said Peterkin, rubbing his nose, and +screwing up his face with an expression of exasperated amazement. +"I've heard of a thing being neither fish, flesh, nor fowl, but I +never did expect to live to see a brute that was all three +together, - at once - in one! But look there!" he continued, +pointing with a look of resignation to the shore, "look there! +there's no end to it. What HAS that brute got under its tail?" + +We turned to look in the direction pointed out, and there saw a +penguin walking slowly and very sedately along the shore with an +egg under its tail. There were several others, we observed, +burdened in the same way; and we found afterwards that these were a +species of penguins that always carried their eggs so. Indeed, +they had a most convenient cavity for the purpose, just between the +tail and the legs. We were very much impressed with the regularity +and order of this colony. The island seemed to be apportioned out +into squares, of which each penguin possessed one, and sat in stiff +solemnity in the middle of it, or took a slow march up and down the +spaces between. Some were hatching their eggs, but others were +feeding their young ones in a manner that caused us to laugh not a +little. The mother stood on a mound or raised rock, while the +young one stood patiently below her on the ground. Suddenly the +mother raised her head and uttered a series of the most discordant +cackling sounds. + +"She's going to choke," cried Peterkin. + +But this was not the case, although, I confess, she looked like it. +In a few seconds she put down her head and opened her mouth, into +which the young one thrust its beak and seemed to suck something +from her throat. Then the cackling was renewed, the sucking +continued, and so the operation of feeding was carried on till the +young one was satisfied; but what she fed her little one with, we +could not tell. + +"Now, just look yonder!" said Peterkin, in an excited tone; "if +that isn't the most abominable piece of maternal deception I ever +saw. That rascally old lady penguin has just pitched her young one +into the sea, and there's another about to follow her example." + +This indeed seemed to be the cue, for, on the top of a steep rock +close to the edge of the sea, we observed an old penguin +endeavouring to entice her young one into the water; but the young +one seemed very unwilling to go, and, notwithstanding the +enticements of its mother, moved very slowly towards her. At last +she went gently behind the young bird and pushed it a little +towards the water, but with great tenderness, as much as to say, +'Don't be afraid, darling! I won't hurt you, my pet!' but no +sooner did she get it to the edge of the rock, where it stood +looking pensively down at the sea, than she gave it a sudden and +violent push, sending it headlong down the slope into the water, +where its mother left it to scramble ashore as it best could. We +observed many of them employed in doing this, and we came to the +conclusion that this is the way in which old penguins teach their +children to swim. + +Scarcely had we finished making our remarks on this, when we were +startled by about a dozen of the old birds hopping in the most +clumsy and ludicrous manner towards the sea. The beach, here, was +a sloping rock, and when they came to it, some of them succeeded in +hopping down in safety, but others lost their balance and rolled +and scrambled down the slope in the most helpless manner. The +instant they reached the water, however, they seemed to be in their +proper element. They dived and bounded out of it and into it again +with the utmost agility; and so, diving and bounding and +spluttering, for they could not fly, they went rapidly out to sea, + +On seeing this, Peterkin turned with a grave face to us and said, +"It's my opinion that these birds are all stark, staring mad, and +that this is an enchanted island. I therefore propose that we +should either put about ship and fly in terror from the spot, or +land valorously on the island, and sell our lives as dearly as we +can." + +"I vote for landing, so pull in, lads," said Jack, giving a stroke +with his oar that made the boat spin. In a few seconds we ran the +boat into a little creek where we made her fast to a projecting +piece of coral, and, running up the beach, entered the ranks of the +penguins armed with our cudgels and our spear. We were greatly +surprised to find that, instead of attacking us or showing signs of +fear at our approach, these curious birds did not move from their +places until we laid hands on them, and merely turned their eyes on +us in solemn, stupid wonder as we passed. There was one old +penguin, however, that began to walk slowly toward the sea, and +Peterkin took it into his head that he would try to interrupt its +progress, so he ran between it and the sea and brandished his +cudgel in its face. But this proved to be a resolute old bird. It +would not retreat; nay, more, it would not cease to advance, but +battled with Peterkin bravely and drove him before it until it +reached the sea. Had Peterkin used his club he could easily have +felled it, no doubt; but, as he had no wish to do so cruel an act +merely out of sport, he let the bird escape. + +We spent fully three hours on this island in watching the habits of +these curious birds, and, when we finally left them, we all three +concluded, after much consultation, that they were the most +wonderful creatures we had ever seen; and further, we thought it +probable that they were the most wonderful creatures in the world! + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + + +An awful storm and its consequences - Narrow escape - A rock proves +a sure foundation - A fearful night and a bright morning - +Deliverance from danger. + + +IT was evening before we left the island of the penguins. As we +had made up our minds to encamp for the night on a small island, +whereon grew a few cocoa-nut trees, which was about two miles off, +we lay to our oars with some energy. But a danger was in store for +us which we had not anticipated. The wind, which had carried us so +quickly to Penguin Island, freshened as evening drew on, to a stiff +breeze, and, before we had made half the distance to the small +island, it became a regular gale. Although it was not so directly +against us as to prevent our rowing in the course we wished to go, +yet it checked us very much; and although the force of the sea was +somewhat broken by the island, the waves soon began to rise, and to +roll their broken crests against our small craft, so that she began +to take in water, and we had much ado to keep ourselves afloat. At +last the wind and sea together became so violent that we found it +impossible to make the island, so Jack suddenly put the head of the +boat round and ordered Peterkin and me to hoist a corner of the +sail, intending to run back to Penguin Island. + +"We shall at least have the shelter of the bushes," he said, as the +boat flew before the wind, "and the penguins will keep us company." + +As Jack spoke, the wind suddenly shifted, and blew so much against +us that we were forced to hoist more of the sail in order to beat +up for the island, being by this change thrown much to leeward of +it. What made matters worse was, that the gale came in squalls, so +that we were more than once nearly upset. + +"Stand by, both of you," cried Jack, in a quick, earnest tone; "be +ready to dowse the sail. I very much fear we won't make the island +after all." + +Peterkin and I were so much in the habit of trusting everything to +Jack that we had fallen into the way of not considering things, +especially such things as were under Jack's care. We had, +therefore, never doubted for a moment that all was going well, so +that it was with no little anxiety that we heard him make the above +remark. However, we had no time for question or surmise, for, at +the moment he spoke, a heavy squall was bearing down upon us, and, +as we were then flying with our lee gunwale dipping occasionally +under the waves, it was evident that we should have to lower our +sail altogether. In a few seconds the squall struck the boat, but +Peterkin and I had the sail down in a moment, so that it did not +upset us; but, when it was past, we were more than half full of +water. This I soon baled out, while Peterkin again hoisted a +corner of the sail; but the evil which Jack had feared came upon +us. We found it quite impossible to make Penguin Island. The gale +carried us quickly past it towards the open sea, and the terrible +truth flashed upon us that we should be swept out and left to +perish miserably in a small boat in the midst of the wide ocean. + +This idea was forced very strongly upon us because we saw nothing +in the direction whither the wind was blowing us save the raging +billows of the sea; and, indeed, we trembled as we gazed around us, +for we were now beyond the shelter of the islands, and it seemed as +though any of the huge billows, which curled over in masses of +foam, might swallow us up in a moment. The water, also, began to +wash in over our sides, and I had to keep constantly baling, for +Jack could not quit the helm nor Peterkin the sail for an instant, +without endangering our lives. In the midst of this distress Jack +uttered an exclamation of hope, and pointed towards a low island or +rock which lay directly ahead. It had been hitherto unobserved, +owing to the dark clouds that obscured the sky and the blinding +spray that seemed to fill the whole atmosphere. + +As we neared this rock we observed that it was quite destitute of +trees and verdure, and so low that the sea broke completely over +it. In fact it was nothing more than the summit of one of the +coral formations, which rose only a few feet above the level of the +water, and was, in stormy weather, all but invisible. Over this +island the waves were breaking in the utmost fury, and our hearts +sank within us as we saw that there was not a spot where we could +thrust our little boat without its being dashed to pieces. + +"Show a little bit more sail," cried Jack, as we swept past the +weather side of the rock with fearful speed. + +"Ay, ay," answered Peterkin, hoisting about a foot more of our +sail. + +Little though the addition was it caused the boat to lie over and +creak so loudly, as we cleft the foaming waves, that I expected to +be upset every instant; and I blamed Jack in my heart for his +rashness. But I did him injustice, for, although during two +seconds the water rushed in-board in a torrent, he succeeded in +steering us sharply round to the leeward side of the rock, where +the water was comparatively calm, and the force of the breeze +broken. + +"Out your oars now, lads; that's well done. Give way!" We obeyed +instantly. The oars splashed into the waves together. One good +hearty pull, and we were floating in a comparatively calm creek +that was so narrow as to be barely able to admit our boat. Here we +were in perfect safety, and, as we leaped on shore and fastened our +cable to the rocks, I thanked God in my heart for our deliverance +from so great danger. But, although I have said we were now in +safety, I suspect that few of my readers would have envied our +position. It is true we had no lack of food, but we were drenched +to the skin; the sea was foaming round us and the spray flying over +our heads, so that we were completely enveloped, as it were, in +water; the spot on which we had landed was not more than twelve +yards in diameter, and from this spot we could not move without the +risk of being swept away by the storm. At the upper end of the +creek was a small hollow or cave in the rock, which sheltered us +from the fury of the winds and waves; and as the rock extended in a +sort of ledge over our heads, it prevented the spray from falling +upon us. + +"Why," said Peterkin, beginning to feel cheery again, "it seems to +me that we have got into a mermaid's cave, for there is nothing but +water all round us; and as for earth or sky, they are things of the +past." + +Peterkin's idea was not inappropriate, for, what with the sea +roaring in white foam up to our very feet, and the spray flying in +white sheets continually over our heads, and the water dripping +heavily from the ledge above like a curtain in front of our cave, +it did seem to us very much more like being below than above water. + +"Now, boys," cried Jack, "bestir yourselves, and let's make +ourselves comfortable. Toss out our provisions, Peterkin; and +here, Ralph, lend a hand to haul up the boat. Look sharp." + +"Ay, ay, captain," we cried, as we hastened to obey, much cheered +by the hearty manner of our comrade. + +Fortunately the cave, although not very deep, was quite dry, so +that we succeeded in making ourselves much more comfortable than +could have been expected. We landed our provisions, wrung the +water out of our garments, spread our sail below us for a carpet, +and, after having eaten a hearty meal, began to feel quite +cheerful. But as night drew on, our spirits sank again, for with +the daylight all evidence of our security vanished away. We could +no longer see the firm rock on which we lay, while we were stunned +with the violence of the tempest that raged around us. The night +grew pitchy dark, as it advanced, so that we could not see our +hands when we held them up before our eyes, and were obliged to +feel each other occasionally to make sure that we were safe, for +the storm at last became so terrible that it was difficult to make +our voices audible. A slight variation of the wind, as we +supposed, caused a few drops of spray ever and anon to blow into +our faces; and the eddy of the sea, in its mad boiling, washed up +into our little creek until it reached our feet and threatened to +tear away our boat. In order to prevent this latter calamity, we +hauled the boat farther up and held the cable in our hands. +Occasional flashes of lightning shone with a ghastly glare through +the watery curtains around us, and lent additional horror to the +scene. Yet we longed for those dismal flashes, for they were less +appalling than the thick blackness that succeeded them. Crashing +peals of thunder seemed to tear the skies in twain, and fell upon +our ears through the wild yelling of the hurricane as if it had +been but a gentle summer breeze; while the billows burst upon the +weather side of the island until we fancied that the solid rock was +giving way, and, in our agony, we clung to the bare ground, +expecting every moment to be whirled away and whelmed in the black +howling sea! Oh! it was a night of terrible anxiety, and no one +can conceive the feelings of intense gratitude and relief with +which we at last saw the dawn of day break through the vapory mists +around us. + +For three days and three nights we remained on this rock, while the +storm continued to rage with unabated fury. On the morning of the +fourth day it suddenly ceased, and the wind fell altogether; but +the waves still ran so high that we did not dare to put off in our +boat. During the greater part of this period we scarcely slept +above a few minutes at a time, but on the third night we slept +soundly and awoke early on the fourth morning to find the sea very +much down, and the sun shining brightly again in the clear blue +sky. + +It was with light hearts that we launched forth once more in our +little boat and steered away for our island home, which, we were +overjoyed to find, was quite visible on the horizon, for we had +feared that we had been blown out of sight of it altogether. As it +was a dead calm we had to row during the greater part of the day; +but towards the afternoon a fair breeze sprang up, which enabled us +to hoist our sail. We soon passed Penguin Island, and the other +island which we had failed to reach on the day the storm commenced; +but as we had still enough of provisions, and were anxious to get +home, we did not land, to the great disappointment of Peterkin, who +seemed to entertain quite an affection for the penguins. + +Although the breeze was pretty fresh for several hours, we did not +reach the outer reef of our island till night-fall, and before we +had sailed more than a hundred yards into the lagoon, the wind died +away altogether, so that we had to take to our oars again. It was +late and the moon and stars were shining brightly when we arrived +opposite the bower and leaped upon the strand. So glad were we to +be safe back again on our beloved island, that we scarcely took +time to drag the boat a short way up the beach, and then ran up to +see that all was right at the bower. I must confess, however, that +my joy was mingled with a vague sort of fear lest our home had been +visited and destroyed during our absence; but on reaching it we +found everything just as it had been left, and the poor black cat +curled up, sound asleep, on the coral table in front of our humble +dwelling. + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + + +Shoemaking - The even tenor of our way suddenly interrupted - An +unexpected visit and an appalling battle - We all become warriors, +and Jack proves himself be a hero. + + +FOR many months after this we continued to live on our island in +uninterrupted harmony and happiness. Sometimes we went out a- +fishing in the lagoon, and sometimes went a-hunting in the woods, +or ascended to the mountain top, by way of variety, although +Peterkin always asserted that we went for the purpose of hailing +any ship that might chance to heave in sight. But I am certain +that none of us wished to be delivered from our captivity, for we +were extremely happy, and Peterkin used to say that as we were very +young we should not feel the loss of a year or two. Peterkin, as I +have said before, was thirteen years of age, Jack eighteen, and I +fifteen. But Jack was very tall, strong, and manly for his age, +and might easily have been mistaken for twenty. + +The climate was so beautiful that it seemed to be a perpetual +summer, and as many of the fruit-trees continued to bear fruit and +blossom all the year round, we never wanted for a plentiful supply +of food. The hogs, too, seemed rather to increase than diminish, +although Peterkin was very frequent in his attacks on them with his +spear. If at any time we failed in finding a drove, we had only to +pay a visit to the plum-tree before mentioned, where we always +found a large family of them asleep under its branches. + +We employed ourselves very busily during this time in making +various garments of cocoa-nut cloth, as those with which we had +landed were beginning to be very ragged. Peterkin also succeeded +in making excellent shoes out of the skin of the old hog, in the +following manner:- He first cut a piece of the hide, of an oblong +form, a few inches longer than his foot. This he soaked in water, +and, while it was wet, he sewed up one end of it, so as to form a +rough imitation of that part of the heel of a shoe where the seam +is. This done, he bored a row of holes all round the edge of the +piece of skin, through which a tough line was passed. Into the +sewed-up part of this shoe he thrust his heel, then, drawing the +string tight, the edges rose up and overlapped his foot all round. +It is true there were a great many ill-looking puckers in these +shoes, but we found them very serviceable notwithstanding, and Jack +came at last to prefer them to his long boots. We ago made various +other useful articles, which added to our comfort, and once or +twice spoke of building us a house, but we had so great an +affection for the bower, and, withal, found it so serviceable, that +we determined not to leave it, nor to attempt the building of a +house, which, in such a climate, might turn out to be rather +disagreeable than useful. + +We often examined the pistol that we had found in the house on the +other side of the island, and Peterkin wished much that we had +powder and shot, as it would render pig-killing much easier; but, +after all, we had become so expert in the use of our sling and bow +and spear, that we were independent of more deadly weapons. + +Diving in the Water Garden also continued to afford us as much +pleasure as ever; and Peterkin began to be a little more expert in +the water from constant practice. As for Jack and I, we began to +feel as if water were our native element, and revelled in it with +so much confidence and comfort that Peterkin said he feared we +would turn into fish some day, and swim off and leave him; adding, +that he had been for a long time observing that Jack was becoming +more and more like a shark every day. Whereupon Jack remarked, +that if he, Peterkin, were changed into a fish, he would certainly +turn into nothing better or bigger than a shrimp. Poor Peterkin +did not envy us our delightful excursions under water, except, +indeed, when Jack would dive down to the bottom of the Water +Garden, sit down on a rock and look up and make faces at him. +Peterkin did feel envious then, and often said he would give +anything to be able to do that. I was much amused when Peterkin +said this; for if he could only have seen his own face when he +happened to take a short dive, he would have seen that Jack's was +far surpassed by it. The great difference being, however, that +Jack made faces on purpose - Peterkin couldn't help it! + +Now, while we were engaged with these occupations and amusements, +an event occurred one day which was as unexpected as it was +exceedingly alarming and very horrible. + +Jack and I were sitting, as we were often wont to do, on the rocks +at Spouting Cliff, and Peterkin was wringing the water from his +garments, having recently fallen by accident into the sea, - a +thing he was constantly doing, - when our attention was suddenly +arrested by two objects which appeared on the horizon. + +"What are yon, think you?" I said, addressing Jack. + +"I can't imagine," answered he; "I've noticed them for some time, +and fancied they were black sea-gulls, but the more I look at them +the more I feel convinced they are much larger than gulls." + +"They seem to be coming towards us," said I. + +"Hallo! what's wrong?" inquired Peterkin, coming up. + +"Look there," said Jack. + +"Whales!" cried Peterkin, shading his eyes with his hand. "No! eh! +can they be boats, Jack?" + +Our hearts beat with excitement at the very thought of seeing human +faces again. + +"I think you are about right, Peterkin; - but they seem to me to +move strangely for boats," said Jack, in a low tone, as if he were +talking to himself. + +I noticed that a shade of anxiety crossed Jack's countenance as he +gazed long and intently at the two objects, which were now nearing +us fast. At last he sprang to his feet. "They are canoes, Ralph! +whether war-canoes or not I cannot tell, but this I know, that all +the natives of the South Sea Islands are fierce cannibals, and they +have little respect for strangers. We must hide if they land here, +which I earnestly hope they will not do." + +I was greatly alarmed at Jack's speech, but I confess I thought +less of what he said than of the earnest, anxious manner in which +he said it, and it was with very uncomfortable feelings that +Peterkin and I followed him quickly into the woods. + +"How unfortunate," said I, as we gained the shelter of the bushes, +"that we have forgotten our arms." + +"It matters not," said Jack; "here are clubs enough and to spare." +As he spoke, he laid his hand on a bundle of stout poles of various +sizes, which Peterkin's ever-busy hands had formed, during our +frequent visits to the cliff, for no other purpose, apparently, +than that of having something to do. + +We each selected a stout club according to our several tastes, and +lay down behind a rock, whence we could see the canoes approach, +without ourselves being seen. At first we made an occasional +remark on their appearance, but after they entered the lagoon, and +drew near the beach, we ceased to speak, and gazed with intense +interest at the scene before us. + +We now observed that the foremost canoe was being chased by the +other, and that it contained a few women and children, as well as +men, - perhaps forty souls altogether; while the canoe which +pursued it contained only men. They seemed to be about the same in +number, but were better armed, and had the appearance of being a +war party. Both crews were paddling with all their might, and it +seemed as if the pursuers exerted themselves to overtake the +natives ere they could land. In this, however, they failed. The +foremost canoe made for the beach close beneath the rocks behind +which we were concealed. Their short paddles flashed like meteors +in the water, and sent up a constant shower of spray. The foam +curled from the prow, and the eyes of the rowers glistened in their +black faces as they strained every muscle of their naked bodies; +nor did they relax their efforts till the canoe struck the beach +with a violent shock; then, with a shout of defiance, the whole +party sprang, as if by magic, from the canoe to the shore. Three +women, two of whom carried infants in their arms, rushed into the +woods; and the men crowded to the water's edge, with stones in +their hands, spears levelled, and clubs brandished, to resist the +landing of their enemies. + +The distance between the two canoes had been about half a mile, +and, at the great speed they were going, this was soon passed. As +the pursuers neared the shore, no sign of fear or hesitation was +noticeable. On they came like a wild charger, - received but +recked not of a shower of stones. The canoe struck, and, with a +yell that seemed to issue from the throats of incarnate fiends, +they leaped into the water, and drove their enemies up the beach. + +The battle that immediately ensued was frightful to behold. Most +of the men wielded clubs of enormous size and curious shapes, with +which they dashed out each other's brains. As they were almost +entirely naked, and had to bound, stoop, leap, and run, in their +terrible hand-to-hand encounters, they looked more like demons than +human beings. I felt my heart grow sick at the sight of this +bloody battle, and would fain have turned away, but a species of +fascination seemed to hold me down and glue my eyes upon the +combatants. I observed that the attacking party was led by a most +extraordinary being, who, from his size and peculiarity, I +concluded was a chief. His hair was frizzed out to an enormous +extent, so that it resembled a large turban. It was of a light- +yellow hue, which surprised me much, for the man's body was as +black as coal, and I felt convinced that the hair must have been +dyed. He was tattooed from head to foot; and his face, besides +being tattooed, was besmeared with red paint, and streaked with +white. Altogether, with his yellow turban-like hair, his Herculean +black frame, his glittering eyes and white teeth, he seemed the +most terrible monster I ever beheld. He was very active in the +fight, and had already killed four men. + +Suddenly the yellow-haired chief was attacked by a man quite as +strong and large as himself. He flourished a heavy club something +like an eagle's beak at the point. For a second or two these +giants eyed each other warily, moving round and round, as if to +catch each other at a disadvantage, but seeing that nothing was to +be gained by this caution, and that the loss of time might +effectually turn the tide of battle either way, they apparently +made up their minds to attack at the same instant, for, with a wild +shout and simultaneous spring, they swung their heavy clubs, which +met with a loud report. Suddenly the yellow-haired savage tripped, +his enemy sprang forward, the ponderous club was swung, but it did +not descend, for at that moment the savage was felled to the ground +by a stone from the hand of one who had witnessed his chief's +danger. This was the turning-point in the battle. The savages who +landed first turned and fled towards the bush, on seeing the fall +of their chief. But not one escaped. They were all overtaken and +felled to the earth. I saw, however, that they were not all +killed. Indeed, their enemies, now that they were conquered, +seemed anxious to take them alive; and they succeeded in securing +fifteen, whom they bound hand and foot with cords, and, carrying +them up into the woods, laid them down among the bushes. Here they +left them, for what purpose I knew not, and returned to the scene +of the late battle, where the remnant of the party were bathing +their wounds. + +Out of the forty blacks that composed the attacking party, only +twenty-eight remained alive, two of whom were sent into the bush to +hunt for the women and children. Of the other party, as I have +said, only ten survived, and these were lying bound and helpless on +the grass. + +Jack and Peterkin and I now looked at each other, and whispered our +fears that the savages might clamber up the rocks to search for +fresh water, and so discover our place of concealment; but we were +so much interested in watching their movements that we agreed to +remain where we were; and, indeed, we could not easily have risen +without exposing ourselves to detection. One of the savages now +went up to the wood and soon returned with a bundle of fire-wood, +and we were not a little surprised to see him set fire to it by the +very same means used by Jack the time we made our first fire, - +namely, with the bow and drill. When the fire was kindled, two of +the party went again to the woods and returned with one of the +bound men. A dreadful feeling of horror crept over my heart, as +the thought flashed upon me that they were going to burn their +enemies. As they bore him to the fire my feelings almost +overpowered me. I gasped for breath, and seizing my club, +endeavoured to spring to my feet; but Jack's powerful arm pinned me +to the earth. Next moment one of the savages raised his club, and +fractured the wretched creature's skull. He must have died +instantly, and, strange though it may seem, I confess to a feeling +of relief when the deed was done, because I now knew that the poor +savage could not be burned alive. Scarcely had his limbs ceased to +quiver when the monsters cut slices of flesh from his body, and, +after roasting them slightly over the fire, devoured them. + +Suddenly there arose a cry from the woods, and, in a few seconds, +the two savages hastened towards the fire dragging the three women +and their two infants along with them. One of those women was much +younger than her companions, and we were struck with the modesty of +her demeanour and the gentle expression of her face, which, +although she had the flattish nose and thick lips of the others, +was of a light-brown colour, and we conjectured that she must be of +a different race. She and her companions wore short petticoats and +a kind of tippet on their shoulders. Their hair was jet black, but +instead of being long, was short and curly, - though not woolly - +somewhat like the hair of a young boy. While we gazed with +interest and some anxiety at these poor creatures, the big chief +advanced to one of the elder females and laid his hand upon the +child. But the mother shrank from him, and clasping the little one +to her bosom, uttered a wail of fear. With a savage laugh, the +chief tore the child from her arms and tossed it into the sea. A +low groan burst from Jack's lips as we witnessed this atrocious act +and heard the mother's shriek, as she fell insensible on the sand. +The rippling waves rolled the child on the beach, as if they +refused to be a party in such a foul murder, and we could observe +that the little one still lived. + +The young girl was now brought forward, and the chief addressed +her; but although we heard his voice, and even the words +distinctly, of course we could not understand what he said. The +girl made no answer to his fierce questions, and we saw by the way +in which he pointed to the fire that he threatened her life. + +"Peterkin," said Jack in a hoarse whisper, "have you got your +knife?" + +"Yes," replied Peterkin, whose face was pale as death. + +"That will do. Listen to me, and do my bidding quick. Here is the +small knife, Ralph. Fly both of you through the bush, cut the +cords that bind the prisoners and set them free. There! quick, ere +it be too late. Jack sprang up, and seized a heavy but short +bludgeon, while his strong frame trembled with emotion, and large +drops rolled down his forehead. + +At this moment the man who had butchered the savage a few minutes +before advanced towards the girl with his heavy club. Jack uttered +a yell that rang like a death-shriek among the rocks. With one +bound he leaped over a precipice full fifteen feet high, and, +before the savages had recovered from their surprise, was in the +midst of them; while Peterkin and I dashed through the bushes +towards the prisoners. With one blow of his staff Jack felled the +man with the club, then, turning round with a look of fury, he +rushed upon the big chief with the yellow hair. Had the blow which +Jack aimed at his head taken effect, the huge savage would have +needed no second stroke; but he was agile as a cat, and avoided it +by springing to one side, while, at the same time, he swung his +ponderous club at the head of his foe. It was now Jack's turn to +leap aside, and well was it for him that the first outburst of his +blind fury was over, else he had become an easy prey to his +gigantic antagonist; but Jack was cool now. He darted his blows +rapidly and well, and the superiority of his light weapon was +strikingly proved in this combat, for while he could easily evade +the blows of the chief's heavy club, the chief could not so easily +evade those of his light one. Nevertheless, so quick was he, and +so frightfully did he fling about the mighty weapon, that, although +Jack struck him almost every blow, the strokes had to be delivered +so quickly that they wanted force to be very effectual + +It was lucky for Jack that the other savages considered the success +of their chief in this encounter to be so certain that they +refrained from interfering. Had they doubted it, they would have +probably ended the matter at once by felling him. But they +contented themselves with awaiting the issue. + +The force which the chief expended in wielding his club now began +to be apparent. His movements became slower, his breath hissed +through his clenched teeth, and the surprised savages drew nearer +in order to render assistance. Jack observed this movement. He +felt that his fate was sealed, and resolved to cast his life upon +the next blow. The chiefs club was again about to descend on his +head. He might have evaded it easily, but instead of doing so, he +suddenly shortened his grasp of his own club, rushed in under the +blow, struck his adversary right between the eyes with all his +force and fell to the earth, crushed beneath the senseless body of +the chief. A dozen clubs flew high in air ready to descend on the +head of Jack, but they hesitated a moment, for the massive body of +the chief completely covered him. That moment saved his life. Ere +the savages could tear the chief's body away, seven of their number +fell prostrate beneath the clubs of the prisoners whom Peterkin and +I had set free, and two others fell under our own hand. We could +never have accomplished this had not our enemies been so engrossed +with the fight between Jack and their chief that they had failed to +observe us until we were upon them. They still out-numbered our +party by three, but we were flushed with victory while they were +taken by surprise and dispirited by the fall of their chief. +Moreover, they were awe-struck by the sweeping fury of Jack, who +seemed to have lost his senses altogether, and had no sooner shaken +himself free of the chief's body than he rushed into the midst of +them, and in three blows equalized our numbers. Peterkin and I +flew to the rescue, the savages followed us, and, in less than ten +minutes, the whole of our opponents were knocked down or made +prisoners, bound hand and foot, and extended side by side upon the +sea shore. + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + + +Intercourse with the savages - Cannibalism prevented - The slain +are buried and the survivors depart, leaving us again alone on our +Coral Island. + + +AFTER the battle was over, the savages crowded round us and gazed +at us in surprise, while they continued to pour upon us a flood of +questions, which, being wholly unintelligible, of course we could +not answer. However, by way of putting an end to it, Jack took the +chief (who had recovered from the effects of his wound) by the hand +and shook it warmly. No sooner did the blacks see that this was +meant to express good-will than they shook hands with us all round. +After this ceremony was gone through Jack went up to the girl, who +had never once moved from the rock where she had been left, but had +continued an eager spectator of all that had passed. He made signs +to her to follow him and then, taking the chief by the hand, was +about to conduct him to the bower when his eye fell on the poor +infant which had been thrown into the sea and was still lying on +the shore. Dropping the chief's hand he hastened towards it, and, +to his great joy, found it to be still alive. We also found that +the mother was beginning to recover slowly. + +"Here, get out o' the way," said Jack, pushing us aside, as we +stooped over the poor woman and endeavoured to restore her, "I'll +soon bring her round." So saying, he placed the infant on her +bosom and laid its warm cheek on hers. The effect was wonderful. +The woman opened her eyes, felt the child, looked at it, and with a +cry of joy clasped it in her arms, at the same time endeavouring to +rise, for the purpose, apparently, of rushing into the woods. + +"There, that's all right," said Jack, once more taking the chief by +the hand. "Now Ralph and Peterkin, make the women and these +fellows follow me to the bower. Well entertain them as hospitably +as we can." + +In a few minutes the savages were all seated on the ground in front +of the bower making a hearty meal off a cold roast pig, several +ducks, and a variety of cold fish, together with an unlimited +supply of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruits, yams, taro, and plums; with all +of which they seemed to be quite familiar and perfectly satisfied. + +Meanwhile, we three being thoroughly knocked up with our day's +work, took a good draught of cocoa-nut lemonade, and throwing +ourselves on our beds fell fast asleep. The savages it seems +followed our example, and in half-an-hour the whole camp was buried +in repose. + +How long we slept I cannot tell, but this I know, that when we lay +down the sun was setting and when we awoke it was high in the +heavens. I awoke Jack, who started up in surprise, being unable at +first to comprehend our situation. "Now, then," said he, springing +up, "let's see after breakfast. Hallo! Peterkin, lazy fellow, how +long do you mean to lie there?" + +Peterkin yawned heavily. "Well!" said he, opening his eyes and +looking up after some trouble, "if it isn't to-morrow morning, and +me thinking it was to-day all this time. Hallo! Venus, where did +you come from? you seem tolerably at home, any how. Bah! might as +well speak to the cat as to you - better, in fact, for it +understands me, and you don't." + +This remark was called forth by the sight of one of the elderly +females, who had seated herself on the rock in front of the bower, +and, having placed her child at her feet, was busily engaged in +devouring the remains of a roast pig. + +By this time the natives outside were all astir, and breakfast in +an advanced state of preparation. During the course of it we made +sundry attempts to converse with the natives by signs, but without +effect. At last we hit upon a plan of discovering their names. +Jack pointed to his breast and add "Jack," very distinctly; then he +pointed to Peterkin and to me, repeating our names at the same +time. Then he pointed to himself again, and said "Jack," and +laying his finger on the breast of the chief, looked inquiringly +into his face. The chief instantly understood him and said +"Tararo," twice, distinctly. Jack repeated it after him, and the +chief, nodding his head approvingly, said "Chuck." On hearing +which, Peterkin exploded with laughter; but Jack turned and with a +frown rebuked him, saying, "I must look even more indignantly at +you than I feel, Peterkin, you rascal, for these fellows don't like +to be laughed at." Then turning towards the youngest of the women, +who was seated at the door of the bower, he pointed to her; +whereupon the chief said, "Avatea;" and pointing towards the sun, +raised his finger slowly towards the zenith, where it remained +steadily for a minute or two. + +"What can that mean, I wonder," said Jack, looking puzzled. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "the chief means she is an angel come +down to stay here for a while. If so, she's an uncommonly black +one!" + +We did not feel quite satisfied with this explanation, so Jack went +up to her and said, "Avatea." The woman smiled sadly, and nodded +her head, at the same time pointing to her breast and then to the +sun, in the same manner as the chief had done. We were much +puzzled to know what this could signify, but as there was no way of +solving our difficulty we were obliged to rest content. + +Jack now made signs to the natives to follow him, and, taking up +his axe, he led them to the place where the battle had been fought. +Here we found the prisoners, who had passed the night on the beach +having been totally forgotten by us, as our minds had been full of +our guests, and were ultimately overcome by sleep. They did not +seem the worse for their exposure, however, as we judged by the +hearty appetite with which they devoured the breakfast that was +soon after given to them. Jack then began to dig a hole in the +sand, and, after working a few seconds, he pointed to it and to the +dead bodies that lay exposed on the beach. The natives immediately +perceived what he wanted, and, running for their paddles, dug a +hole in the course of half an hour that was quite large enough to +contain all the bodies of the slain. When it was finished they +tossed their dead enemies into it with so much indifference that we +felt assured they would not have put themselves to this trouble had +we not asked them to do so. The body of the yellow-haired chief +was the last thrown in. This wretched man would have recovered +from the blow with which Jack felled him, and, indeed, he did +endeavour to rise during the melee that followed his fall, but one +of his enemies, happening to notice the action, dealt him a blow +with his club that killed him on the spot. + +While they were about to throw the sand over this chief, one of the +savages stooped over him, and with a knife, made apparently of +stone, cut a large slice of flesh from his thigh. We knew at once +that he intended to make use of this for food, and could not +repress a cry of horror and disgust. + +"Come, come, you blackguard," cried Jack, starting up and seizing +the man by the arm, "pitch that into the hole. Do you hear?" + +The savage of course did not understand the command, but he +perfectly understood the look of disgust with which Jack regarded +the flesh, and his fierce gaze as he pointed towards the hole. +Nevertheless he did not obey. Jack instantly turned to Tararo and +made signs to him to enforce obedience. The chief seemed to +understand the appeal, for he stepped forward, raised his club, and +was on the point of dashing out the brains of his offending +subject, when Jack sprang forward and caught his uplifted arm. + +"Stop!" he shouted, "you blockhead, I don't want you to kill the +man." He then pointed again to the flesh and to the hole. The +chief uttered a few words, which had the desired effect; for the +man threw the flesh into the hole, which was immediately filled up. +This man was of a morose, sulky disposition, and, during all the +time he remained on the island, regarded us, especially Jack, with +a scowling visage. His name, we found, was Mahine. + +The next three or four days were spent by the savages in mending +their canoe, which had been damaged by the violent shock it had +sustained on striking the shore. This canoe was a very curious +structure. It was about thirty feet long, and had a high towering +stern. The timbers, of which it was partly composed, were fastened +much in the same way as those of our little boat were put together; +but the part that seemed most curious to us was a sort of out- +rigger, or long plank, which was attached to the body of the canoe +by means of two stout cross beams. These beams kept the plank +parallel with the canoe, but not in contact with it, for it floated +in the water with an open space between; thus forming a sort of +double canoe. This we found was intended to prevent the upsetting +of the canoe, which was so narrow that it could not have maintained +an upright position without the out-rigger. We could not help +wondering both at the ingenuity and the clumsiness of this +contrivance. + +When the canoe was ready, we assisted the natives to carry the +prisoners into it, and helped them to load it with provisions and +fruit. Peterkin also went to the plum-tree for the purpose of +making a special onslaught upon the hogs, and killed no less than +six of them. These we baked and presented to our friends on the +day of their departure. On that day Tararo made a great many +energetic signs to us, which, after much consideration, we came to +understand were proposals that we should go away with him to his +island; but, having no desire to do so, we shook our heads very +decidedly. However, we consoled him by presenting him with our +rusty axe, which we thought we could spare, having the excellent +one which had been so providentially washed ashore to us the day we +were wrecked. We also gave him a piece of wood with our names +carved on it, and a piece of string to hang it round his neck as an +ornament. + +In a few minutes more we were all assembled on the beach. Being +unable to speak to the savages, we went through the ceremony of +shaking hands, and expected they would depart; but, before doing +so, Tararo went up to Jack and rubbed noses with him, after which +he did the same with Peterkin and me! Seeing that this was their +mode of salutation, we determined to conform to their custom, so we +rubbed noses heartily with the whole party, women and all! The +only disagreeable part of the process was, when we came to rub +noses with Mahine, and Peterkin afterwards said, that when he saw +his wolfish eyes glaring so close to his face, he felt much more +inclined to BANG than to RUB his nose. Avatea was the last to take +leave of us, and we experienced a feeling of real sorrow when she +approached to bid us farewell. Besides her modest air and gentle +manners she was the only one of the party who exhibited the +smallest sign of regret at parting from us. Going up to Jack, she +put out her flat little nose to be rubbed, and thereafter paid the +same compliment to Peterkin and me. + +An hour later the canoe was out of sight, and we, with an +indefinable feeling of sadness creeping round our hearts, were +seated in silence beneath the shadow of our bower, meditating on +the wonderful events of the last few days. + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + + +Sagacious and moral remarks in regard to life - A sail! - An +unexpected salute - The end of the black cat - A terrible dive - An +incautious proceeding and a frightful catastrophe. + + +LIFE is a strange compound. Peterkin used to say of it, that it +beat a druggist's shop all to sticks; for, whereas the first is a +compound of good and bad, the other is a horrible compound of all +that is utterly detestable. And indeed the more I consider it the +more I am struck with the strange mixture of good and evil that +exists not only in the material earth but in our own natures. In +our own Coral Island we had experienced every variety of good that +a bountiful Creator could heap on us. Yet on the night of the +storm we had seen how almost, in our case, - and altogether, no +doubt, in the case of others less fortunate - all this good might +be swept away for ever. We had seen the rich fruit-trees waving in +the soft air, the tender herbs shooting upwards under the benign +influence of the bright sun; and, the next day, we had seen these +good and beautiful trees and plants uprooted by the hurricane, +crushed and hurled to the ground in destructive devastation. We +had lived for many months in a clime for the most part so +beautiful, that we had often wondered whether Adam and Eve had +found Eden more sweet; and we had seen the quiet solitudes of our +paradise suddenly broken in upon by ferocious savages, and the +white sands stained with blood and strewed with lifeless forms; +yet, among these cannibals, we had seen many symptoms of a kindly +nature. I pondered these things much, and, while I considered +them, there recurred to my memory those words which I had read in +my Bible, - the works of God are wonderful, and his ways past +finding out. + +After these poor savages had left us, we used to hold long and +frequent conversations about them, and I noticed that Peterkin's +manner was now much altered. He did not, indeed, jest less +heartily than before, but he did so less frequently, and often +there was a tone of deep seriousness in his manner, if not in his +words, which made him seem to Jack and me as if he had grown two +years older within a few days. But indeed I was not surprised at +this, when I reflected on the awful realities which we had +witnessed so lately. We could by no means shake off a tendency to +gloom for several weeks afterwards; but, as time wore away, our +usual good spirits returned somewhat, and we began to think of the +visit of the savages with feelings akin to those with which we +recall a terrible dream. + +One day we were all enjoying ourselves in the Water Garden, +preparatory to going on a fishing excursion; for Peterkin had kept +us in such constant supply of hogs that we had become quite tired +of pork, and desired a change. Peterkin was sunning himself on the +ledge of rock, while we were creeping among the rocks below. +Happening to look up, I observed Peterkin cutting the most +extraordinary capers and making violent gesticulations for us to +come up; so I gave Jack a push, and rose immediately. + +"A sail! a sail! Ralph, look! Jack, away on the horizon there, +just over the entrance to the lagoon!" cried Peterkin, as we +scrambled up the rocks. + +"So it is, and a schooner, too!" said Jack, as he proceeded hastily +to dress. + +Our hearts were thrown into a terrible flutter by this discovery, +for if it should touch at our island we had no doubt the captain +would be happy to give us a passage to some of the civilized +islands, where we could find a ship sailing for England, or some +other part of Europe. Home, with all its associations, rushed in +upon my heart like a flood, and, much though I loved the Coral +Island and the bower which had now been our home so long, I felt +that I could have quitted all at that moment without a sigh. With +joyful anticipations we hastened to the highest point of rock near +our dwelling, and awaited the arrival of the vessel, for we now +perceived that she was making straight for the island, under a +steady breeze. + +In less than an hour she was close to the reef, where she rounded +to, and backed her topsails in order to survey the coast. Seeing +this, and fearing that they might not perceive us, we all three +waved pieces of cocoa-nut cloth in the air, and soon had the +satisfaction of seeing them beginning to lower a boat and bustle +about the decks as if they meant to land. Suddenly a flag was run +up to the peak, a little cloud of white smoke rose from the +schooner's side, and, before we could guess their intentions, a +cannon-shot came crashing through the bushes, carried away several +cocoa-nut trees in its passage, and burst in atoms against the +cliff a few yards below the spot on which we stood. + +With feelings of terror we now observed that the flag at the +schooner's peak was black, with a Death's head and cross bones upon +it. As we gazed at each other in blank amazement, the word +"pirate" escaped our lips simultaneously. + +"What is to be done?" cried Peterkin, as we observed a boat shoot +from the vessel's side, and make for the entrance of the reef. "If +they take us off the island, it will either be to throw us +overboard for sport, or to make pirates of us." + +I did not reply, but looked at Jack, as being our only resource in +this emergency. He stood with folded arms, and his eyes fixed with +a grave, anxious expression on the ground. "There is but one +hope," said he, turning with a sad expression of countenance to +Peterkin; "perhaps, after all, we may not have to resort to it. If +these villains are anxious to take us, they will soon overrun the +whole island. But come, follow me." + +Stopping abruptly in his speech, Jack bounded into the woods, and +led us by a circuitous route to Spouting Cliff. Here he halted, +and, advancing cautiously to the rocks, glanced over their edge. +We were soon by his side, and saw the boat, which was crowded with +armed men, just touching the shore. In an instant the crew landed, +formed line, and rushed up to our bower. + +In a few seconds we saw them hurrying back to the boat, one of them +swinging the poor cat round his head by the tail. On reaching the +water's edge, he tossed it far into the sea, and joined his +companions, who appeared to be holding a hasty council. + +"You see what we may expect," said Jack bitterly. "The man who +will wantonly kill a poor brute for sport will think little of +murdering a fellow-creature. Now, boys, we have but one chance +left, - the Diamond Cave." + +"The Diamond Cave!" cried Peterkin, "then my chance is a poor one, +for I could not dive into it if all the pirates on the Pacific were +at my heels." + +"Nay, but," said I, "we will take you down, Peterkin, if you will +only trust us." + +As I spoke, we observed the pirates scatter over the beach, and +radiate, as if from a centre, towards the woods and along shore. + +"Now, Peterkin," said Jack, in a solemn tone, "you must make up +your mind to do it, or we must make up our minds to die in your +company." + +"Oh, Jack, my dear friend," cried Peterkin, turning pale, "leave +me; I don't believe they'll think it worth while to kill me. Go, +you and Ralph, and dive into the cave." + +"That will not I," answered Jack quietly, while he picked up a +stout cudgel from the ground. "So now, Ralph, we must prepare to +meet these fellows. Their motto is, 'No quarter.' If we can +manage to floor those coming in this direction, we may escape into +the woods for a while." + +"There are five of them," said I; "we have no chance." + +"Come, then," cried Peterkin, starting up, and grasping Jack +convulsively by the arm, "let us dive; I will go." + +Those who are not naturally expert in the water know well the +feelings of horror that overwhelm them, when in it, at the bare +idea of being held down, even for a few seconds, - that spasmodic, +involuntary recoil from compulsory immersion which has no +connection whatever with cowardice; and they will understand the +amount of resolution that it required in Peterkin to allow himself +to be dragged down to a depth of ten feet, and then, through a +narrow tunnel, into an almost pitch-dark cavern. But there was no +alternative. The pirates had already caught sight of us, and were +now within a short distance of the rocks. + +Jack and I seized Peterkin by the arms. + +"Now, keep quite still, no struggling," said Jack, "or we are +lost." + +Peterkin made no reply, but the stern gravity of his marble +features, and the tension of his muscles, satisfied us that he had +fully made up his mind to go through with it. Just as the pirates +gained the foot of the rocks, which hid us for a moment from their +view, we bent over the sea, and plunged down together head +foremost. Peterkin behaved like a hero. He floated passively +between us like a log of wood, and we passed the tunnel and rose +into the cave in a shorter space of time than I had ever done it +before. + +Peterkin drew a long, deep breath on reaching the surface; and in a +few seconds we were all standing on the ledge of rock in safety. +Jack now searched for the tinder and torch, which always lay in the +cave. He soon found them, and, lighting the torch, revealed to +Peterkin's wondering gaze the marvels of the place. But we were +too wet to waste much time in looking about us. Our first care was +to take off our clothes, and wring them as dry as we could. This +done, we proceeded to examine into the state of our larder, for, as +Jack truly remarked, there was no knowing how long the pirates +might remain on the island. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "they may take it into their heads to +stop here altogether, and so we shall be buried alive in this +place." + +"Don't you think, Peterkin, that it's the nearest thing to being +drowned alive that you ever felt?" said Jack with a smile. "But +I've no fear of that. These villains never stay long on shore. +The sea is their home, so you may depend upon it that they won't +stay more than a day or two at the furthest." + +We now began to make arrangements for spending the night in the +cavern. At various periods Jack and I had conveyed cocoa nuts and +other fruits, besides rolls of cocoa-nut cloth, to this submarine +cave, partly for amusement, and partly from a feeling that we might +possibly be driven one day to take shelter here from the savages. +Little did we imagine that the first savages who would drive us +into it would be white savages, perhaps our own countrymen. We +found the cocoa-nuts in good condition, and the cooked yams, but +the bread-fruits were spoiled. We also found the cloth where we +had left it; and, on opening it out, there proved to be sufficient +to make a bed; which was important, as the rock was damp. Having +collected it all together, we spread out our bed, placed our torch +in the midst of us, and ate our supper. It was indeed a strange +chamber to feast in; and we could not help remarking on the cold, +ghastly appearance of the walls, and the black water at our side, +with the thick darkness beyond, and the sullen sound of the drops +that fell at long intervals from the roof of the cavern into the +still water; and the strong contrast between all this and our bed +and supper, which, with our faces, were lit up with the deep red +flame of the torch. + +We sat long over our meal, talking together in subdued voices, for +we did not like the dismal echoes that rang through the vault above +when we happened to raise them. At last the faint light that came +through the opening died away, warning us that it was night and +time for rest. We therefore put out our torch and lay down to +sleep. + +On awaking, it was some time ere we could collect our faculties so +as to remember where we were, and we were in much uncertainty as to +whether it was early or late. We saw by the faint light that it +was day, but could not guess at the hour; so Jack proposed that he +should dive out and reconnoitre. + +"No, Jack," said I, "do you rest here. You've had enough to do +during the last few days. Rest yourself now, and take care of +Peterkin, while I go out to see what the pirates are about. I'll +be very careful not to expose myself, and I'll bring you word again +in a short time." + +"Very well, Ralph," answered Jack, "please yourself, but don't be +long; and if you'll take my advice you'll go in your clothes, for I +would like to have some fresh cocoa nuts, and climbing trees +without clothes is uncomfortable, to say the least of it." + +"The pirates will be sure to keep a sharp lookout," said Peterkin, +"so, pray, be careful." + +"No fear," said I; "good-bye." + +"Good-bye," answered my comrades. + +And while the words were yet sounding in my ears, I plunged into +the water, and in a few seconds found myself in the open air. On +rising, I was careful to come up gently and to breathe softly, +while I kept close in beside the rocks; but, as I observed no one +near me, I crept slowly out, and ascended the cliff a step at a +time, till I obtained a full view of the shore. No pirates were to +be seen, - even their boat was gone; but as it was possible they +might have hidden themselves, I did not venture too boldly forward. +Then it occurred to me to look out to sea, when, to my surprise, I +saw the pirate schooner sailing away almost hull-down on the +horizon! On seeing this I uttered a shout of joy. Then my first +impulse was to dive back to tell my companions the good news; but I +checked myself, and ran to the top of the cliff, in order to make +sure that the vessel I saw was indeed the pirate schooner. I +looked long and anxiously at her, and, giving vent to a deep sigh +of relief, said aloud, "Yes, there she goes; the villains have been +baulked of their prey this time at least." + +"Not so sure of that!" said a deep voice at my side; while, at the +same moment, a heavy hand grasped my shoulder, and held it as if in +a vice. + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + + +I fall into the hands of pirates - How they treated me, and what I +said to them - The result of the whole ending in a melancholy +separation and in a most unexpected gift. + + +MY heart seemed to leap into my throat at the words; and, turning +round, I beheld a man of immense stature, and fierce aspect +regarding me with a smile of contempt. He was a white man, - that +is to say, he was a man of European blood, though his face, from +long exposure to the weather, was deeply bronzed. His dress was +that of a common seaman, except that he had on a Greek skull-cap, +and wore a broad shawl of the richest silk round his waist. In +this shawl were placed two pair of pistols and a heavy cutlass. He +wore a beard and moustache, which, like the locks on his head, were +short, curly, and sprinkled with gray hairs. + +"So, youngster," he said, with a Sardonic smile, while I felt his +grasp tighten on my shoulder, "the villains have been baulked of +their prey, have they? We shall see, we shall see. Now, you +whelp, look yonder. As he spoke, the pirate uttered a shrill +whistle. In a second or two it was answered, and the pirate-boat +rowed round the point at the Water Garden, and came rapidly towards +us. "Now, go, make a fire on that point; and hark'ee, youngster, +if you try to run away, I'll send a quick and sure messenger after +you," and he pointed significantly at his pistols. + +I obeyed in silence, and as I happened to have the burning-glass in +my pocket, a fire was speedily kindled, and a thick smoke ascended +into the air. It had scarcely appeared for two minutes when the +boom of a gun rolled over the sea, and, looking up, I saw that the +schooner was making for the island again. It now flashed across me +that this was a ruse on the part of the pirates, and that they had +sent their vessel away, knowing that it would lead us to suppose +that they had left altogether. But there was no use of regret now. +I was completely in their power, so I stood helplessly beside the +pirate watching the crew of the boat as they landed on the beach. +For an instant I contemplated rushing over the cliff into the sea, +but this I saw I could not now accomplish, as some of the men were +already between me and the water. + +There was a good deal of jesting at the success of their scheme, as +the crew ascended the rocks and addressed the man who had captured +me by the title of captain. They were a ferocious set of men, with +shaggy beards and scowling brows. All of them were armed with +cutlasses and pistols, and their costumes were, with trifling +variations, similar to that of the captain. As I looked from one +to the other, and observed the low, scowling brows, that never +unbent, even when the men laughed, and the mean, rascally +expression that sat on each face, I felt that my life hung by a +hair. + +"But where are the other cubs?" cried one of the men, with an oath +that made me shudder. "I'll swear to it there were three, at +least, if not more." + +"You hear what he says, whelp; where are the other dogs?" said the +captain. + +"If you mean my companions," said I, in a low voice, "I won't tell +you." + +A loud laugh burst from the crew at this answer. + +The pirate captain looked at me in surprise. Then drawing a pistol +from his belt, he cocked it and said, "Now, youngster, listen to +me. I've no time to waste here. If you don't tell me all you +know, I'll blow your brains out! Where are your comrades?" + +For an instant I hesitated, not knowing what to do in this +extremity. Suddenly a thought occurred to me. + +"Villain," said I, shaking my clenched fist in his face, "to blow +my brains out would make short work of me, and be soon over. Death +by drowning is as sure, and the agony prolonged, yet, I tell you to +your face, if you were to toss me over yonder cliff into the sea, I +would not tell you where my companions are, and I dare you to try +me!" + +The pirate captain grew white with rage as I spoke. "Say you so?" +cried he, uttering a fierce oath. "Here, lads, take him by the +legs and heave him in, - quick!" + +The men, who were utterly silenced with surprise at my audacity, +advanced, and seized me, and, as they carried me towards the cliff, +I congratulated myself not a little on the success of my scheme, +for I knew that once in the water I should be safe, and could +rejoin Jack and Peterkin in the cave. But my hopes were suddenly +blasted by the captain crying out, "Hold on, lads, hold on. We'll +give him a taste of the thumb-screws before throwing him to the +sharks. Away with him into the boat. Look alive! the breeze is +freshening." + +The men instantly raised me shoulder high, and, hurrying down the +rocks, tossed me into the bottom of the boat, where I lay for some +time stunned with the violence of my fall. + +On recovering sufficiently to raise myself on my elbow, I perceived +that we were already outside the coral reef, and close alongside +the schooner, which was of small size and clipper built. I had +only time to observe this much, when I received a severe kick on +the side from one of the men, who ordered me, in a rough voice, to +jump aboard. Rising hastily I clambered up the side. In a few +minutes the boat was hoisted on deck, the vessel's head put close +to the wind, and the Coral Island dropped slowly astern as we beat +up against a head sea. + +Immediately after coming aboard, the crew were too busily engaged +in working the ship and getting in the boat to attend to me, so I +remained leaning against the bulwarks close to the gangway, +watching their operations. I was surprised to find that there were +no guns or carronades of any kind in the vessel, which had more of +the appearance of a fast-sailing trader than a pirate. But I was +struck with the neatness of everything. The brass work of the +binnacle and about the tiller, as well as the copper belaying-pins, +were as brightly polished as if they had just come from the +foundry. The decks were pure white, and smooth. The masts were +clean-scraped and varnished, except at the cross-trees and truck, +which were painted black. The standing and running rigging was in +the most perfect order, and the sails white as snow. In short, +everything, from the single narrow red stripe on her low black hull +to the trucks on her tapering masts, evinced an amount of care and +strict discipline that would have done credit to a ship of the +Royal Navy. There was nothing lumbering or unseemly about the +vessel, excepting, perhaps, a boat, which lay on the deck with its +keel up between the fore and main masts. It seemed +disproportionately large for the schooner; but, when I saw that the +crew amounted to between thirty and forty men, I concluded that +this boat was held in reserve, in case of any accident compelling +the crew to desert the vessel. + +As I have before said, the costumes of the men were similar to that +of the captain. But in head gear they differed not only from him +but from each other, some wearing the ordinary straw hat of the +merchant service, while others wore cloth caps and red worsted +night-caps. I observed that all their arms were sent below; the +captain only retaining his cutlass and a single pistol in the folds +of his shawl. Although the captain was the tallest and most +powerful man in the ship, he did not strikingly excel many of his +men in this respect, and the only difference that an ordinary +observer would have noticed was, a certain degree of open candour, +straightforward daring, in the bold, ferocious expression of his +face, which rendered him less repulsive than his low-browed +associates, but did not by any means induce the belief that he was +a hero. This look was, however, the indication of that spirit +which gave him the pre-eminence among the crew of desperadoes who +called him captain. He was a lion-like villain; totally devoid of +personal fear, and utterly reckless of consequences, and, +therefore, a terror to his men, who individually hated him, but +unitedly felt it to be their advantage to have him at their head. + +But my thoughts soon reverted to the dear companions whom I had +left on shore, and as I turned towards the Coral Island, which was +now far away to leeward, I sighed deeply, and the tears rolled +slowly down my cheeks as I thought that I might never see them +more. + +"So you're blubbering, are you, you obstinate whelp?" said the deep +voice of the captain, as he came up and gave me a box on the ear +that nearly felled me to the deck. "I don't allow any such +weakness aboard o' this ship. So clap a stopper on your eyes or +I'll give you something to cry for." + +I flushed with indignation at this rough and cruel treatment, but +felt that giving way to anger would only make matters worse, so I +made no reply, but took out my handkerchief and dried my eyes. + +"I thought you were made of better stuff," continued the captain, +angrily; "I'd rather have a mad bull-dog aboard than a water-eyed +puppy. But I'll cure you, lad, or introduce you to the sharks +before long. Now go below, and stay there till I call you." + +As I walked forward to obey, my eye fell on a small keg standing by +the side of the main-mast, on which the word GUNPOWDER was written +in pencil. It immediately flashed across me that, as we were +beating up against the wind, anything floating in the sea would be +driven on the reef encircling the Coral Island. I also recollected +- for thought is more rapid than the lightning - that my old +companions had a pistol. Without a moment's hesitation, therefore, +I lifted the keg from the deck and tossed it into the sea! An +exclamation of surprise burst from the captain and some of the men +who witnessed this act of mine. + +Striding up to me, and uttering fearful imprecations, the captain +raised his hand to strike me, while he shouted, "Boy! whelp! what +mean you by that?" + +"If you lower your hand," said I, in a loud voice, while I felt the +blood rush to my temples, "I'll tell you. Until you do so I'm +dumb!" + +The captain stepped back and regarded me with a look of amazement. + +"Now," continued I, "I threw that keg into the sea because the wind +and waves will carry it to my friends on the Coral Island, who +happen to have a pistol, but no powder. I hope that it will reach +them soon, and my only regret is that the keg was not a bigger one. +Moreover, pirate, you said just now that you thought I was made of +better stuff! I don't know what stuff I am made of, - I never +thought much about that subject; but I'm quite certain of this, +that I am made of such stuff as the like of you shall never tame, +though you should do your worst." + +To my surprise the captain, instead of flying into a rage, smiled, +and, thrusting his hand into the voluminous shawl that encircled +his waist, turned on his heel and walked aft, while I went below. + +Here, instead of being rudely handled, as I had expected, the men +received me with a shout of laughter, and one of them, patting me +on the back, said, "Well done, lad! you're a brick, and I have no +doubt will turn out a rare cove. Bloody Bill, there, was just such +a fellow as you are, and he's now the biggest cut-throat of us +all." + +"Take a can of beer, lad," cried another, "and wet your whistle +after that speech o' your'n to the captain. If any one o' us had +made it, youngster, he would have had no whistle to wet by this +time." + +"Stop your clapper, Jack," vociferated a third; "give the boy a +junck o' meat. Don't you see he's a'most goin' to kick the +bucket?" + +"And no wonder," said the first speaker, with an oath, "after the +tumble you gave him into the boat. I guess it would have broke +YOUR neck if you had got it." + +I did indeed feel somewhat faint; which was owing, doubtless, to +the combined effects of ill-usage and hunger; for it will be +recollected that I had dived out of the cave that morning before +breakfast, and it was now near mid-day. I therefore gladly +accepted a plate of boiled pork and a yam, which were handed to me +by one of the men from the locker on which some of the crew were +seated eating their dinner. But I must add that the zest with +which I ate my meal was much abated in consequence of the frightful +oaths and the terrible language that flowed from the lips of these +godless men, even in the midst of their hilarity and good-humour. +The man who had been alluded to as Bloody Bill was seated near me, +and I could not help wondering at the moody silence he maintained +among his comrades. He did indeed reply to their questions in a +careless, off-hand tone, but he never volunteered a remark. The +only difference between him and the others was his taciturnity and +his size, for he was nearly, if not quite, as large a man as the +captain. + +During the remainder of the afternoon I was left to my own +reflections, which were anything but agreeable, for I could not +banish from my mind the threat about the thumb-screws, of the +nature and use of which I had a vague but terrible conception. I +was still meditating on my unhappy fate when, just after night- +fall, one of the watch on deck called down the hatchway, - + +"Hallo there! one o' you, tumble up and light the cabin lamp, and +send that boy aft to the captain - sharp!" + +"Now then, do you hear, youngster? the captain wants you. Look +alive," said Bloody Bill, raising his huge frame from the locker on +which he had been asleep for the last two hours. He sprang up the +ladder and I instantly followed him, and, going aft, was shown into +the cabin by one of the men, who closed the door after me. + +A small silver lamp which hung from a beam threw a dim soft light +over the cabin, which was a small apartment, and comfortably but +plainly finished. Seated on a camp-stool at the table, and busily +engaged in examining a chart of the Pacific, was the captain, who +looked up as I entered, and, in a quiet voice, bade me be seated, +while he threw down his pencil, and, rising from the table, +stretched himself on a sofa at the upper end of the cabin. + +"Boy," said he, looking me full in the face, "what is your name?" + +"Ralph Rover," I replied. + +"Where did you come from, and how came you to be on that island? +How many companions had you on it? Answer me, now, and mind you +tell no lies." + +"I never tell lies," said I, firmly. + +The captain received this reply with a cold sarcastic smile, and +bade me answer his questions. + +I then told him the history of myself and my companions from the +time we sailed till the day of his visit to the island, taking +care, however, to make no mention of the Diamond Cave. After I had +concluded, he was silent for a few minutes; then, looking up, he +said - "Boy, I believe you." + +I was surprised at this remark, for I could not imagine why he +should not believe me. However, I made no reply. + +"And what," continued the captain, "makes you think that this +schooner is a pirate?" + +"The black flag," said I, "showed me what you are; and if any +further proof were wanting I have had it in the brutal treatment I +have received at your hands." + +The captain frowned as I spoke, but subduing his anger he continued +- "Boy, you are too bold. I admit that we treated you roughly, but +that was because you made us lose time and gave us a good deal of +trouble. As to the black flag, that is merely a joke that my +fellows play off upon people sometimes in order to frighten them. +It is their humour, and does no harm. I am no pirate, boy, but a +lawful trader, - a rough one, I grant you, but one can't help that +in these seas, where there are so many pirates on the water and +such murderous blackguards on the land. I carry on a trade in +sandal-wood with the Feejee Islands; and if you choose, Ralph, to +behave yourself and be a good boy, I'll take you along with me and +give you a good share of the profits. You see I'm in want of an +honest boy like you, to look after the cabin and keep the log, and +superintend the traffic on shore sometimes. What say you, Ralph, +would you like to become a sandal-wood trader?" + +I was much surprised by this explanation, and a good deal relieved +to find that the vessel, after all, was not a pirate; but instead +of replying I said, "If it be as you state, then why did you take +me from my island, and why do you not now take me back?" + +The captain smiled as he replied, "I took you off in anger, boy, +and I'm sorry for it. I would even now take you back, but we are +too far away from it. See, there it is," he added, laying his +finger on the chart, "and we are now here, - fifty miles at least. +It would not be fair to my men to put about now, for they have all +an interest in the trade." + +I could make no reply to this; so, after a little more +conversation, I agreed to become one of the crew, at least until we +could reach some civilized island where I might be put ashore. The +captain assented to this proposition, and after thanking him for +the promise, I left the cabin and went on deck with feelings that +ought to have been lighter, but which were, I could not tell why, +marvellously heavy and uncomfortable still. + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + + +Bloody Bill - Dark surmises - A strange sail, and a strange crew, +and a still stranger cargo - New reasons for favouring missionaries +- A murderous massacre, and thoughts thereon. + + +THREE weeks after the conversation narrated in the last chapter, I +was standing on the quarter-deck of the schooner watching the +gambols of a shoal of porpoises that swam round us. It was a dead +calm. One of those still, hot, sweltering days, so common in the +Pacific, when Nature seems to have gone to sleep, and the only +thing in water or in air that proves her still alive, is her long, +deep breathing, in the swell of the mighty sea. No cloud floated +in the deep blue above; no ripple broke the reflected blue below. +The sun shone fiercely in the sky, and a ball of fire blazed, with +almost equal power, from out the bosom of the water. So intensely +still was it, and so perfectly transparent was the surface of the +deep, that had it not been for the long swell already alluded to, +we might have believed the surrounding universe to be a huge blue +liquid ball, and our little ship the one solitary material speck in +all creation, floating in the midst of it. + +No sound broke on our ears save the soft puff now and then of a +porpoise, the slow creak of the masts, as we swayed gently on the +swell, the patter of the reef-points, and the occasional flap of +the hanging sails. An awning covered the fore and after parts of +the schooner, under which the men composing the watch on deck +lolled in sleepy indolence, overcome with excessive heat. Bloody +Bill, as the men invariably called him, was standing at the tiller, +but his post for the present was a sinecure, and he whiled away the +time by alternately gazing in dreamy abstraction at the compass in +the binnacle, and by walking to the taffrail in order to spit into +the sea. In one of these turns he came near to where I was +standing, and, leaning over the side, looked long and earnestly +down into the blue wave. + +This man, although he was always taciturn and often surly, was the +only human being on board with whom I had the slightest desire to +become better acquainted. The other men, seeing that I did not +relish their company, and knowing that I was a protege of the +captain, treated me with total indifference. Bloody Bill, it is +true, did the same; but as this was his conduct towards every one +else, it was not peculiar in reference to me. Once or twice I +tried to draw him into conversation, but he always turned away +after a few cold monosyllables. As he now leaned over the taffrail +close beside me, I said to him, - + +"Bill, why is it that you are so gloomy? Why do you never speak to +any one?" + +Bill smiled slightly as he replied, "Why, I s'pose it's because I +haint got nothin' to say!" + +"That's strange," said I, musingly; "you look like a man that could +think, and such men can usually speak." + +"So they can, youngster," rejoined Bill, somewhat sternly; "and I +could speak too if I had a mind to, but what's the use o' speakin' +here! The men only open their mouths to curse and swear, an' they +seem to find it entertaining; but I don't, so I hold my tongue." + +"Well, Bill, that's true, and I would rather not hear you speak at +all than hear you speak like the other men; but I don't swear, +Bill, so you might talk to me sometimes, I think. Besides, I'm +weary of spending day after day in this way, without a single soul +to say a pleasant word to. I've been used to friendly +conversation, Bill, and I really would take it kind if you would +talk with me a little now and then." + +Bill looked at me in surprise, and I thought I observed a sad +expression pass across his sun-burnt face. + +"An' where have you been used to friendly conversation," said Bill, +looking down again into the sea; "not on that Coral Island, I take +it?" + +"Yes, indeed," said I energetically; "I have spent many of the +happiest months in my life on that Coral Island;" and without +waiting to be further questioned, I launched out into a glowing +account of the happy life that Jack and Peterkin and I had spent +together, and related minutely every circumstance that befell us +while on the island. + +"Boy, boy," said Bill, in a voice so deep that it startled me, +"this is no place for you." + +"That's true," said I; "I'm of little use on board, and I don't +like my comrades; but I can't help it, and at anyrate I hope to be +free again soon." + +"Free?" said Bill, looking at me in surprise. + +"Yes, free," returned I; "the captain said he would put me ashore +after this trip was over." + +"THIS TRIP! Hark'ee, boy," said Bill, lowering his voice, "what +said the captain to you the day you came aboard?" + +"He said that he was a trader in sandal-wood and no pirate, and +told me that if I would join him for this trip he would give me a +good share of the profits or put me on shore in some civilized +island if I chose." + +Bill's brows lowered savagely as he muttered, "Ay, he said truth +when he told you he was a sandal-wood trader, but he lied when - " + +"Sail ho!" shouted the look-out at the masthead. + +"Where, away?" cried Bill, springing to the tiller; while the men, +startled by the sudden cry jumped up and gazed round the horizon. + +"On the starboard quarter, hull down, sir," answered the look-out. + +At this moment the captain came on deck, and mounting into the +rigging, surveyed the sail through the glass. Then sweeping his +eye round the horizon he gazed steadily at a particular point. + +"Take in top-sails," shouted the captain, swinging himself down on +the deck by the main-back stay. + +"Take in top-sails," roared the first mate. + +"Ay, ay, sir-r-r," answered the men as they sprang into the rigging +and went aloft like cats. + +Instantly all was bustle on board the hitherto quiet schooner. The +top-sails were taken in and stowed, the men stood by the sheets and +halyards, and the captain gazed anxiously at the breeze which was +now rushing towards us like a sheet of dark blue. In a few seconds +it struck us. The schooner trembled as if in surprise at the +sudden onset, while she fell away, then bending gracefully to the +wind, as though in acknowledgment of her subjection, she cut +through the waves with her sharp prow like a dolphin, while Bill +directed her course towards the strange sail. + +In half an hour we neared her sufficiently to make out that she was +a schooner, and, from the clumsy appearance of her masts and sails +we judged her to be a trader. She evidently did not like our +appearance, for, the instant the breeze reached her, she crowded +all sail and showed us her stern. As the breeze had moderated a +little our top-sails were again shaken out, and it soon became +evident, - despite the proverb, "A stern chase is a long one," that +we doubled her speed and would overhaul her speedily. When within +a mile we hoisted British colours, but receiving no acknowledgment, +the captain ordered a shot to be fired across her bows. In a +moment, to my surprise, a large portion of the bottom of the boat +amidships was removed, and in the hole thus exposed appeared an +immense brass gun. It worked on a swivel and was elevated by means +of machinery. It was quickly loaded and fired. The heavy ball +struck the water a few yards ahead of the chase, and, ricochetting +into the air, plunged into the sea a mile beyond it. + +This produced the desired effect. The strange vessel backed her +top-sails and hove-to, while we ranged up and lay-to, about a +hundred yards off. + +"Lower the boat," cried the captain. + +In a second the boat was lowered and manned by a part of the crew, +who were all armed with cutlasses and pistols. As the captain +passed me to get into it, he said, "jump into the stern sheets, +Ralph, I may want you." I obeyed, and in ten minutes more we were +standing on the stranger's deck. We were all much surprised at the +sight that met our eyes. Instead of a crew of such sailors as we +were accustomed to see, there were only fifteen blacks standing on +the quarter-deck and regarding us with looks of undisguised alarm. +They were totally unarmed and most of them unclothed; one or two, +however, wore portions of European attire. One had on a pair of +duck trousers which were much too large for him and stuck out in a +most ungainly manner. Another wore nothing but the common scanty +native garment round the loins, and a black beaver hat. But the +most ludicrous personage of all, and one who seemed to be chief, +was a tall middle-aged man, of a mild, simple expression of +countenance, who wore a white cotton shirt, a swallow-tailed coat, +and a straw hat, while his black brawny legs were totally uncovered +below the knees. + +"Where's the commander of this ship?" inquired our captain, +stepping up to this individual. + +"I is capin," he answered, taking off his straw hat and making a +low bow. + +"You!" said our captain, in surprise. "Where do you come from, and +where are you bound? What cargo have you aboard?" + +"We is come," answered the man with the swallow-tail, "from +Aitutaki; we was go for Rarotonga. We is native miss'nary ship; +our name is de OLIVE BRANCH; an' our cargo is two tons cocoa-nuts, +seventy pigs, twenty cats, and de Gosp'l." + +This announcement was received by the crew of our vessel with a +shout of laughter, which, however, was peremptorily checked by the +captain, whose expression instantly changed from one of severity to +that of frank urbanity as he advanced towards the missionary and +shook him warmly by the hand. + +"I am very glad to have fallen in with you," said he, "and I wish +you much success in your missionary labours. Pray take me to your +cabin, as I wish to converse with you privately." + +The missionary immediately took him by the hand, and as he led him +away I heard him saying, "Me most glad to find you trader; we +t'ought you be pirate. You very like one 'bout the masts." + +What conversation the captain had with this man I never heard, but +he came on deck again in a quarter of an hour, and, shaking hands +cordially with the missionary, ordered us into our boat and +returned to the schooner, which was immediately put before the +wind. In a few minutes the OLIVE BRANCH was left far behind us. + +That afternoon, as I was down below at dinner, I heard the men +talking about this curious ship. + +"I wonder," said one, "why our captain looked so sweet on yon +swallow-tailed super-cargo o' pigs and Gospels. If it had been an +ordinary trader, now, he would have taken as many o' the pigs as he +required and sent the ship with all on board to the bottom." + +"Why, Dick, you must be new to these seas if you don't know that," +cried another. "The captain cares as much for the gospel as you do +(an' that's precious little), but he knows, and everybody knows, +that the only place among the southern islands where a ship can put +in and get what she wants in comfort, is where the gospel has been +sent to. There are hundreds o' islands, at this blessed moment, +where you might as well jump straight into a shark's maw as land +without a band o' thirty comrades armed to the teeth to back you." + +"Ay," said a man with a deep scar over his right eye, "Dick's new +to the work. But if the captain takes us for a cargo o' sandal- +wood to the Feejees he'll get a taste o' these black gentry in +their native condition. For my part I don't know, an' I don't +care, what the gospel does to them; but I know that when any o' the +islands chance to get it, trade goes all smooth an' easy; but where +they ha'nt got it, Beelzebub himself could hardly desire better +company." + +"Well, you ought to be a good judge," cried another, laughing, "for +you've never kept any company but the worst all your life!" + +"Ralph Rover!" shouted a voice down the hatchway. "Captain wants +you, aft." + +Springing up the ladder I hastened to the cabin, pondering as I +went the strange testimony borne by these men to the effect of the +gospel on savage natures; - testimony which, as it was perfectly +disinterested, I had no doubt whatever was strictly true. + +On coming again on deck I found Bloody Bill at the helm, and as we +were alone together I tried to draw him into conversation. After +repeating to him the conversation in the forecastle about the +missionaries, I said, - + +"Tell me, Bill, is this schooner really a trader in sandal-wood?" + +"Yes, Ralph, she is; but she's just as really a pirate. The black +flag you saw flying at the peak was no deception." + +"Then how can you say she's a trader?" asked I. + +"Why, as to that, she trades when she can't take by force, but she +takes by force, when she can, in preference. Ralph," he added, +lowering his voice, "if you had seen the bloody deeds that I have +witnessed done on these decks you would not need to ask if we were +pirates. But you'll find it out soon enough. As for the +missionaries, the captain favours them because they are useful to +him. The South-Sea islanders are such incarnate fiends that they +are the better of being tamed, and the missionaries are the only +men who can do it." + +Our track after this lay through several clusters of small islets, +among which we were becalmed more than once. During this part of +our voyage the watch on deck and the look-out at the mast-head were +more than usually vigilant, as we were not only in danger of being +attacked by the natives, who, I learned from the captain's remarks, +were a bloody and deceitful tribe at this group, but we were also +exposed to much risk from the multitudes of coral reefs that rose +up in the channels between the islands, some of them just above the +surface, others a few feet below it. Our precautions against the +savages I found were indeed necessary. + +One day we were becalmed among a group of small islands, most of +which appeared to be uninhabited. As we were in want of fresh +water the captain sent the boat ashore to bring off a cask or two. +But we were mistaken in thinking there were no natives; for +scarcely had we drawn near to the shore when a band of naked blacks +rushed out of the bush and assembled on the beach, brandishing +their clubs and spears in a threatening manner. Our men were well +armed, but refrained from showing any signs of hostility, and rowed +nearer in order to converse with the natives; and I now found that +more than one of the crew could imperfectly speak dialects of the +language peculiar to the South Sea islanders. When within forty +yards of the shore, we ceased rowing, and the first mate stood up +to address the multitude; but, instead of answering us, they +replied with a shower of stones, some of which cut the men +severely. Instantly our muskets were levelled, and a volley was +about to be fired, when the captain hailed us in a loud voice from +the schooner, which lay not more than five or six hundred yards off +the shore. + +"Don't fire," he shouted, angrily. "Pull off to the point ahead of +you." + +The men looked surprised at this order, and uttered deep curses as +they prepared to obey, for their wrath was roused and they burned +for revenge. Three or four of them hesitated, and seemed disposed +to mutiny. + +"Don't distress yourselves, lads," said the mate, while a bitter +smile curled his lip. "Obey orders. The captain's not the man to +take an insult tamely. If Long Tom does not speak presently I'll +give myself to the sharks." + +The men smiled significantly as they pulled from the shore, which +was now crowded with a dense mass of savages, amounting, probably, +to five or six hundred. We had not rowed off above a couple of +hundred yards when a loud roar thundered over the sea, and the big +brass gun sent a withering shower of grape point blank into the +midst of the living mass, through which a wide lane was cut, while +a yell, the like of which I could not have imagined, burst from the +miserable survivors as they fled to the woods. Amongst the heaps +of dead that lay on the sand, just where they had fallen, I could +distinguish mutilated forms writhing in agony, while ever and anon +one and another rose convulsively from out the mass, endeavoured to +stagger towards the wood, and ere they had taken a few steps, fell +and wallowed on the bloody sand. My blood curdled within me as I +witnessed this frightful and wanton slaughter; but I had little +time to think, for the captain's deep voice came again over the +water towards us: "Pull ashore, lads, and fill your water casks." +The men obeyed in silence, and it seemed to me as if even their +hard hearts were shocked by the ruthless deed. On gaining the +mouth of the rivulet at which we intended to take in water, we +found it flowing with blood, for the greater part of those who were +slain had been standing on the banks of the stream, a short way +above its mouth. Many of the wretched creatures had fallen into +it, and we found one body, which had been carried down, jammed +between two rocks, with the staring eyeballs turned towards us and +his black hair waving in the ripples of the blood-red stream. No +one dared to oppose our landing now, so we carried our casks to a +pool above the murdered group, and having filled them, returned on +board. Fortunately a breeze sprang up soon afterwards and carried +us away from the dreadful spot; but it could not waft me away from +the memory of what I had seen. + +"And this," thought I, gazing in horror at the captain, who, with a +quiet look of indifference, leaned upon the taffrail smoking a +cigar and contemplating the fertile green islets as they passed +like a lovely picture before our eyes - "this is the man who +favours the missionaries because they are useful to him and can +tame the savages better than any one else can do it!" Then I +wondered in my mind whether it were possible for any missionary to +tame HIM! + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + + +Bloody Bill is communicative and sagacious - Unpleasant prospects - +Retrospective meditations interrupted by volcanic agency - The +pirates negotiate with a Feejee chief - Various etceteras that are +calculated to surprise and horrify. + + +IT was many days after the events just narrated ere I recovered a +little of my wonted spirits. I could not shake off the feeling for +a long time that I was in a frightful dream, and the sight of our +captain filled me with so much horror that I kept out of his way as +much as my duties about the cabin would permit. Fortunately he +took so little notice of me that he did not observe my changed +feelings towards him, otherwise it might have been worse for me. + +But I was now resolved that I would run away the very first island +we should land at, and commit myself to the hospitality of the +natives rather than remain an hour longer than I could help in the +pirate schooner. I pondered this subject a good deal, and at last +made up my mind to communicate my intention to Bloody Bill; for, +during several talks I had had with him of late, I felt assured +that he too would willingly escape if possible. When I told him of +my design he shook his head. "No, no, Ralph," said he, "you must +not think of running away here. Among some of the groups of +islands you might do so with safety, but if you tried it here you +would find that you had jumped out of the fryin' pan into the +fire." + +"How so, Bill?" said I, "would the natives not receive me?" + +"That they would, lad; but they would eat you too." + +"Eat me!" said I in surprise, "I thought the South Sea islanders +never ate anybody except their enemies." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Bill. "I s'pose 'twas yer tender-hearted +friends in England that put that notion into your head. There's a +set o' soft-hearted folk at home that I knows on, who don't like to +have their feelin's ruffled, and when you tell them anything they +don't like - that shocks them, as they call it - no matter how true +it be, they stop their ears and cry out, 'Oh, that is TOO horrible! +We can't believe that!' An' they say truth. They can't believe it +'cause they won't believe it. Now, I believe there's thousands o' +the people in England who are sich born drivellin' WON'T-BELIEVERS +that they think the black fellows hereaway, at the worst, eat an +enemy only now an' then, out o' spite; whereas, I know for certain, +and many captains of the British and American navies know as well +as me, that the Feejee islanders eat not only their enemies but one +another; and they do it not for spite, but for pleasure. It's a +FACT that they prefer human flesh to any other. But they don't +like white men's flesh so well as black. They say it makes them +sick." + +"Why, Bill," said I, "you told me just now that they would eat ME +if they caught me." + +"So I did; and so I think they would. I've only heard some o' them +say they don't like white men SO WELL as black; but if they was +hungry they wouldn't be particular. Anyhow, I'm sure they would +kill you. You see, Ralph, I've been a good while in them parts, +and I've visited the different groups of islands oftentimes as a +trader. And thorough goin' blackguards some o' them traders are. +No better than pirates, I can tell you. One captain that I sailed +with was not a chip better than the one we're with now. He was +tradin' with a friendly chief one day, aboard his vessel. The +chief had swam off to us with the things for trade tied a-top of +his head, for them chaps are like otters in the water. Well, the +chief was hard on the captain, and would not part with some o' his +things. When their bargainin' was over they shook hands, and the +chief jumped over board to swim ashore; but before he got forty +yards from the ship the captain seized a musket and shot him dead. +He then hove up anchor and put to sea, and as we sailed along +shore, he dropped six black-fellows with his rifle, remarkin' that +'that would spoil the trade for the next comers.' But, as I was +sayin', I'm up to the ways o' these fellows. One o' the laws o' +the country is, that every shipwrecked person who happens to be +cast ashore, be he dead or alive, is doomed to be roasted and +eaten. There was a small tradin' schooner wrecked off one of these +islands when we were lyin' there in harbour during a storm. The +crew was lost, all but three men, who swam ashore. The moment they +landed they were seized by the natives and carried up into the +woods. We knew pretty well what their fate would be, but we could +not help them, for our crew was small, and if we had gone ashore +they would likely have killed us all. We never saw the three men +again; but we heard frightful yelling, and dancing, and merry- +making that night; and one of the natives, who came aboard to trade +with us next day, told us that the LONG PIGS, as he called the men, +had been roasted and eaten, and their bones were to be converted +into sail needles. He also said that white men were bad to eat, +and that most o' the people on shore were sick." + +I was very much shocked and cast down in my mind at this terrible +account of the natives, and asked Bill what he would advise me to +do. Looking round the deck to make sure that we were not +overheard, he lowered his voice and said, "There are two or three +ways that we might escape, Ralph, but none o' them's easy. If the +captain would only sail for some o' the islands near Tahiti, we +might run away there well enough, because the natives are all +Christians; an' we find that wherever the savages take up with +Christianity they always give over their bloody ways, and are safe +to be trusted. I never cared for Christianity myself," he +continued, in a soliloquising voice, "and I don't well know what it +means; but a man with half an eye can see what it does for these +black critters. However, the captain always keeps a sharp look out +after us when we get to these islands, for he half suspects that +one or two o' us are tired of his company. Then, we might manage +to cut the boat adrift some fine night when it's our watch on deck, +and clear off before they discovered that we were gone. But we +would run the risk o' bein' caught by the blacks. I wouldn't like +to try that plan. But you and I will think over it, Ralph, and see +what's to be done. In the meantime it's our watch below, so I'll +go and turn in." + +Bill then bade me good night, and went below, while a comrade took +his place at the helm; but, feeling no desire to enter into +conversation with him, I walked aft, and, leaning over the stern, +looked down into the phosphorescent waves that gargled around the +ladder, and streamed out like a flame of blue light in the vessel's +wake. My thoughts were very sad, and I could scarce refrain from +tears as I contrasted my present wretched position with the happy, +peaceful time, I had spent on the Coral Island with my dear +companions. As I thought upon Jack and Peterkin anxious +forebodings crossed my mind, and I pictured to myself the grief and +dismay with which they would search every nook and corner of the +island, in a vain attempt to discover my dead body; for I felt +assured that if they did not see any sign of the pirate schooner or +boat, when they came out of the cave to look for me, they would +never imagine that I had been carried away. I wondered, too, how +Jack would succeed in getting Peterkin out of the cave without my +assistance; and I trembled when I thought that he might lose +presence of mind, and begin to kick when he was in the tunnel! +These thoughts were suddenly interrupted and put to flight by a +bright red blaze which lighted up the horizon to the southward, and +cut a crimson glow far over the sea. This appearance was +accompanied by a low growling sound, as of distant thunder, and, at +the same time, the sky above us became black, while a hot stifling +wind blew around us in fitful gusts. + +The crew assembled hastily on deck, and most of them were under the +belief that a frightful hurricane was pending; but the captain +coming on deck, soon explained the phenomena. + +"It's only a volcano," said he. "I knew there was one hereabouts, +but thought it was extinct. Up there and furl top-gallant-sails; +we'll likely have a breeze, and it's well to be ready." + +As he spoke, a shower began to fall, which we quickly observed was +not rain, but fine ashes. As we were many miles distant from the +volcano, these must have been carried to us from it by the wind. +As the captain had predicted, a stiff breeze soon afterwards sprang +up, under the influence of which we speedily left the volcano far +behind us; but during the greater part of the night we could see +its lurid glare and hear its distant thunder. The shower did not +cease to fall for several hours, and we must have sailed under it +for nearly forty miles, perhaps farther. When we emerged from the +cloud, our decks and every part of the rigging were completely +covered with a thick coat of ashes. I was much interested in this, +and recollected that Jack had often spoken of many of the islands +of the Pacific as being volcanoes, either active or extinct, and +had said that the whole region was more or less volcanic, and that +some scientific men were of opinion that the islands of the Pacific +were nothing more or less than the mountain tops of a huge +continent which had sunk under the influence of volcanic agency. + +Three days after passing the volcano, we found ourselves a few +miles to windward of an island of considerable size and luxuriant +aspect. It consisted of two mountains, which seemed to be nearly +four thousand feet high. They were separated from each other by a +broad valley, whose thick-growing trees ascended a considerable +distance up the mountain sides; and rich level plains, or meadow- +land, spread round the base of the mountains, except at the point +immediately opposite the large valley, where a river seemed to +carry the trees, as it were, along with it down to the white sandy +shore. The mountain tops, unlike those of our Coral Island, were +sharp, needle-shaped, and bare, while their sides were more rugged +and grand in outline than anything I had yet seen in those seas. +Bloody Bill was beside me when the island first hove in sight. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, "I know that island well. They call it Emo." + +"Have you been here before, then?" I inquired. + +"Ay, that I have, often, and so has this schooner. 'Tis a famous +island for sandal-wood. We have taken many cargoes off it already, +and have paid for them too; for the savages are so numerous that we +dared not try to take it by force. But our captain has tried to +cheat them so often, that they're beginnin' not to like us overmuch +now. Besides, the men behaved ill the last time we were here; and +I wonder the captain is not afraid to venture. But he's afraid o' +nothing earthly, I believe." + +We soon ran inside the barrier coral-reef, and let go our anchor in +six fathoms water, just opposite the mouth of a small creek, whose +shores were densely covered with mangroves and tall umbrageous +trees. The principal village of the natives lay about half a mile +from this point. Ordering the boat out, the captain jumped into +it, and ordered me to follow him. The men, fifteen in number, were +well armed; and the mate was directed to have Long Tom ready for +emergencies. + +"Give way, lads," cried the captain. + +The oars fell into the water at the word, the boat shot from the +schooner's side, and in a few minutes reached the shore. Here, +contrary to our expectation, we were met with the utmost cordiality +by Romata, the principal chief of the island, who conducted us to +his house, and gave us mats to sit upon. I observed in passing +that the natives, of whom there were two or three thousand, were +totally unarmed. + +After a short preliminary palaver, a feast of baked pigs and +various roots was spread before us; of which we partook sparingly, +and then proceeded to business. The captain stated his object in +visiting the island, regretted that there had been a slight +misunderstanding during the last visit, and hoped that no ill-will +was borne by either party, and that a satisfactory trade would be +accomplished. + +Romata answered that he had forgotten there had been any +differences between them, protested that he was delighted to see +his friends again, and assured them they should have every +assistance in cutting and embarking the wood. The terms were +afterwards agreed on, and we rose to depart. All this conversation +was afterwards explained to me by Bill, who understood the language +pretty well. + +Romata accompanied us on board, and explained that a great chief +from another island was then on a visit to him, and that he was to +be ceremoniously entertained on the following day. After begging +to be allowed to introduce him to us, and receiving permission, he +sent his canoe ashore to bring him off. At the same time he gave +orders to bring on board his two favourites, a cock and a paroquet. +While the canoe was gone on this errand, I had time to regard the +savage chief attentively. He was a man of immense size, with +massive but beautifully moulded limbs and figure, only parts of +which, the broad chest and muscular arms, were uncovered; for, +although the lower orders generally wore no other clothing than a +strip of cloth called MARO round their loins, the chief, on +particular occasions, wrapped his person in voluminous folds of a +species of native cloth made from the bark of the Chinese paper- +mulberry. Romata wore a magnificent black beard and moustache, and +his hair was frizzed out to such an extent that it resembled a +large turban, in which was stuck a long wooden pin! I afterwards +found that this pin served for scratching the head, for which +purpose the fingers were too short without disarranging the hair. +But Romata put himself to much greater inconvenience on account of +his hair, for we found that he slept with his head resting on a +wooden pillow, in which was cut a hollow for the neck, so that the +hair of the sleeper might not be disarranged. + +In ten minutes the canoe returned, bringing the other chief, who +certainly presented a most extraordinary appearance, having painted +one half of his face red and the other half yellow, besides +ornamenting it with various designs in black! Otherwise he was +much the same in appearance as Romata, though not so powerfully +built. As this chief had never seen a ship before, except, +perchance, some of the petty traders that at long intervals visit +these remote islands, he was much taken up with the neatness and +beauty of all the fittings of the schooner. He was particularly +struck with a musket which was shown to him, and asked where the +white men got hatchets hard enough to cut the tree of which the +barrel was made! While he was thus engaged, his brother chief +stood aloof, talking with the captain, and fondling a superb cock +and a little blue-headed paroquet, the favourites of which I have +before spoken. I observed that all the other natives walked in a +crouching posture while in the presence of Romata. Before our +guests left us, the captain ordered the brass gun to be uncovered +and fired for their gratification; and I have every reason to +believe he did so for the purpose of showing our superior power, in +case the natives should harbour any evil designs against us. +Romata had never seen this gun before, as it had not been uncovered +on previous visits, and the astonishment with which he viewed it +was very amusing. Being desirous of knowing its power, he begged +that the captain would fire it. So a shot was put into it. The +chiefs were then directed to look at a rock about two miles out at +sea, and the gun was fired. In a second the top of the rock was +seen to burst asunder, and to fall in fragments into the sea. + +Romata was so delighted with the success of this shot, that he +pointed to a man who was walking on the shore, and begged the +captain to fire at him, evidently supposing that his permission was +quite sufficient to justify the captain in such an act. He was +therefore surprised, and not a little annoyed, when the captain +refused to fire at the native, and ordered the gun to be housed. + +Of all the things, however, that afforded matter of amusement to +these savages, that which pleased Romata's visitor most was the +ship's pump. He never tired of examining it, and pumping up the +water. Indeed, so much was he taken up with this pump, that he +could not be prevailed on to return on shore, but sent a canoe to +fetch his favourite stool, on which he seated himself, and spent +the remainder of the day in pumping the bilge-water out of the +ship! + +Next day the crew went ashore to cut sandal-wood, while the +captain, with one or two men, remained on board, in order to be +ready, if need be, with the brass gun, which was unhoused and +conspicuously elevated, with its capacious muzzle directed point +blank at the chief's house. The men were fully armed as usual; and +the captain ordered me to go with them, to assist in the work. I +was much pleased with this order, for it freed me from the +captain's company, which I could not now endure, and it gave me an +opportunity of seeing the natives. + +As we wound along in single file through the rich fragrant groves +of banana, cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and other trees, I observed that +there were many of the plum and banian trees, with which I had +become familiar on the Coral Island. I noticed also large +quantities of taro-roots, yams, and sweet potatoes, growing in +enclosures. On turning into an open glade of the woods, we came +abruptly upon a cluster of native houses. They were built chiefly +of bamboos, and were thatched with the large thick leaves of the +pandanus; but many of them had little more than a sloping roof and +three sides with an open front, being the most simple shelter from +the weather that could well be imagined. Within these, and around +them, were groups of natives - men, women, and children - who all +stood up to gaze at us as we marched along, followed by the party +of men whom the chief had sent to escort us. About half a mile +inland we arrived at the spot where the sandal-wood grew, and, +while the men set to work, I clambered up an adjoining hill to +observe the country. + +About mid-day, the chief arrived with several followers, one of +whom carried a baked pig on a wooden platter, with yams and +potatoes on several plantain leaves, which he presented to the men, +who sat down under the shade of a tree to dine. The chief sat down +to dine also; but, to my surprise, instead of feeding himself, one +of his wives performed that office for him! I was seated beside +Bill, and asked him the reason of this. + +"It is beneath his dignity, I believe, to feed himself," answered +Bill; "but I daresay he's not particular, except on great +occasions. They've a strange custom among them, Ralph, which is +called TABU, and they carry it to great lengths. If a man chooses +a particular tree for his god, the fruit o' that tree is tabued to +him; and if he eats it, he is sure to be killed by his people, and +eaten, of course, for killing means eating hereaway. Then, you see +that great mop o' hair on the chief's head? Well, he has a lot o' +barbers to keep it in order; and it's a law that whoever touches +the head of a living chief or the body of a dead one, his hands are +tabued; so, in that way, the barbers' hands are always tabued, and +they daren't use them for their lives, but have to be fed like big +babies, as they are, sure enough!" + +"That's odd, Bill. But look there," said I, pointing to a man +whose skin was of a much lighter colour than the generality of the +natives. "I've seen a few of these light-skinned fellows among the +Fejeeans. They seem to me to be of quite a different race." + +"So they are," answered Bill. "These fellows come from the Tongan +Islands, which lie a long way to the eastward. They come here to +build their big war-canoes; and as these take two, and sometimes +four years, to build, there's always some o' the brown-skins among +the black sarpents o' these islands." + +"By the way, Bill," said I, "your mentioning serpents, reminds me +that I have not seen a reptile of any kind since I came to this +part of the world." + +"No more there are any," said Bill, "if ye except the niggers +themselves, there's none on the islands, but a lizard or two and +some sich harmless things. But I never seed any myself. If +there's none on the land, however, there's more than enough in the +water, and that minds me of a wonderful brute they have here. But, +come, I'll show it to you." So saying, Bill arose, and, leaving +the men still busy with the baked pig, led me into the forest. +After proceeding a short distance we came upon a small pond of +stagnant water. A native lad had followed us, to whom we called +and beckoned him to come to us. On Bill saying a few words to him, +which I did not understand, the boy advanced to the edge of the +pond, and gave a low peculiar whistle. Immediately the water +became agitated and an enormous eel thrust its head above the +surface and allowed the youth to touch it. It was about twelve +feet long, and as thick round the body as a man's thigh. + +"There," said Bill, his lip curling with contempt, "what do you +think of that for a god, Ralph? This is one o' their gods, and it +has been fed with dozens o' livin' babies already. How many more +it'll get afore it dies is hard to say." + +"Babies?" said I, with an incredulous look + +"Ay, babies," returned Bill. "Your soft-hearted folk at home would +say, 'Oh, horrible! impossible!' to that, and then go away as +comfortable and unconcerned as if their sayin' 'horrible! +impossible!' had made it a lie. But I tell you, Ralph, it's a +FACT. I've seed it with my own eyes the last time I was here, an' +mayhap if you stop a while at this accursed place, and keep a sharp +look out, you'll see it too. They don't feed it regularly with +livin' babies, but they give it one now and then as a treat. Bah! +you brute!' cried Bill, in disgust, giving the reptile a kick on +the snout with his heavy boot, that sent it sweltering back in +agony into its loathsome pool. I thought it lucky for Bill, indeed +for all of us, that the native youth's back happened to be turned +at the time, for I am certain that if the poor savages had come to +know that we had so rudely handled their god, we should have had to +fight our way back to the ship. As we retraced our steps I +questioned my companion further on this subject. + +"How comes it, Bill, that the mothers allow such a dreadful thing +to be done?" + +"Allow it? the mothers DO it! It seems to me that there's nothing +too fiendish or diabolical for these people to do. Why, in some of +the islands they have an institution called the AREOI, and the +persons connected with that body are ready for any wickedness that +mortal man can devise. In fact they stick at nothing; and one o' +their customs is to murder their infants the moment they are born. +The mothers agree to it, and the fathers do it. And the mildest +ways they have of murdering them is by sticking them through the +body with sharp splinters of bamboo, strangling them with their +thumbs, or burying them alive and stamping them to death while +under the sod." + +I felt sick at heart while my companion recited these horrors. + +"But it's a curious fact," he continued, after a pause, during +which we walked in silence towards the spot where we had left our +comrades, - "it's a curious fact, that wherever the missionaries +get a footin' all these things come to an end at once, an' the +savages take to doin' each other good, and singin' psalms, just +like Methodists." + +"God bless the missionaries!" said I, while a feeling of enthusiasm +filled my heart, so that I could speak with difficulty. "God bless +and prosper the missionaries till they get a footing in every +island of the sea!" + +"I would say Amen to that prayer, Ralph, if I could," said Bill, in +a deep, sad voice; "but it would be a mere mockery for a man to ask +a blessing for others who dare not ask one for himself. But, +Ralph," he continued, "I've not told you half o' the abominations I +have seen durin' my life in these seas. If we pull long together, +lad, I'll tell you more; and if times have not changed very much +since I was here last, it's like that you'll have a chance o' +seeing a little for yourself before long." + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + + +The Sandal-wood party - Native children's games, somewhat +surprising - Desperate amusements suddenly and fatally brought to a +close - An old friend recognised - News - Romata's mad conduct + + +NEXT day the wood-cutting party went ashore again, and I +accompanied them as before. During the dinner hour I wandered into +the woods alone, being disinclined for food that day. I had not +rambled far when I found myself unexpectedly on the sea-shore, +having crossed a narrow neck of land which separated the native +village from a large bay. Here I found a party of the islanders +busy with one of their war-canoes, which was almost ready for +launching. I stood for a long time watching this party with great +interest, and observed that they fastened the timbers and planks to +each other very much in the same way in which I had seen Jack +fasten those of our little boat. But what surprised me most was +its immense length, which I measured very carefully, and found to +be a hundred feet long; and it was so capacious that it could have +held three hundred men. It had the unwieldy out-rigger and +enormously high stern-posts which I had remarked on the canoe that +came to us while I was on the Coral Island. Observing some boys +playing at games a short way along the beach, I resolved to go and +watch them; but as I turned from the natives who were engaged so +busily and cheerfully at their work, I little thought of the +terrible event that hung on the completion of that war-canoe. + +Advancing towards the children, who were so numerous that I began +to think this must be the general play-ground of the village, I sat +down on a grassy bank under the shade of a plantain-tree, to watch +them. And a happier or more noisy crew I have never seen. There +were at least two hundred of them, both boys and girls, all of whom +were clad in no other garments than their own glossy little black +skins, except the maro, or strip of cloth round the loins of the +boys, and a very short petticoat or kilt on the girls. They did +not all play at the same game, but amused themselves in different +groups. + +One band was busily engaged in a game exactly similar to our blind- +man's-buff. Another set were walking on stilts, which raised the +children three feet from the ground. They were very expert at this +amusement and seldom tumbled. In another place I observed a group +of girls standing together, and apparently enjoying themselves very +much; so I went up to see what they were doing, and found that they +were opening their eye-lids with their fingers till their eyes +appeared of an enormous size, and then thrusting pieces of straw +between the upper and lower lids, across the eye-ball, to keep them +in that position! This seemed to me, I must confess, a very +foolish as well as dangerous amusement. Nevertheless the children +seemed to be greatly delighted with the hideous faces they made. I +pondered this subject a good deal, and thought that if little +children knew how silly they seem to grown-up people when they make +faces, they would not be so fond of doing it. In another place +were a number of boys engaged in flying kites, and I could not help +wondering that some of the games of those little savages should be +so like to our own, although they had never seen us at play. But +the kites were different from ours in many respects, being of every +variety of shape. They were made of very thin cloth, and the boys +raised them to a wonderful height in the air by means of twine made +from the cocoa-nut husk. Other games there were, some of which +showed the natural depravity of the hearts of these poor savages, +and made me wish fervently that missionaries might be sent out to +them. But the amusement which the greatest number of the children +of both sexes seemed to take chief delight in, was swimming and +diving in the sea; and the expertness which they exhibited was +truly amazing. They seemed to have two principal games in the +water, one of which was to dive off a sort of stage which had been +erected near a deep part of the sea, and chase each other in the +water. Some of them went down to an extraordinary depth; others +skimmed along the surface, or rolled over and over like porpoises, +or diving under each other, came up unexpectedly and pulled each +other down by a leg or an arm. They never seemed to tire of this +sport, and, from the great heat of the water in the South Seas, +they could remain in it nearly all day without feeling chilled. +Many of these children were almost infants, scarce able to walk; +yet they staggered down the beach, flung their round fat little +black bodies fearlessly into deep water, and struck out to sea with +as much confidence as ducklings. + +The other game to which I have referred was swimming in the surf. +But as this is an amusement in which all engage, from children of +ten to gray-headed men of sixty, and as I had an opportunity of +witnessing it in perfection the day following, I shall describe it +more minutely. + +I suppose it was in honour of their guest that this grand swimming- +match was got up, for Romata came and told the captain that they +were going to engage in it, and begged him to "come and see." + +"What sort of amusement is this surf swimming?" I inquired of Bill, +as we walked together to a part of the shore on which several +thousands of the natives were assembled. + +"It's a very favourite lark with these 'xtr'or'nary critters," +replied Bill, giving a turn to the quid of tobacco that invariably +bulged out his left cheek. "Ye see, Ralph, them fellows take to +the water as soon a'most as they can walk, an' long before they can +do that anything respectably, so that they are as much at home in +the sea as on the land. Well, ye see, I 'spose they found swimmin' +for miles out to sea, and divin' fathoms deep, wasn't exciting +enough, so they invented this game o' the surf. Each man and boy, +as you see, has got a short board or plank, with which he swims out +for a mile or more to sea, and then, gettin' on the top o' yon +thundering breaker, they come to shore on the top of it, yellin' +and screechin' like fiends. It's a marvel to me that they're not +dashed to shivers on the coral reef, for sure an' sartin am I that +if any o' us tried it, we wouldn't be worth the fluke of a broken +anchor after the wave fell. But there they go!" + +As he spoke, several hundreds of the natives, amongst whom we were +now standing, uttered a loud yell, rushed down the beach, plunged +into the surf, and were carried off by the seething foam of the +retreating wave. + +At the point where we stood, the encircling coral reef joined the +shore, so that the magnificent breakers, which a recent stiff +breeze had rendered larger than usual, fell in thunder at the feet +of the multitudes who lined the beach. For some time the swimmers +continued to strike out to sea, breasting over the swell like +hundreds of black seals. Then they all turned, and, watching an +approaching billow, mounted its white crest, and, each laying his +breast on the short flat board, came rolling towards the shore, +careering on the summit of the mighty wave, while they and the +onlookers shouted and yelled with excitement. Just as the monster +wave curled in solemn majesty to fling its bulky length upon the +beach, most of the swimmers slid back into the trough behind; +others, slipping off their boards, seized them in their hands, and, +plunging through the watery waste, swam out to repeat the +amusement; but a few, who seemed to me the most reckless, continued +their career until they were launched upon the beach, and enveloped +in the churning foam and spray. One of these last came in on the +crest of the wave most manfully, and landed with a violent bound +almost on the spot where Bill and I stood. I saw by his peculiar +head-dress that he was the chief whom the tribe entertained as +their guest. The sea-water had removed nearly all the paint with +which his face had been covered; and, as he rose panting to his +feet, I recognised, to my surprise, the features of Tararo, my old +friend of the Coral Island! + +Tararo at the same moment recognised me, and, advancing quickly, +took me round the neck and rubbed noses; which had the effect of +transferring a good deal of the moist paint from his nose to mine. +Then, recollecting that this was not the white man's mode of +salutation, he grasped me by the hand and shook it violently. + +"Hallo, Ralph!" cried Bill, in surprise, "that chap seems to have +taken a sudden fancy to you, or he must be an old acquaintance." + +"Right, Bill," I replied, "he is indeed an old acquaintance;" and I +explained in a few words that he was the chief whose party Jack and +Peterkin and I had helped to save. + +Tararo having thrown away his surf-board, entered into an animated +conversation with Bill, pointing frequently during the course of it +to me; whereby I concluded he must be telling him about the +memorable battle, and the part we had taken in it. When he paused, +I begged of Bill to ask him about the woman Avatea, for I had some +hope that she might have come with Tararo on this visit. "And ask +him," said I, "who she is, for I am persuaded she is of a different +race from the Feejeeans." On the mention of her name the chief +frowned darkly, and seemed to speak with much anger. + +"You're right, Ralph," said Bill, when the chief had ceased to +talk; "she's not a Feejee girl, but a Samoan. How she ever came to +this place the chief does not very clearly explain, but he says she +was taken in war, and that he got her three years ago, an' kept her +as his daughter ever since. Lucky for her, poor girl, else she'd +have been roasted and eaten like the rest." + +"But why does Tararo frown and look so angry?" said I. + +"Because the girl's somewhat obstinate, like most o' the sex, an' +won't marry the man he wants her to. It seems that a chief of some +other island came on a visit to Tararo and took a fancy to her, but +she wouldn't have him on no account, bein' already in love, and +engaged to a young chief whom Tararo hates, and she kicked up a +desperate shindy; so, as he was going on a war expedition in his +canoe, he left her to think about it, sayin' he'd be back in six +months or so, when he hoped she wouldn't be so obstropolous. This +happened just a week ago; an' Tararo says that if she's not ready +to go, when the chief returns, as his bride, she'll be sent to him +as a LONG PIG." + +"As a long pig!" I exclaimed in surprise; "why what does he mean by +that?" + +"He means somethin' very unpleasant," answered Bill with a frown. +"You see these blackguards eat men an' women just as readily as +they eat pigs; and, as baked pigs and baked men are very like each +other in appearance, they call men LONG pigs. If Avatea goes to +this fellow as a long pig, it's all up with her, poor thing." + +"Is she on the island now?" I asked eagerly. + +"No, she's at Tararo's island." + +"And where does it lie?" + +"About fifty or sixty miles to the south'ard o' this," returned +Bill; " but I - " + +At this moment we were startled by the cry of "Mao! mao! - a shark! +a shark!" which was immediately followed by a shriek that rang +clear and fearfully loud above the tumult of cries that arose from +the savages in the water and on the land. We turned hastily +towards the direction whence the cry came, and had just time to +observe the glaring eye-balls of one of the swimmers as he tossed +his arms in the air. Next instant he was pulled under the waves. +A canoe was instantly launched, and the hand of the drowning man +was caught, but only half of his body was dragged from the maw of +the monster, which followed the canoe until the water became so +shallow that it could scarcely swim. The crest of the next billow +was tinged with red as it rolled towards the shore. + +In most countries of the world this would have made a deep +impression on the spectators, but the only effect it had upon these +islanders was to make them hurry with all speed out of the sea, +lest a similar fate should befall some of the others; but, so +utterly reckless were they of human life, that it did not for a +moment suspend the progress of their amusements. It is true the +surf-swimming ended for that time somewhat abruptly, but they +immediately proceeded with other games. Bill told me that sharks +do not often attack the surf-swimmers, being frightened away by the +immense numbers of men and boys in the water, and by the shouting +and splashing that they make. "But," said he, "such a thing as you +have seen just now don't frighten them much. They'll be at it +again to-morrow or next day, just as if there wasn't a single shark +between Feejee and Nova Zembla." + +After this the natives had a series of wrestling and boxing +matches; and being men of immense size and muscle, they did a good +deal of injury to each other, especially in boxing, in which not +only the lower orders, but several of the chiefs and priests +engaged. Each bout was very quickly terminated, for they did not +pretend to a scientific knowledge of the art, and wasted no time in +sparring, but hit straight out at each other's heads, and their +blows were delivered with great force. Frequently one of the +combatants was knocked down with a single blow; and one gigantic +fellow hit his adversary so severely that he drove the skin +entirely off his forehead. This feat was hailed with immense +applause by the spectators. + +During these exhibitions, which were very painful to me, though I +confess I could not refrain from beholding them, I was struck with +the beauty of many of the figures and designs that were tattooed on +the persons of the chiefs and principal men. One figure, that +seemed to me very elegant, was that of a palm-tree tattooed on the +back of a man's leg, the roots rising, as it were, from under his +heel, the stem ascending the tendon of the ankle, and the graceful +head branching out upon the calf. I afterwards learned that this +process of tattooing is very painful, and takes long to do, +commencing at the age of ten, and being continued at intervals up +to the age of thirty. It is done by means of an instrument made of +bone, with a number of sharp teeth with which the skin is +punctured. Into these punctures a preparation made from the kernel +of the candle-nut, mixed with cocoa-nut oil, is rubbed, and the +mark thus made is indelible. The operation is performed by a class +of men whose profession it is, and they tattoo as much at a time, +as the person on whom they are operating can bear; which is not +much, the pain and inflammation caused by tattooing being very +great, sometimes causing death. Some of the chiefs were tattooed +with an ornamental stripe down the legs, which gave them the +appearance of being clad in tights. Others had marks round the +ankles and insteps, which looked like tight-fitting and elegant +boots. Their faces were also tattooed, and their breasts were very +profusely marked with every imaginable species of device, - +muskets, dogs, birds, pigs, clubs, and canoes, intermingled with +lozenges, squares, circles, and other arbitrary figures. + +The women were not tattooed so much as the men, having only a few +marks on their feet and arms. But I must say, however +objectionable this strange practice may be, it nevertheless had +this good effect, that it took away very much from their appearance +of nakedness. + +Next day, while we were returning from the woods to our schooner, +we observed Romata rushing about in the neighbourhood of his house, +apparently mad with passion. + +"Ah!" said Bill to me, "there he's at his old tricks again. That's +his way when he gets drink. The natives make a sort of drink o' +their own, and it makes him bad enough; but when he gets brandy +he's like a wild tiger. The captain, I suppose, has given him a +bottle, as usual, to keep him in good humour. After drinkin' he +usually goes to sleep, and the people know it well and keep out of +his way, for fear they should waken him. Even the babies are taken +out of ear-shot; for, when he's waked up, he rushes out just as you +see him now, and spears or clubs the first person he meets." + +It seemed at the present time, however, that no deadly weapon had +been in his way, for the infuriated chief was raging about without +one. Suddenly he caught sight of an unfortunate man who was trying +to conceal himself behind a tree. Rushing towards him, Romata +struck him a terrible blow on the head, which knocked out the poor +man's eye and also dislocated the chief's finger. The wretched +creature offered no resistance; he did not even attempt to parry +the blow. Indeed, from what Bill said, I found that he might +consider himself lucky in having escaped with his life, which would +certainly have been forfeited had the chief been possessed of a +club at the time. + +"Have these wretched creatures no law among themselves," said I, +"which can restrain such wickedness?" + +"None," replied Bill. "The chief's word is law. He might kill and +eat a dozen of his own subjects any day for nothing more than his +own pleasure, and nobody would take the least notice of it." + +This ferocious deed took place within sight of our party as we +wended our way to the beach, but I could not observe any other +expression on the faces of the men than that of total indifference +or contempt. It seemed to me a very awful thing that it should be +possible for men to come to such hardness of heart and callousness +to the sight of bloodshed and violence; but, indeed, I began to +find that such constant exposure to scenes of blood was having a +slight effect upon myself, and I shuddered when I came to think +that I, too, was becoming callous. + +I thought upon this subject much that night while I walked up and +down the deck during my hours of watch; and I came to the +conclusion that if I, who hated, abhorred, and detested such bloody +deeds as I had witnessed within the last few weeks, could so soon +come to be less sensitive about them, how little wonder that these +poor ignorant savages, who were born and bred in familiarity +therewith, should think nothing of them at all, and should hold +human life in so very slight esteem. + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + + +Mischief brewing - My blood is made to run cold - Evil +consultations and wicked resolves - Bloody Bill attempts to do good +and fails - The attack - Wholesale murder - The flight - The +escape. + + + +NEXT morning I awoke with a feverish brow and a feeling of deep +depression at my heart; and the more I thought on my unhappy fate, +the more wretched and miserable did I feel. + +I was surrounded on all sides by human beings of the most dreadful +character, to whom the shedding of blood was mere pastime. On +shore were the natives, whose practices were so horrible that I +could not think of them without shuddering. On board were none but +pirates of the blackest dye, who, although not cannibals, were foul +murderers, and more blameworthy even than the savages, inasmuch as +they knew better. Even Bill, with whom I had, under the strange +circumstances of my lot, formed a kind of intimacy, was so fierce +in his nature as to have acquired the title of "Bloody" from his +vile companions. I felt very much cast down the more I considered +the subject and the impossibility of delivery, as it seemed to me, +at least for a long time to come. At last, in my feeling of utter +helplessness, I prayed fervently to the Almighty that he would +deliver me out of my miserable condition; and when I had done so I +felt some degree of comfort. + +When the captain came on deck, before the hour at which the men +usually started for the woods, I begged of him to permit me to +remain aboard that day, as I did not feel well; but he looked at me +angrily, and ordered me, in a surly tone, to get ready to go on +shore as usual. The fact was that the captain had been out of +humour for some time past. Romata and he had had some differences, +and high words had passed between them, during which the chief had +threatened to send a fleet of his war-canoes, with a thousand men, +to break up and burn the schooner; whereupon the captain smiled +sarcastically, and going up to the chief gazed sternly in his face, +while he said, "I have only to raise my little finger just now, and +my big gun will blow your whole village to atoms in five minutes!" +Although the chief was a bold man, he quailed before the pirate's +glance and threat, and made no reply; but a bad feeling had been +raised and old sores had been opened. + +I had, therefore, to go with the wood-cutters that day. Before +starting, however, the captain called me into the cabin, and said, +- + +"Here, Ralph, I've got a mission for you, lad. That blackguard +Romata is in the dumps, and nothing will mollify him but a gift; so +do you go up to his house and give him these whales' teeth, with my +compliments. Take with you one of the men who can speak the +language." + +I looked at the gift in some surprise, for it consisted of six +white whales' teeth, and two of the same dyed bright red, which +seemed to me very paltry things. However, I did not dare to +hesitate or ask any questions; so, gathering them up, I left the +cabin and was soon on my way to the chief's house, accompanied by +Bill. On expressing my surprise at the gift, he said, - + +"They're paltry enough to you or me, Ralph, but they're considered +of great value by them chaps. They're a sort o' cash among them. +The red ones are the most prized, one of them bein' equal to twenty +o' the white ones. I suppose the only reason for their bein' +valuable is that there ain't many of them, and they're hard to be +got." + +On arriving at the house we found Romata sitting on a mat, in the +midst of a number of large bales of native cloth and other +articles, which had been brought to him as presents from time to +time by inferior chiefs. He received us rather haughtily, but on +Bill explaining the nature of our errand he became very +condescending, and his eyes glistened with satisfaction when he +received the whales' teeth, although he laid them aside with an +assumption of kingly indifference. + +"Go," said he, with a wave of the hand, - "go, tell your captain +that he may cut wood to-day, but not to-morrow. He must come +ashore, - I want to have a palaver with him." + +As we left the house to return to the woods, Bill shook his head: + +"There's mischief brewin' in that black rascal's head. I know him +of old. But what comes here?" + +As he spoke, we heard the sound of laughter and shouting in the +wood, and presently there issued from it a band of savages, in the +midst of whom were a number of men bearing burdens on their +shoulders. At first I thought that these burdens were poles with +something rolled round them, the end of each pole resting on a +man's shoulder. But on a nearer approach I saw that they were +human beings, tied hand and foot, and so lashed to the poles that +they could not move. I counted twenty of them as they passed. + +"More murder!" said Bill, in a voice that sounded between a hoarse +laugh and a groan. + +"Surely they are not going to murder them?" said I, looking +anxiously into Bill's face. + +"I don't know, Ralph," replied Bill, "what they're goin' to do with +them; but I fear they mean no good when they tie fellows up in that +way." + +As we continued our way towards the wood-cutters, I observed that +Bill looked anxiously over his shoulder, in the direction where the +procession had disappeared. At last he stopped, and turning +abruptly on his heel, said, - + +"I tell ye what it is, Ralph, I must be at the bottom o' that +affair. Let us follow these black scoundrels and see what they're +goin' to do." + +I must say I had no wish to pry further into their bloody +practices; but Bill seemed bent on it, so I turned and went. We +passed rapidly through the bush, being guided in the right +direction by the shouts of the savages. Suddenly there was a dead +silence, which continued for some time, while Bill and I +involuntarily quickened our pace until we were running at the top +of our speed across the narrow neck of land previously mentioned. +As we reached the verge of the wood, we discovered the savages +surrounding the large war-canoe, which they were apparently on the +point of launching. Suddenly the multitude put their united +strength to the canoe; but scarcely had the huge machine begun to +move, when a yell, the most appalling that ever fell upon my ear, +rose high above the shouting of the savages. It had not died away +when another and another smote upon my throbbing ear; and then I +saw that these inhuman monsters were actually launching their canoe +over the living bodies of their victims. But there was no pity in +the breasts of these men. Forward they went in ruthless +indifference, shouting as they went, while high above their voices +rang the dying shrieks of those wretched creatures, as, one after +another, the ponderous canoe passed over them, burst the eyeballs +from their sockets, and sent the life's blood gushing from their +mouths. Oh, reader, this is no fiction. I would not, for the sake +of thrilling you with horror, invent so terrible a scene. It was +witnessed. It is true; true as that accursed sin which has +rendered the human heart capable of such diabolical enormities! + +When it was over I turned round and fell upon the grass with a deep +groan; but Bill seized me by the arm, and lifting me up as if I had +been a child, cried, - + +"Come along, lad; let's away!" - and so, staggering and stumbling +over the tangled underwood, we fled from the fatal spot. + +During the remainder of that day I felt as if I were in a horrible +dream. I scarce knew what was said to me, and was more than once +blamed by the men for idling my time. At last the hour to return +aboard came. We marched down to the beach, and I felt relief for +the first time when my feet rested on the schooner's deck. + +In the course of the evening I overheard part of a conversation +between the captain and the first mate, which startled me not a +little. They were down in the cabin, and conversed in an under- +tone, but the sky-light being off, I overheard every word that was +said. + +"I don't half like it," said the mate. "It seems to me that we'll +only have hard fightin' and no pay." + +"No pay!" repeated the captain, in a voice of suppressed anger. +"Do you call a good cargo all for nothing no pay?" + +"Very true," returned the mate; "but we've got the cargo aboard. +Why not cut your cable and take French leave o' them? What's the +use o' tryin' to lick the blackguards when it'll do us no manner o' +good?" + +"Mate," said the captain, in a low voice, "you talk like a fresh- +water sailor. I can only attribute this shyness to some strange +delusion; for surely" (his voice assumed a slightly sneering tone +as he said this) "surely I am not to suppose that YOU have become +soft-hearted! Besides, you are wrong in regard to the cargo being +aboard; there's a good quarter of it lying in the woods, and that +blackguard chief knows it and won't let me take it off. He defied +us to do our worst, yesterday." + +"Defied us! did he?' cried the mate, with a bitter laugh. "Poor +contemptible thing!" + +"And yet he seems not so contemptible but that you are afraid to +attack him." + +"Who said I was afraid?" growled the mate, sulkily. "I'm as ready +as any man in the ship. But, captain, what is it that you intend +to do?" + +"I intend to muffle the sweeps and row the schooner up to the head +of the creek there, from which point we can command the pile of +sandal-wood with our gun. Then I shall land with all the men +except two, who shall take care of the schooner and be ready with +the boat to take us off. We can creep through the woods to the +head of the village, where these cannibals are always dancing round +their suppers of human flesh, and if the carbines of the men are +loaded with a heavy charge of buck-shot, we can drop forty or fifty +at the first volley. After that the thing will be easy enough. +The savages will take to the mountains in a body, and we shall take +what we require, up anchor, and away." + +To this plan the mate at length agreed. As he left the cabin I +heard the captain say, - + +"Give the men an extra glass of grog, and don't forget the buck- +shot." + +The reader may conceive the horror with which I heard this +murderous conversation. I immediately repeated it to Bill, who +seemed much perplexed about it. At length he said, - + +"I'll tell you what I'll do, Ralph: I'll swim ashore after dark +and fix a musket to a tree not far from the place where we'll have +to land, and I'll tie a long string to the trigger, so that when +our fellows cross it they'll let it off, and so alarm the village +in time to prevent an attack, but not in time to prevent us gettin' +back to the boat; so, master captain," added Bill with a smile that +for the first time seemed to me to be mingled with good-natured +cheerfulness, "you'll be baulked at least for once in your life by +Bloody Bill." + +After it grew dark, Bill put this resolve in practice. He slipped +over the side with a musket in his left hand, while with his right +he swam ashore and entered the woods. He soon returned, having +accomplished his purpose, and got on board without being seen, - I +being the only one on deck. + +When the hour of midnight approached the men were mustered on deck, +the cable was cut and the muffled sweeps got out. These sweeps +were immensely large oars, each requiring a couple of men to work +it. In a few minutes we entered the mouth of the creek, which was +indeed the mouth of a small river, and took about half an hour to +ascend it, although the spot where we intended to land was not more +than six hundred yards from the mouth, because there was a slight +current against us, and the mangroves which narrowed the creek, +impeded the rowers in some places. Having reached the spot, which +was so darkened by overhanging trees that we could see with +difficulty, a small kedge anchor attached to a thin line was let +softly down over the stern. + +"Now, lads," whispered the captain, as he walked along the line of +men, who were all armed to the teeth, "don't be in a hurry, aim +low, and don't waste your first shots." + +He then pointed to the boat, into which the men crowded in silence. +There was no room to row, but oars were not needed, as a slight +push against the side of the schooner sent the boat gliding to the +shore. + +"There's no need of leaving two in the boat," whispered the mate, +as the men stepped out; "we shall want all our hands. Let Ralph +stay." + +The captain assented, and ordered me to stand in readiness with the +boat-hook, to shove ashore at a moment's notice if they should +return, or to shove off if any of the savages should happen to +approach. He then threw his carbine into the hollow of his arm and +glided through the bushes followed by his men. With a throbbing +head I awaited the result of our plan. I knew the exact locality +where the musket was placed, for Bill had described it to me, and I +kept my straining eyes fixed upon the spot. But no sound came, and +I began to fear that either they had gone in another direction or +that Bill had not fixed the string properly. Suddenly I heard a +faint click, and observed one or two bright sparks among the +bushes. My heart immediately sank within me, for I knew at once +that the trigger had indeed been pulled but that the priming had +not caught. The plan, therefore, had utterly failed. A feeling of +dread now began to creep over me as I stood in the boat, in that +dark, silent spot, awaiting the issue of this murderous expedition. +I shuddered as I glanced at the water that glided past like a dark +reptile. I looked back at the schooner, but her hull was just +barely visible, while her tapering masts were lost among the trees +which overshadowed her. Her lower sails were set, but so thick was +the gloom that they were quite invisible. + +Suddenly I heard a shot. In a moment a thousand voices raised a +yell in the village; again the cry rose on the night air, and was +followed by broken shouts as of scattered parties of men bounding +into the woods. Then I heard another shout loud and close at hand. +It was the voice of the captain cursing the man who had fired the +premature shot. Then came the order, "Forward," followed by the +wild hurrah of our men, as they charged the savages. Shots now +rang in quick succession, and at last a loud volley startled the +echoes of the woods. It was followed by a multitude of wild +shrieks, which were immediately drowned in another "hurrah" from +the men; the distance of the sound proving that they were driving +their enemies before them towards the sea. + +While I was listening intently to these sounds, which were now +mingled in confusion, I was startled by the rustling of the leaves +not far from me. At first I thought it was a party of savages who +had observed the schooner, but I was speedily undeceived by +observing a body of natives - apparently several hundreds, as far +as I could guess in the uncertain light - bounding through the +woods towards the scene of battle. I saw at once that this was a +party who had out-flanked our men, and would speedily attack them +in the rear. And so it turned out, for, in a short time, the +shouts increased ten-fold, and among them I thought I heard a +death-cry uttered by voices familiar to my ear. + +At length the tumult of battle ceased, and, from the cries of +exultation that now arose from the savages, I felt assured that our +men had been conquered. I was immediately thrown into dreadful +consternation. What was I now to do? To be taken by the savages +was too horrible to be thought of; to flee to the mountains was +hopeless, as I should soon be discovered; and to take the schooner +out of the creek without assistance was impossible. I resolved, +however, to make the attempt, as being my only hope, and was on the +point of pushing off when my hand was stayed and my blood chilled +by an appalling shriek in which I recognised the voice of one of +the crew. It was succeeded by a shout from the savages. Then came +another, and another shriek of agony, making my ears to tingle, as +I felt convinced they were murdering the pirate crew in cold blood. +With a bursting heart and my brain whirling as if on fire, I seized +the boat-hook to push from shore when a man sprang from the bushes. + +"Stop! Ralph, stop! - there now, push off," he cried, and bounded +into the boat so violently as nearly to upset her. It was Bill's +voice! In another moment we were on board, - the boat made fast, +the line of the anchor cut, and the sweeps run out. At the first +stroke of Bill's giant arm the schooner was nearly pulled ashore, +for in his haste he forgot that I could scarcely move the unwieldy +oar. Springing to the stern he lashed the rudder in such a +position as that, while it aided me, it acted against him, and so +rendered the force of our strokes nearly equal. The schooner now +began to glide quickly down the creek, but before we reached its +mouth, a yell from a thousand voices on the bank told that we were +discovered. Instantly a number of the savages plunged into the +water and swam towards us; but we were making so much way that they +could not overtake us. One, however, an immensely powerful man, +succeeded in laying hold of the cut rope that hung from the stern, +and clambered quickly upon deck. Bill caught sight of him the +instant his head appeared above the taffrail. But he did not cease +to row, and did not appear even to notice the savage until he was +within a yard of him; then, dropping the sweep, he struck him a +blow on the forehead with his clenched fist that felled him to the +deck. Lifting him up he hurled him overboard and resumed the oar. +But now a greater danger awaited us, for the savages had outrun us +on the bank and were about to plunge into the water ahead of the +schooner. If they succeeded in doing so our fate was sealed. For +one moment Bill stood irresolute. Then, drawing a pistol from his +belt, he sprang to the brass gun, held the pan of his pistol over +the touch-hole and fired. The shot was succeeded by the hiss of +the cannon's priming, then the blaze and the crashing thunder of +the monstrous gun burst upon the savages with such deafening roar +that it seemed as if their very mountains had been rent asunder. + +This was enough. The moment of surprise and hesitation caused by +the unwonted sound, gave us time to pass the point; a gentle +breeze, which the dense foliage had hitherto prevented us from +feeling, bulged out our sails; the schooner bent before it, and the +shouts of the disappointed savages grew fainter and fainter in the +distance as we were slowly wafted out to sea. + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + + + +Reflections - The wounded man - The squall - True consolation - +Death. + + +THERE is a power of endurance in human beings, both in their bodies +and in their minds, which, I have often thought, seems to be +wonderfully adapted and exactly proportioned to the circumstances +in which individuals may happen to be placed, - a power which, in +most cases, is sufficient to carry a man through and over every +obstacle that may happen to be thrown in his path through life, no +matter how high or how steep the mountain may be, but which often +forsakes him the moment the summit is gained, the point of +difficulty passed; and leaves him prostrated, with energies gone, +nerves unstrung, and a feeling of incapacity pervading the entire +frame that renders the most trifling effort almost impossible. + +During the greater part of that day I had been subjected to severe +mental and much physical excitement, which had almost crushed me +down by the time I was relieved from duty in the course of the +evening. But when the expedition, whose failure has just been +narrated, was planned, my anxieties and energies had been so +powerfully aroused that I went through the protracted scenes of +that terrible night without a feeling of the slightest fatigue. My +mind and body were alike active and full of energy. No sooner was +the last thrilling fear of danger past, however, than my faculties +were utterly relaxed; and, when I felt the cool breezes of the +Pacific playing around my fevered brow, and heard the free waves +rippling at the schooner's prow, as we left the hated island behind +us, my senses forsook me and I fell in a swoon upon the deck. + +From this state I was quickly aroused by Bill, who shook me by the +arm, saying, - + +"Hallo! Ralph, boy, rouse up, lad, we're safe now. Poor thing, I +believe he's fainted." And raising me in his arms he laid me on +the folds of the gaff-top-sail, which lay upon the deck near the +tiller. "Here, take a drop o' this, it'll do you good, my boy," he +added, in a voice of tenderness which I had never heard him use +before, while he held a brandy-flask to my lips. + +I raised my eyes gratefully, as I swallowed a mouthful; next moment +my head sank heavily upon my arm and I fell fast asleep. I slept +long, for when I awoke the sun was a good way above the horizon. I +did not move on first opening my eyes, as I felt a delightful +sensation of rest pervading me, and my eyes were riveted on and +charmed with the gorgeous splendour of the mighty ocean, that burst +upon my sight. It was a dead calm; the sea seemed a sheet of +undulating crystal, tipped and streaked with the saffron hues of +sunrise, which had not yet merged into the glowing heat of noon; +and there was a deep calm in the blue dome above, that was not +broken even by the usual flutter of the sea-fowl. How long I would +have lain in contemplation of this peaceful scene I know not, but +my mind was recalled suddenly and painfully to the past and the +present by the sight of Bill, who was seated on the deck at my feet +with his head reclining, as if in sleep, on his right arm, which +rested on the tiller. As he seemed to rest peacefully I did not +mean to disturb him, but the slight noise I made in raising myself +on my elbow caused him to start and look round. + +"Well, Ralph, awake at last, my boy; you have slept long and +soundly," he said, turning towards me. + +On beholding his countenance I sprang up in anxiety. He was deadly +pale, and his hair, which hung in dishevelled locks over his face, +was clotted with blood. Blood also stained his hollow cheeks and +covered the front of his shirt, which, with the greater part of +dress, was torn and soiled with mud. + +"Oh, Bill!" said I, with deep anxiety, "what is the matter with +you? You are ill. You must have been wounded." + +"Even so, lad," said Bill in a deep soft voice, while he extended +his huge frame on the couch from which I had just risen. "I've got +an ugly wound, I fear, and I've been waiting for you to waken, to +ask you to get me a drop o' brandy and a mouthful o' bread from the +cabin lockers. You seemed to sleep so sweetly, Ralph, that I +didn't like to disturb you. But I don't feel up to much just now." + +I did not wait till he had done talking, but ran below immediately, +and returned in a few seconds with a bottle of brandy and some +broken biscuit. He seemed much refreshed after eating a few +morsels and drinking a long draught of water mingled with a little +of the spirits. Immediately afterwards he fell asleep, and I +watched him anxiously until he awoke, being desirous of knowing the +nature and extent of his wound. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, on awaking suddenly, after a slumber of an +hour, "I'm the better of that nap, Ralph; I feel twice the man I +was;" and he attempted to rise, but sank back again immediately +with a deep groan. + +"Nay, Bill you must not move, but lie still while I look at your +wound. I'll make a comfortable bed for you here on deck, and get +you some breakfast. After that you shall tell me how you got it. +Cheer up, Bill," I added, seeing that he turned his head away; +"you'll be all right in a little, and I'll be a capital nurse to +you though I'm no doctor." + +I then left him, and lighted a fire in the caboose. While it was +kindling, I went to the steward's pantry and procured the materials +for a good breakfast, with which, in little more than half an hour, +I returned to my companion. He seemed much better, and smiled +kindly on me as I set before him a cup of coffee and a tray with +several eggs and some bread on it. + +"Now then, Bill," said I, cheerfully, sitting down beside him on +the deck, "let's fall to. I'm very hungry myself, I can tell you; +but - I forgot - your wound," I added, rising; "let me look at it." + +I found that the wound was caused by a pistol shot in the chest. +It did not bleed much, and, as it was on the right side, I was in +hopes that it might not be very serious. But Bill shook his head. +"However," said he, "sit down, Ralph, and I'll tell you all about +it." + +"You see, after we left the boat an' began to push through the +bushes, we went straight for the line of my musket, as I had +expected; but by some unlucky chance it didn't explode, for I saw +the line torn away by the men's legs, and heard the click o' the +lock; so I fancy the priming had got damp and didn't catch. I was +in a great quandary now what to do, for I couldn't concoct in my +mind, in the hurry, any good reason for firin' off my piece. But +they say necessity's the mother of invention; so, just as I was +givin' it up and clinchin' my teeth to bide the worst o't, and take +what should come, a sudden thought came into my head. I stepped +out before the rest, seemin' to be awful anxious to be at the +savages, tripped my foot on a fallen tree, plunged head foremost +into a bush, an', ov coorse, my carbine exploded! Then came such a +screechin' from the camp as I never heard in all my life. I rose +at once, and was rushin' on with the rest when the captain called a +halt. + +"'You did that a-purpose, you villain!' he said, with a tremendous +oath, and, drawin' a pistol from his belt, let fly right into my +breast. I fell at once, and remembered no more till I was startled +and brought round by the most awful yell I ever heard in my life, +except, maybe, the shrieks o' them poor critters that were crushed +to death under yon big canoe. Jumpin' up, I looked round, and, +through the trees, saw a fire gleamin' not far off, the light o' +which showed me the captain and men tied hand and foot, each to a +post, and the savages dancin' round them like demons. I had scarce +looked for a second, when I saw one o' them go up to the captain +flourishing a knife, and, before I could wink, he plunged it into +his breast, while another yell, like the one that roused me, rang +upon my ear. I didn't wait for more, but, bounding up, went +crashing through the bushes into the woods. The black fellows +caught sight of me, however, but not in time to prevent me jumpin' +into the boat, as you know." + +Bill seemed to be much exhausted after this recital, and shuddered +frequently during the narrative, so I refrained from continuing the +subject at that time, and endeavoured to draw his mind to other +things. + +"But now, Bill," said I, "it behoves us to think about the future, +and what course of action we shall pursue. Here we are, on the +wide Pacific, in a well-appointed schooner, which is our own, - at +least no one has a better claim to it than we have, - and the world +lies before us. Moreover, here comes a breeze, so we must make up +our minds which way to steer." + +"Ralph, boy," said my companion, "it matters not to me which way we +go. I fear that my time is short now. Go where you will. I'm +content." + +"Well then, Bill, I think we had better steer to the Coral Island, +and see what has become of my dear old comrades, Jack and Peterkin. +I believe the island has no name, but the captain once pointed it +out to me on the chart, and I marked it afterwards; so, as we know +pretty well our position just now, I think I can steer to it. +Then, as to working the vessel, it is true I cannot hoist the sails +single-handed, but luckily we have enough of sail set already, and +if it should come on to blow a squall, I could at least drop the +peaks of the main and fore sails, and clew them up partially +without help, and throw her head close into the wind, so as to keep +her all shaking till the violence of the squall is past. And if we +have continued light breezes, I'll rig up a complication of blocks +and fix them to the top-sail halyards, so that I shall be able to +hoist the sails without help. 'Tis true I'll require half a day to +hoist them, but we don't need to mind that. Then I'll make a sort +of erection on deck to screen you from the sun, Bill; and if you +can only manage to sit beside the tiller and steer for two hours +every day, so as to let me get a nap, I'll engage to let you off +duty all the rest of the twenty-four hours. And if you don't feel +able for steering, I'll lash the helm and heave to, while I get you +your breakfasts and dinners; and so we'll manage famously, and soon +reach the Coral Island." + +Bill smiled faintly as I ran on in this strain. + +"And what will you do," said he, "if it comes on to blow a storm?" + +This question silenced me, while I considered what I should do in +such a case. At length I laid my hand an his arm, and said, "Bill, +when a man has done all that he CAN do, he ought to leave the rest +to God." + +"Oh, Ralph," said my companion, in a faint voice, looking anxiously +into my face, "I wish that I had the feelin's about God that you +seem to have, at this hour. I'm dyin', Ralph; yet I, who have +braved death a hundred times, am afraid to die. I'm afraid to +enter the next world. Something within tells me there will be a +reckoning when I go there. But it's all over with me, Ralph. I +feel that there's no chance o' my bein' saved." + +"Don't say that, Bill," said I, in deep compassion, "don't say +that. I'm quite sure there's hope even for you, but I can't +remember the words of the Bible that make me think so. Is there +not a Bible on board, Bill?" + +"No; the last that was in the ship belonged to a poor boy that was +taken aboard against his will. He died, poor lad, I think, through +ill treatment and fear. After he was gone the captain found his +Bible and flung it overboard." + +I now reflected, with great sadness and self-reproach, on the way +in which I had neglected my Bible; and it flashed across me that I +was actually in the sight of God a greater sinner than this blood- +stained pirate; for, thought I, he tells me that he never read the +Bible, and was never brought up to care for it; whereas I was +carefully taught to read it by my own mother, and had read it daily +as long as I possessed one, yet to so little purpose that I could +not now call to mind a single text that would meet this poor man's +case, and afford him the consolation he so much required. I was +much distressed, and taxed my memory for a long time. At last a +text did flash into my mind, and I wondered much that I had not +thought of it before. + +"Bill," said I, in a low voice, "'Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ +and thou shalt be saved.'" + +"Ay, Ralph, I've heard the missionaries say that before now, but +what good can it do me? It's not for me that. It's not for the +likes o' me." + +I knew not now what to say, for, although I felt sure that that +word was for him as well as for me, I could not remember any other +word whereby I could prove it. + +After a short pause, Bill raised his eyes to mine and said, "Ralph, +I've led a terrible life. I've been a sailor since I was a boy, +and I've gone from bad to worse ever since I left my father's roof. +I've been a pirate three years now. It is true I did not choose +the trade, but I was inveigled aboard this schooner and kept here +by force till I became reckless and at last joined them. Since +that time my hand has been steeped in human blood again and again. +Your young heart would grow cold if I - ; but why should I go on? +'Tis of no use, Ralph; my doom is fixed." + +"Bill," said I, "'Though your sins be red like crimson, they shall +be white as snow.' 'Only believe.'" + +"Only believe!" cried Bill, starting up on his elbow; "I've heard +men talk o' believing as if it was easy. Ha! 'tis easy enough for +a man to point to a rope and say, 'I believe that would bear my +weight;' but 'tis another thing for a man to catch hold o' that +rope, and swing himself by it over the edge of a precipice!" + +The energy with which he said this, and the action with which it +was accompanied, were too much for Bill. He sank back with a deep +groan. As if the very elements sympathized with this man's +sufferings, a low moan came sweeping over the sea. + +"Hist! Ralph," said Bill, opening his eves; "there's a squall +coming, lad. Look alive, boy. Clew up the fore-sail. Drop the +main-sail peak. Them squalls come quick sometimes." + +I had already started to my feet, and saw that a heavy squall was +indeed bearing down on us. It had hitherto escaped my notice, +owing to my being so much engrossed by our conversation. I +instantly did as Bill desired, for the schooner was still lying +motionless on the glassy sea. I observed with some satisfaction +that the squall was bearing down on the larboard bow, so that it +would strike the vessel in the position in which she would be best +able to stand the shock. Having done my best to shorten sail, I +returned aft, and took my stand at the helm. + +"Now, boy," said Bill, in a faint voice, "keep her close to the +wind." + +A few seconds afterwards he said, "Ralph, let me hear those two +texts again." + +I repeated them. + +"Are ye sure, lad, ye saw them in the Bible?" + +"Quite sure," I replied. + +Almost before the words had left my lips the wind burst upon us, +and the spray dashed over our decks. For a time the schooner stood +it bravely, and sprang forward against the rising sea like a war- +horse. Meanwhile clouds darkened the sky, and the sea began to +rise in huge billows. There was still too much sail on the +schooner, and, as the gale increased, I feared that the masts would +be torn out of her or carried away, while the wind whistled and +shrieked through the strained rigging. Suddenly the wind shifted a +point, a heavy sea struck us on the bow, and the schooner was +almost laid on her beam-ends, so that I could scarcely keep my +legs. At the same moment Bill lost his hold of the belaying-pin +which had served to steady him, and he slid with stunning violence +against the sky-light. As he lay on the deck close beside me, I +could see that the shock had rendered him insensible, but I did not +dare to quit the tiller for an instant, as it required all my +faculties, bodily and mental, to manage the schooner. For an hour +the blast drove us along, while, owing to the sharpness of the +vessel's bow and the press of canvass, she dashed through the waves +instead of breasting over them, thereby drenching the decks with +water fore and aft. At the end of that time the squall passed +away, and left us rocking on the bosom of the agitated sea. + +My first care, the instant I could quit the helm, was to raise Bill +from the deck and place him on the couch. I then ran below for the +brandy bottle and rubbed his face and hands with it, and +endeavoured to pour a little down his throat. But my efforts, +although I continued them long and assiduously, were of no avail; +as I let go the hand which I had been chafing it fell heavily on +the deck. I laid my hand over his heart, and sat for some time +quite motionless, but there was no flutter there - the pirate was +dead! + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + + + +Alone on the deep - Necessity the mother of invention - A valuable +book discovered - Natural phenomenon - A bright day in my history. + + +IT was with feelings of awe, not unmingled with fear, that I now +seated myself on the cabin sky-light and gazed upon the rigid +features of my late comrade, while my mind wandered over his past +history and contemplated with anxiety my present position. Alone! +in the midst of the wide Pacific, having a most imperfect knowledge +of navigation, and in a schooner requiring at least eight men as +her proper crew. But I will not tax the reader's patience with a +minute detail of my feelings and doings during the first few days +that followed the death of my companion. I will merely mention +that I tied a cannon ball to his feet and, with feelings of the +deepest sorrow, consigned him to the deep. + +For fully a week after that a steady breeze blew from the east, +and, as my course lay west-and-by-north, I made rapid progress +towards my destination. I could not take an observation, which I +very much regretted, as the captain's quadrant was in the cabin; +but, from the day of setting sail from the island of the savages, I +had kept a dead reckoning, and as I knew pretty well now how much +lee-way the schooner made, I hoped to hit the Coral Island without +much difficulty. In this I was the more confident that I knew its +position on the chart (which I understood was a very good one), and +so had its correct bearings by compass. + +As the weather seemed now quite settled and fine, and as I had got +into the trade-winds, I set about preparations for hoisting the +top-sails. This was a most arduous task, and my first attempts +were complete failures, owing, in a great degree, to my +reprehensible ignorance of mechanical forces. The first error I +made was in applying my apparatus of blocks and pulleys to a rope +which was too weak, so that the very first heave I made broke it in +two, and sent me staggering against the after-hatch, over which I +tripped, and, striking against the main-boom, tumbled down the +companion ladder into the cabin. I was much bruised and somewhat +stunned by this untoward accident. However, I considered it +fortunate that I was not killed. In my next attempt I made sure of +not coming by a similar accident, so I unreeved the tackling and +fitted up larger blocks and ropes. But although the principle on +which I acted was quite correct, the machinery was now so massive +and heavy that the mere friction and stiffness of the thick cordage +prevented me from moving it at all. Afterwards, however, I came to +proportion things more correctly; but I could not avoid reflecting +at the time how much better it would have been had I learned all +this from observation and study, instead of waiting till I was +forced to acquire it through the painful and tedious lessons of +experience. + +After the tackling was prepared and in good working order, it took +me the greater part of a day to hoist the main-top sail. As I +could not steer and work at this at the same time, I lashed the +helm in such a position that, with a little watching now and then, +it kept the schooner in her proper course. By this means I was +enabled also to go about the deck and down below for things that I +wanted, as occasion required; also to cook and eat my victuals. +But I did not dare to trust to this plan during the three hours of +rest that I allowed myself at night, as the wind might have +shifted, in which case I should have been blown far out of my +course ere I awoke. I was, therefore, in the habit of heaving-to +during those three hours; that is, fixing the rudder and the sails +in such a position as that by acting against each other, they would +keep the ship stationary. After my night's rest, therefore, I had +only to make allowance for the lee-way she had made, and so resume +my course. + +Of course I was to some extent anxious lest another squall should +come, but I made the best provision I could in the circumstances, +and concluded that by letting go the weather-braces of the top- +sails and the top-sail halyards at the same time, I should thereby +render these sails almost powerless. Besides this, I proposed to +myself to keep a sharp look-out on the barometer in the cabin, and +if I observed at any time a sudden fall in it, I resolved that I +would instantly set about my multiform appliances for reducing +sail, so as to avoid being taken at unawares. Thus I sailed +prosperously for two weeks, with a fair wind, so that I calculated +I must be drawing near to the Coral Island; at the thought of which +my heart bounded with joyful expectation. + +The only book I found on board, after a careful search, was a +volume of Captain Cook's voyages. This, I suppose, the pirate +captain had brought with him in order to guide him, and to furnish +him with information regarding the islands of these seas. I found +this a most delightful book indeed, and I not only obtained much +interesting knowledge about the sea in which I was sailing, but I +had many of my own opinions, derived from experience, corroborated; +and not a few of them corrected. Besides the reading of this +charming book, and the daily routine of occupations, nothing of +particular note happened to me during this voyage, except once, +when on rising one night, after my three hours' nap, while it was +yet dark, I was amazed and a little alarmed to find myself floating +in what appeared to be a sea of blue fire! I had often noticed the +beautiful appearance of phosphorescent light, but this far exceeded +anything of the sort I ever saw before. The whole sea appeared +somewhat like milk and was remarkably luminous. + +I rose in haste, and, letting down a bucket into the sea, brought +some of the water on board and took it down to the cabin to examine +it; but no sooner did I approach the light than the strange +appearance disappeared, and when I removed the cabin lamp the +luminous light appeared again. I was much puzzled with this, and +took up a little of the water in the hollow of my hand and then let +it run off, when I found that the luminous substance was left +behind on my palm. I ran with it to the lamp; but when I got there +it was gone. I found, however, that when I went into the dark my +hand shone again; so I took the large glass of the ship's telescope +and examined my hand minutely, when I found that there were on it +one or two small patches of a clear, transparent substance like +jelly, which were so thin as to be almost invisible to the naked +eye. Thus I came to know that the beautiful phosphoric light, +which I had so often admired before, was caused by animals, for I +had no doubt that these were of the same kind as the medusae or +jelly-fish which are seen in all parts of the world. + +On the evening of my fourteenth day, I was awakened out of a nap +into which I had fallen by a loud cry, and starting up, I gazed +around me. I was surprised and delighted to see a large albatross +soaring majestically over the ship. I immediately took it into my +head that this was the albatross I had seen at Penguin Island. I +had, of course, no good reason for supposing this, but the idea +occurred to me, I know not why, and I cherished it, and regarded +the bird with as much affection as if he had been an old friend. +He kept me company all that day and left me as night fell. + +Next morning as I stood motionless and with heavy eyes at the helm, +for I had not slept well, I began to weary anxiously for day-light, +and peered towards the horizon, where I thought I observed +something like a black cloud against the dark sky. Being always on +the alert for squalls, I ran to the bow. There could be no doubt +it was a squall, and as I listened I thought I heard the murmur of +the coming gale. Instantly I began to work might and main at my +cumbrous tackle for shortening sail, and in the course of an hour +and a half had the most of it reduced, - the top-sail yards down on +the caps, the top-sails clewed up, the sheets hauled in, the main +and fore peaks lowered, and the flying-jib down. While thus +engaged the dawn advanced, and I cast an occasional furtive glance +ahead in the midst of my labour. But now that things were prepared +for the worst, I ran forward again and looked anxiously over the +bow. I now heard the roar of the waves distinctly, and as a single +ray of the rising sun gleamed over the ocean I saw - what! could it +be that I was dreaming? - that magnificent breaker with its +ceaseless roar! - that mountain top! - yes, once more I beheld the +Coral Island! + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + + + +The effect of a cannon-shot - A happy reunion of a somewhat moist +nature - Retrospects and explanations - An awful dive - New plans - +The last of the Coral Island. + + +I ALMOST fell upon the deck with the tumult of mingled emotions +that filled my heart, as I gazed ardently towards my beautiful +island. It was still many miles away, but sufficiently near to +enable me to trace distinctly the well-remembered outlines of the +two mountains. My first impulse was to utter an exclamation of +gratitude for being carried to my former happy home in safety; my +second, to jump up, clap my hands, shout, and run up and down the +deck, with no other object in view than that of giving vent to my +excited feelings. Then I went below for the telescope, and spent +nearly ten minutes of the utmost impatience in vainly trying to get +a focus, and in rubbing the skin nearly off my eyes, before I +discovered that having taken off the large glass to examine the +phosphoric water with I had omitted to put it on again. + +After that I looked up impatiently at the sails, which I now +regretted having lowered so hastily, and for a moment thought of +hoisting the main-top sail again; but recollecting that it would +take me full half a day to accomplish, and that, at the present +rate of sailing, two hours would bring me to the island, I +immediately dismissed the idea. + +The remainder of the time I spent in making feverish preparations +for arriving and seeing my dear comrades. I remembered that they +were not in the habit of rising before six, and, as it was now only +three, I hoped to arrive before they were awake. Moreover, I set +about making ready to let go the anchor, resolving in my own mind +that, as I knew the depth of water in the passage of the reef and +within the lagoon, I would run the schooner in and bring up +opposite the bower. Fortunately the anchor was hanging at the cat- +head, otherwise I should never have been able to use it. Now, I +had only to cut the tackling, and it would drop of its own weight. +After searching among the flags, I found the terrible black one, +which I ran up to the peak. While I was doing this, a thought +struck me. I went to the powder magazine, brought up a blank +cartridge and loaded the big brass gun, which, it will be +remembered, was unhoused when we set sail, and, as I had no means +of housing it, there it had stood, bristling alike at fair weather +and foul all the voyage. I took care to grease its mouth well, +and, before leaving the fore part of the ship, thrust the poker +into the fire. + +All was now ready. A steady five-knot breeze was blowing, so that +I was now not more than quarter of a mile from the reef. I was +soon at the entrance, and, as the schooner glided quietly through, +I glanced affectionately at the huge breaker, as if it had been the +same one I had seen there when I bade adieu, as I feared for ever, +to the island. On coming opposite the Water Garden, I put the helm +hard down. The schooner came round with a rapid, graceful bend, +and lost way just opposite the bower. Running forward, I let go +the anchor, caught up the red-hot poker, applied it to the brass +gun, and the mountains with a BANG, such as had only once before +broke their slumbering echoes! + +Effective although it was, however, it was scarcely equal to the +bang with which, instantly after, Peterkin bounded from the bower, +in scanty costume, his eye-balls starting from his head with +surprise and terror. One gaze he gave, one yell, and then fled +into the bushes like a wild cat. The next moment Jack went through +exactly the same performance, the only difference being, that his +movements were less like those of Jack-in-the-box, though not less +vigorous and rapid than those of Peterkin. + +"Hallo!" I shouted, almost mad with joy, "what, ho! Peterkin! +Jack! hallo! it's me!" + +My shout was just in time to arrest them. They halted and turned +round, and, the instant I repeated the cry, I saw that they +recognised my voice, by both of them running at full speed towards +the beach. I could no longer contain myself. Throwing off my +jacket, I jumped overboard at the same moment that Jack bounded +into the sea. In another moment we met in deep water, clasped each +other round the neck, and sank, as a matter of course, to the +bottom! We were well-nigh choked, and instantly struggled to the +surface, where Peterkin was spluttering about like a wounded duck, +laughing and crying by turns, and choking himself with salt water! + +It would be impossible to convey to my reader, by description, an +adequate conception of the scene that followed my landing on the +beach, as we stood embracing each other indiscriminately in our +dripping garments, and giving utterance to incoherent rhapsodies, +mingled with wild shouts. It can be more easily imagined than +described, so I will draw a curtain over this part of my history, +and carry the reader forward over an interval of three days. + +During the greater part of that period Peterkin did nothing but +roast pigs, taro, and bread-fruit, and ply me with plantains, +plums, potatoes, and cocoa-nuts, while I related to him and Jack +the terrible and wonderful adventures I had gone through since we +last met. After I had finished the account, they made me go all +over it again; and, when I had concluded the second recital, I had +to go over it again, while they commented upon it piecemeal. They +were much affected by what I told them of the probable fate of +Avatea, and Peterkin could by no means brook the idea of the poor +girl being converted into a LONG PIG! As for Jack, he clenched his +teeth, and shook his fist towards the sea, saying at the same time, +that he was sorry he had not broken Tararo's head, and he only +hoped that one day he should be able to plant his knuckles on the +bridge of that chief's nose! After they had "pumped me dry," as +Peterkin said, I begged to be informed of what had happened to them +during my long absence, and particularly as to how they got out of +the Diamond Cave. + +"Well, you must know," began Jack, "after you had dived out of the +cave, on the day you were taken away from us, we waited very +patiently for half an hour, not expecting you to return before the +end of that time. Then we began to upbraid you for staying so +long, when you knew we would be anxious; but when an hour passed, +we became alarmed, and I resolved at all hazards to dive out, and +see what had become of you, although I felt for poor Peterkin, +because, as he truly said, 'If you never come back, I'm shut up +here for life.' However, I promised not to run any risk, and he +let me go; which, to say truth, I thought very courageous of him!" + +"I should just think it was!" interrupted Peterkin, looking at Jack +over the edge of a monstrous potato which he happened to be +devouring at the time. + +"Well," continued Jack, "you may guess my consternation when you +did not answer to my halloo. At first I imagined that the pirates +must have killed you, and left you in the bush, or thrown you into +the sea; then it occurred to me that this would have served no end +of theirs, so I came to the conclusion that they must have carried +you away with them. As this thought struck me, I observed the +pirate schooner standing away to the nor'ard, almost hull-down on +the horizon, and I sat down on the rocks to watch her as she slowly +sank from my sight. And I tell you, Ralph, my boy, that I shed +more tears that time, at losing you, than I have done, I verify +believe, all my life before - " + +"Pardon me, Jack, for interrupting," said Peterkin; "surely you +must be mistaken in that; you've often told me that, when you were +a baby, you used to howl and roar from morning to - " + +"Hold your tongue, Peterkin," cried Jack. "Well, after the +schooner had disappeared, I dived back into the cave, much to +Peterkin's relief, and told him what I had seen. We sat down and +had a long talk over this matter, and then we agreed to make a +regular, systematic search through the woods, so as to make sure, +at least, that you had not been killed. But now we thought of the +difficulty of getting out of the cave without your help. Peterkin +became dreadfully nervous when he thought of this; and I must +confess that I felt some alarm, for, of course, I could not hope +alone to take him out so quickly as we two together had brought him +in; and he himself vowed that, if we had been a moment longer with +him that time, he would have had to take a breath of salt water. +However, there was no help for it, and I endeavoured to calm his +fears as well as I could: 'for,' said I, 'you can't live here, +Peterkin;' to which he replied, 'Of course not, Jack, I can only +die here, and, as that's not at all desirable, you had better +propose something.' So I suggested that he should take a good long +breath, and trust himself to me. + +"'Might we not make a large bag of cocoa-nut cloth, into which I +could shove my head, and tie it tight round my neck?' he asked, +with a haggard smile. 'It might let me get one breath under +water!' + +"'No use,' said I; 'it would fill in a moment and suffocate you. I +see nothing for it, Peterkin, if you really can't keep your breath +so long, but to let me knock you down, and carry you out while in a +state of insensibility.' + +"But Peterkin didn't relish this idea. He seemed to fear that I +could not be able to measure the exact force of the blow, and +might, on the one hand, hit him so softly as to render a second or +third blow necessary, which would be very uncomfortable; or, on the +other hand, give him such a smash as would entirely spoil his +figure-head, or, mayhap, knock the life out of him altogether! At +last I got him persuaded to try to hold his breath, and commit +himself to me; so he agreed, and down we went. But I had not got +him half way through, when he began to struggle and kick like a +wild bull, burst from my grasp, and hit against the roof of the +tunnel. I was therefore, obliged to force him violently back into +the cave gain, where he rose panting to the surface. In short, he +had lost his presence of mind, and - " + +"Nothing of the sort," cried Peterkin, indignantly, "I had only +lost my wind; and if I had not had presence of mind enough to kick +as I did, I should have bu'st in your arms!" + +"Well, well, so be it," resumed Jack, with a smile, "but the upshot +of it was, that we had to hold another consultation on the point, +and I really believe that, had it not been for a happy thought of +mine, we should have been consulting there yet." + +"I wish we had," again interrupted Peterkin with a sigh. "I'm +sure, Ralph, if I had thought that you were coming back again, I +would willingly have awaited your return for months, rather than +have endured the mental agony which I went through! But proceed." + +"The thought was this," continued Jack, "that I should tie +Peterkin's hands and feet with cords, and then lash him firmly to a +stout pole about five feet long, in order to render him quite +powerless, and keep him straight and stiff. You should have seen +his face of horror, Ralph, when I suggested this: but he came to +see that it was his only chance, and told me to set about it as +fast as I could; 'for,' said he, 'this is no jokin', Jack, I can +tell you, and the sooner it's done the better.' I soon procured +the cordage and a suitable pole, with which I returned to the cave, +and lashed him as stiff and straight as an Egyptian mummy; and, to +say truth, he was no bad representation of what an English mummy +would be, if there were such things, for he was as white as a dead +man." + +"'Now,' said Peterkin, in a tremulous voice, 'swim with me as near +to the edge of the hole as you can before you dive, then let me +take a long breath, and, as I sha'nt be able to speak after I've +taken it, you'll watch my face, and the moment you see me wink - +dive! And oh!' he added, earnestly, 'pray don't be long!' + +"I promised to pay the strictest attention to his wishes, and swam +with him to the outlet of the cave. Here I paused. 'Now then,' +said I, 'pull away at the wind, lad.'" + +Peterkin drew in a breath so long that I could not help thinking of +the frog in the fable, that wanted to swell itself as big as the +ox. Then I looked into his face earnestly. Slap went the lid of +his right eye; down went my head, and up went my heels. We shot +through the passage like an arrow, and rose to the surface of the +open sea before you could count twenty! + +"Peterkin had taken in such an awful load of wind that, on reaching +the free air, he let it out with a yell loud enough to have been +heard a mile off, and then, the change in his feelings was so +sudden and great, that he did not wait till we landed, but began, +tied up as he was, to shout and sing for joy as I supported him +with my left arm to the shore. However, in the middle of a laugh +that a hyaena might have envied, I let him accidentally slip, which +extinguished him in a moment. + +"After this happy deliverance, we immediately began our search for +your dead body, Ralph, and you have no idea how low our hearts sank +as we set off, day after day, to examine the valleys and mountain +sides with the utmost care. In about three weeks we completed the +survey of the whole island, and had at least the satisfaction of +knowing that you had not been killed. But it occurred to us that +you might have been thrown into the sea, so we examined the sands +and the lagoon carefully, and afterwards went all round the outer +reef. One day, while we were upon the reef, Peterkin espied a +small dark object lying among the rocks, which seemed to be quite +different from the surrounding stones. We hastened towards the +spot, and found it to be a small keg. On knocking out the head we +discovered that it was gunpowder." + +"It was I who sent you that, Jack," said I, with a smile. + +"Fork out!" cried Peterkin, energetically, starting to his feet and +extending his open hand to Jack. "Down with the money, sir, else +I'll have you shut up for life in a debtor's prison the moment we +return to England!" + +"I'll give you an I.O.U. in the meantime," returned Jack, laughing, +"so sit down and be quiet. The fact is, Ralph, when we discovered +this keg of powder, Peterkin immediately took me a bet of a +thousand pounds that you had something to do with it, and I took +him a bet of ten thousand that you had not. + +"Peterkin was right then," said I, explaining how the thing had +occurred. + +"Well, we found it very useful," continued Jack; "although some of +it had got a little damp; and we furbished up the old pistol, with +which Peterkin is a crack shot now. But, to continue. We did not +find any other vestige of you on the reef, and, finally, gave up +all hope of ever seeing you again. After this the island became a +dreary place to us, and we began to long for a ship to heave in +sight and take us off. But now that you're back again, my dear +fellow, it looks as bright and cheerful as it used to do, and I +love it as much as ever." + +"And now," continued Jack, "I have a great desire to visit some of +the other islands of the South Seas. Here we have a first-rate +schooner at our disposal, so I don't see what should hinder us." + +"Just the very thing I was going to propose," cried Peterkin; "I +vote for starting at once." + +"Well, then," said Jack, "it seems to me that we could not do +better than shape our course for the island on which Avatea lives, +and endeavour to persuade Tararo to let her marry the black fellow +to whom she is engaged, instead of making a long pig of her. If he +has a spark of gratitude in him he'll do it. Besides, having +become champions for this girl once before, it behoves us, as true +knights, not to rest until we set her free; at least, all the +heroes in all the story-books I have ever read would count it foul +disgrace to leave such a work unfinished." + +"I'm sure I don't know, or care, what your knights in story-books +would do," said Peterkin, "but I'm certain that it would be capital +fun, so I'm your man whenever you want me." + +This plan of Jack's was quite in accordance with his romantic, +impulsive nature; and, having made up his mind to save this black +girl, he could not rest until the thing was commenced. + +"But there may be great danger in this attempt," he said, at the +end of a long consultation on the subject; "will you, lads, go with +me in spite of this?" + +"Go with you?" we repeated in the same breath. + +"Can you doubt it?" said I. + +"For a moment," added Peterkin. + +I need scarcely say that, having made up our minds to go on this +enterprise, we lost no time in making preparations to quit the +island; and as the schooner was well laden with stores of every +kind for a long cruise, we had little to do except to add to our +abundant supply a quantity of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruit, taro, yams, +plums, and potatoes, chiefly with the view of carrying the +fragrance of our dear island along with us as long as we could. + +When all was ready, we paid a farewell visit to the different +familiar spots where most of our time had been spent. We ascended +the mountain top, and gazed for the last time at the rich green +foliage in the valleys, the white sandy beach, the placid lagoon, +and the barrier coral-reef with its crested breakers. Then we +descended to Spouting Cliff, and looked down at the pale-green +monster which we had made such fruitless efforts to spear in days +gone by. From this we hurried to the Water Garden and took a last +dive into its clear waters, and a last gambol amongst its coral +groves. I hurried out before my companions, and dressed in haste, +in order to have a long examination of my tank, which Peterkin, in +the fulness of his heart, had tended with the utmost care, as being +a vivid remembrancer of me, rather than out of love for natural +history. It was in superb condition; - the water as clear and +pellucid as crystal; the red and green sea-weed of the most +brilliant hues; the red, purple, yellow, green, and striped +anemones fully expanded, and stretching out their arms as if to +welcome and embrace their former master; the starfish, zoophytes, +sea-pens, and other innumerable marine insects, looking fresh and +beautiful; and the crabs, as Peterkin said, looking as wide awake, +impertinent, rampant, and pugnacious as ever. It was indeed so +lovely and so interesting that I would scarcely allow myself to be +torn away from it. + +Last of all, we returned to the bower and collected the few +articles we possessed, such as the axe, the pencil-case, the broken +telescope, the pen-knife, the hook made from the brass ring, and +the sail-needle, with which we had landed on the island; - also, +the long boots and the pistol, besides several curious articles of +costume which we had manufactured from time to time. + +These we conveyed on board in our little boat, after having carved +our names on a chip of iron-wood, thus:- + + +JACK MARTIN, +RALPH ROVER, +PETERKIN GAY, + + +which we fixed up inside of the bower. The boat was then hoisted +on board and the anchor weighed; which latter operation cost us +great labour and much time, as the anchor was so heavy that we +could not move it without the aid of my complex machinery of blocks +and pulleys. A steady breeze was blowing off shore when we set +sail, at a little before sunset. It swept us quickly past the reef +and out to sea. The shore grew rapidly more indistinct as the +shades of evening fell, while our clipper bark bounded lightly over +the waves. Slowly the mountain top sank on the horizon, until it +became a mere speck. In another moment the sun and the Coral +Island sank together into the broad bosom of the Pacific. + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + + + +The voyage - The island, and a consultation in which danger is +scouted as a thing unworthy of consideration - Rats and cats - The +native teacher - Awful revelations - Wonderful effects of +Christianity. + + +OUR voyage during the next two weeks was most interesting and +prosperous. The breeze continued generally fair, and at all times +enabled us to lie our course; for being, as I have said before, +clipper-built, the pirate schooner could lie very close to the +wind, and made little lee-way. We had no difficulty now in +managing our sails, for Jack was heavy and powerful, while Peterkin +was active as a kitten. Still, however, we were a very +insufficient crew for such a vessel, and if any one had proposed to +us to make such a voyage in it before we had been forced to go +through so many hardships from necessity, we would have turned away +with pity from the individual making such proposal as from a +madman. I pondered this a good deal, and at last concluded that +men do not know how much they are capable of doing till they try, +and that we should never give way to despair in any undertaking, +however difficult it may seem:- always supposing, however, that our +cause is a good one, and that we can ask the divine blessing on it. + +Although, therefore, we could now manage our sails easily, we +nevertheless found that my pulleys were of much service to us in +some things; though Jack did laugh heartily at the uncouth +arrangement of ropes and blocks, which had, to a sailor's eye, a +very lumbering and clumsy appearance. But I will not drag my +reader through the details of this voyage. Suffice it to say, +that, after an agreeable sail of about three weeks, we arrived off +the island of Mango, which I recognised at once from the +description that the pirate, Bill, had given me of it during one of +our conversations. + +As soon as we came within sight of it we hove the ship to, and held +a council of war. + +"Now, boys," said Jack, as we seated ourselves beside him on the +cabin sky-light, "before we go farther in this business, we must go +over the pros and cons of it; for, although you have so generously +consented to stick by me through thick and thin, it would be unfair +did I not see that you thoroughly understand the danger of what we +are about to attempt." + +"Oh! bother the danger," cried Peterkin; "I wonder to hear YOU, +Jack, talk of danger. When a fellow begins to talk about it, he'll +soon come to magnify it to such a degree that he'll not be fit to +face it when it comes, no more than a suckin' baby!" + +"Nay, Peterkin," replied Jack, gravely, "I won't be jested out of +it. I grant you, that, when we've once resolved to act, and have +made up our minds what to do, we should think no more of danger. +But, before we have so resolved, it behoves us to look at it +straight in the face, and examine into it, and walk round it; for +if we flinch at a distant view, we're sure to run away when the +danger is near. Now, I understand from you, Ralph, that the island +is inhabited by thorough-going, out-and-out cannibals, whose +principal law is - 'Might is right, and the weakest goes to the +wall?'" + +"Yes," said I, "so Bill gave me to understand. He told me, +however, that, at the southern side of it, the missionaries had +obtained a footing amongst an insignificant tribe. A native +teacher had been sent there by the Wesleyans, who had succeeded in +persuading the chief at that part to embrace Christianity. But +instead of that being of any advantage to our enterprise, it seems +the very reverse; for the chief Tararo is a determined heathen, and +persecutes the Christians, - who are far too weak in numbers to +offer any resistance, - and looks with dislike upon all white men, +whom he regards as propagators of the new faith." + +"'Tis a pity," said Jack, "that the Christian tribe is so small, +for we shall scarcely be safe under their protection, I fear. If +Tararo takes it into his head to wish for our vessel, or to kill +ourselves, he could take us from them by force. You say that the +native missionary talks English?" + +"So I believe." + +"Then, what I propose is this," said Jack: "We will run round to +the south side of the island, and cut anchor off the Christian +village. We are too far away just now to have been descried by any +of the savages, so we shall get there unobserved, and have time to +arrange our plans before the heathen tribes know of our presence. +But, in doing this, we run the risk of being captured by the ill- +disposed tribes, and being very ill used, if not - a - " + +"Roasted alive and eaten," cried Peterkin. "Come, out with it, +Jack; according to your own showing, it's well to look the danger +straight in the face!" + +"Well, that is the worst of it, certainly. Are you prepared, then, +to take your chance of that?" + +"I've been prepared and had my mind made up long ago," cried +Peterkin, swaggering about the deck with his hands thrust into his +breeches' pockets. "The fact is, Jack, I don't believe that Tararo +will be so ungrateful as to eat us; and I'm, quite sure that he'll +be too happy to grant us whatever we ask: so the sooner we go in +and win the better." + +Peterkin was wrong, however, in his estimate of savage gratitude, +as the sequel will show. + +The schooner was now put before the wind, and, after making a long +run to the south'ard, we put about and beat up for the south side +of Mango, where we arrived before sunset, and hove-to off the coral +reef. Here we awaited the arrival of a canoe, which immediately +put off on our rounding to. When it arrived, a mild-looking +native, of apparently forty years of age, came on board, and, +taking off his straw hat, made us a low bow. He was clad in a +respectable suit of European clothes; and the first words he +uttered, as he stepped up to Jack and shook hands with him, were, - + +"Good day, gentlemen; we are happy to see you at Mango - you are +heartily welcome." + +After returning his salutation, Jack exclaimed, "You must be the +native missionary teacher of whom I have heard - are you not?" + +"I am. I have the joy to be a servant of the Lord Jesus at this +station." + +"You're the very man I want to see, then," replied Jack; "that's +lucky. Come down to the cabin, friend, and have a glass of wine. +I wish particularly to speak with you. My men there" (pointing to +Peterkin and me) "will look after your people." + +"Thank you," said the teacher, as he followed Jack to the cabin, "I +do not drink wine or any strong drink." + +"Oh! then, there's lots of water, and you can have biscuit." + +"Now, 'pon my word, that's cool!" said Peterkin; "his MEN, +forsooth! Well, since we are to be men, we may as well come it as +strong over these black chaps as we can. Hallo, there!" he cried +to the half dozen of natives who stood upon the deck, gazing in +wonder at all they saw, "here's for you;" and he handed them a tray +of broken biscuit and a can of water. Then, thrusting his hands +into his pockets, he walked up and down the deck with an enormous +swagger, whistling vociferously. + +In about half an hour Jack and the teacher came on deck, and the +latter, bidding us a cheerful good evening, entered his canoe and +paddled to the shore. When he was gone, Peterkin stepped up to +Jack, and, touching his cap, said, - + +"Well, captain, have you any communications to make to your MEN?" + +"Yes," cried Jack; "ready about, mind the helm and clew up your +tongue, while I con the schooner through the passage in the reef. +The teacher, who seems a first-rate fellow, says it's quite deep, +and good anchorage within the lagoon close to the shore." + +While the vessel was slowly advancing to her anchorage, under a +light breeze, Jack explained to us that Avatea was still on the +island, living amongst the heathens; that she had expressed a +strong desire to join the Christians, but Tararo would not let her, +and kept her constantly in close confinement. + +"Moreover," continued Jack, "I find that she belongs to one of the +Samoan Islands, where Christianity had been introduced long before +her capture by the heathens of a neighbouring island; and the very +day after she was taken, she was to have joined the church which +had been planted there by that excellent body, the London +Missionary Society. The teacher tells me, too, that the poor girl +has fallen in love with a Christian chief, who lives on an island +some fifty miles or so to the south of this one, and that she is +meditating a desperate attempt at escape. So, you see, we have +come in the nick of time. I fancy that this chief is the fellow +whom you heard of, Ralph, at the Island of Emo. Besides all this, +the heathen savages are at war among themselves, and there's to be +a battle fought the day after to-morrow, in which the principal +leader is Tararo; so that we'll not be able to commence our +negotiations with the rascally chief till the day after." + +The village off which we anchored was beautifully situated at the +head of a small bay, from the margin of which trees of every +description peculiar to the tropics rose in the richest luxuriance +to the summit of a hilly ridge, which was the line of demarcation +between the possessions of the Christians and those of the +neighbouring heathen chief. + +The site of the settlement was an extensive plot of flat land, +stretching in a gentle slope from the sea to the mountain. The +cottages stood several hundred yards from the beach, and were +protected from the glare of the sea by the rich foliage of rows of +large Barringtonia and other trees, which girt the shore. The +village was about a mile in length, and perfectly straight, with a +wide road down the middle, on either side of which were rows of the +tufted-topped ti tree, whose delicate and beautiful blossoms, +hanging beneath their plume-crested tops, added richness to the +scene. The cottages of the natives were built beneath these trees, +and were kept in the most excellent order, each having a little +garden in front, tastefully laid out and planted, while the walks +were covered with black and white pebbles. + +Every house had doors and Venetian windows, painted partly with +lamp black made from the candle-nut, and partly with red ochre, +which contrasted powerfully with the dazzling coral lime that +covered the walls. On a prominent position stood a handsome +church, which was quite a curiosity in its way. It was a hundred +feet long by fifty broad, and was seated throughout to accommodate +upwards of two thousand persons. It had six large folding doors +and twelve windows with Venetian blinds; and, although a large and +substantial edifice, it had been built, we were told by the +teacher, in the space of two months! There was not a single iron +nail in the fabric, and the natives had constructed it chiefly with +their stone and bone axes and other tools, having only one or two +axes or tools of European manufacture. Everything around this +beautiful spot wore an aspect of peace and plenty, and, as we +dropped our anchor within a stone's cast of the substantial coral +wharf, I could not avoid contrasting it with the wretched village +of Emo, where I had witnessed so many frightful scenes. When the +teacher afterwards told me that the people of this tribe had become +converts only a year previous to our arrival, and that they had +been living before that in the practice of the most bloody system +of idolatry, I could not refrain from exclaiming, "What a +convincing proof that Christianity is of God!" + +On landing from our little boat, we were received with a warm +welcome by the teacher and his wife; the latter being also a +native, clothed in a simple European gown and straw bonnet. The +shore was lined with hundreds of natives, whose persons were all +more or less clothed with native cloth. Some of the men had on a +kind of poncho formed of this cloth, their legs being uncovered. +Others wore clumsily-fashioned trousers, and no upper garment +except hats made of straw and cloth. Many of the dresses, both of +women and men, were grotesque enough, being very bad imitations of +the European garb; but all wore a dress of some sort or other. +They seemed very glad to see us, and crowded round us as the +teacher led the way to his dwelling, where we were entertained, in +the most sumptuous manner, on baked pig and all the varieties of +fruits and vegetables that the island produced. We were much +annoyed, however, by the rats: they seemed to run about the house +like domestic animals. As we sat at table, one of them peeped up +at us over the edge of the cloth, close to Peterkin's elbow, who +floored it with a blow on the snout from his knife, exclaiming as +he did so - + +"I say, Mister Teacher, why don't you set traps for these brutes? - +surely you are not fond of them!" + +"No," replied the teacher, with a smile; "we would be glad to get +rid of them if we could; but if we were to trap all the rats on the +island, it would occupy our whole time." + +"Are they, then, so numerous?" inquired Jack. + +"They swarm everywhere. The poor heathens on the north side eat +them, and think them very sweet. So did my people formerly; but +they do not eat so many now, because the missionary who was last +here expressed disgust at it. The poor people asked if it was +wrong to eat rats; and he told them that it was certainly not +wrong, but that the people of England would be much disgusted were +they asked to eat rats." + +We had not been an hour in the house of this kind-hearted man when +we were convinced of the truth of his statement as to their +numbers, for the rats ran about the floors in dozens, and, during +our meal, two men were stationed at the table to keep them off! + +"What a pity you have no cats," said Peterkin, as he aimed a blow +at another reckless intruder, and missed it. + +"We would, indeed, be glad to have a few," rejoined the teacher, +"but they are difficult to be got. The hogs, we find, are very +good rat-killers, but they do not seem to be able to keep the +numbers down. I have heard that they are better than cats." + +As the teacher said this, his good-natured black face was wrinkled +with a smile of merriment. Observing that I had noticed it, he +said:- + +"I smiled just now when I remembered the fate of the first cat that +was taken to Raratonga. This is one of the stations of the London +Missionary Society. It, like our own, is infested with rats, and a +cat was brought at last to the island. It was a large black one. +On being turned loose, instead of being content to stay among men, +the cat took to the mountains, and lived in a wild state, sometimes +paying visits during the night to the houses of the natives; some +of whom, living at a distance from the settlement, had not heard of +the cat's arrival, and were dreadfully frightened in consequence, +calling it a 'monster of the deep,' and flying in terror away from +it. One night the cat, feeling a desire for company, I suppose, +took its way to the house of a chief, who had recently been +converted to Christianity, and had begun to learn to read and pray. +The chief's wife, who was sitting awake at his side while he slept, +beheld with horror two fires glistening in the doorway, and heard +with surprise a mysterious voice. Almost petrified with fear, she +awoke her husband, and began to upbraid him for forsaking his old +religion, and burning his god, who, she declared, was now come to +be avenged of them. 'Get up and pray! get up and pray!' she cried. +The chief arose, and, on opening his eyes, beheld the same glaring +lights, and heard the same ominous sound. Impelled by the extreme +urgency of the case, he commenced, with all possible vehemence, to +vociferate the alphabet, as a prayer to God to deliver them from +the vengeance of Satan! On hearing this, the cat, as much alarmed +as themselves, fled precipitately away, leaving the chief and his +wife congratulating themselves on the efficacy of their prayer." + +We were much diverted with this anecdote, which the teacher related +in English so good, that we certainly could not have supposed him a +native but for the colour of his face and the foreign accent in his +tone. Next day we walked out with this interesting man, and were +much entertained and instructed by his conversation, as we rambled +through the cool shady groves of bananas, citrons, limes, and other +trees, or sauntered among the cottages of the natives, and watched +them while they laboured diligently in the taro beds, or +manufactured the tapa or native cloth. To some of these Jack put +questions through the medium of the missionary; and the replies +were such as to surprise us at the extent of their knowledge. +Indeed, Peterkin very truly remarked that "they seemed to know a +considerable deal more than Jack himself!" + +Among other pieces of interesting information that we obtained was +the following, in regard to coral formations:- + +"The islands of the Pacific," said our friend, "are of three +different kinds or classes. Those of the first class are volcanic, +mountainous, and wild; some shooting their jagged peaks into the +clouds at an elevation of ten and fifteen thousand feet. Those of +the second class are of crystalized limestone, and vary in height +from one hundred to five hundred feet. The hills on these are not +so wild or broken as those of the first class, but are richly +clothed with vegetation, and very beautiful. I have no doubt that +the Coral Island on which you were wrecked was one of this class. +They are supposed to have been upheaved from the bottom of the sea +by volcanic agency, but they are not themselves volcanic in their +nature, neither are they of coral formation. Those of the third +class are the low coralline islands usually having lagoons of water +in their midst; they are very numerous. + +"As to the manner in which coral islands and reefs are formed; +there are various opinions on this point. I will give you what +seems to me the most probable theory, - a theory, I may add, which +is held by some of the good and scientific missionaries. It is +well known that there is much lime in salt water; it is also known +that coral is composed of lime. It is supposed that the polypes, +or coral insects, have the power of attracting this lime to their +bodies; and with this material they build their little cells or +habitations. They choose the summit of a volcano, or the top of a +submarine mountain, as a foundation on which to build; for it is +found that they never work at any great depth below the surface. +On this they work; the polypes on the mountain top, of course, +reach the surface first, then those at the outer edges reach the +top sooner than the others between them and the centre, thus +forming the coral reef surrounding the lagoon of water and the +central island; after that the insects within the lagoon cease +working. When the surface of the water is reached, these myriads +of wonderful creatures die. Then birds visit the spot, and seeds +are thus conveyed thither, which take root, and spring up, and +flourish. Thus are commenced those coralline islets of which you +have seen so many in these seas. The reefs round the large islands +are formed in a similar manner. When we consider," added the +missionary, "the smallness of the architects used by our heavenly +Father in order to form those lovely and innumerable islands, we +are filled with much of that feeling which induced the ancient king +to exclaim, 'How manifold, O God, are thy works! in wisdom thou +hast made them all.'" + +We all heartily agreed with the missionary in this sentiment, and +felt not a little gratified to find that the opinions which Jack +and I had been led to form from personal observation on our Coral +Island were thus to a great extent corroborated. + +The missionary also gave us an account of the manner in which +Christianity had been introduced among them. He said: "When +missionaries were first sent here, three years ago, a small vessel +brought them; and the chief, who is now dead, promised to treat +well the two native teachers who were left with their wives on the +island. But scarcely had the boat which landed them returned to +the ship, than the natives began to maltreat their guests, taking +away all they possessed, and offering them further violence, so +that, when the boat was sent in haste to fetch them away, the +clothes of both men and women were torn nearly off their backs. + +"Two years after this the vessel visited them again, and I, being +in her, volunteered to land alone, without any goods whatever; +begging that my wife might be brought to me the following year, - +that is, THIS year; and, as you see, she is with me. But the surf +was so high that the boat could not land me; so with nothing on but +my trousers and shirt, and with a few catechisms and a Bible, +besides some portions of the Scripture translated into the Mango +tongue, I sprang into the sea, and swam ashore on the crest of a +breaker. I was instantly dragged up the beach by the natives; who, +on finding I had nothing worth having upon me, let me alone. I +then made signs to my friends in the ship to leave me; which they +did. At fist the natives listened to me in silence, but laughed at +what I said while I preached the gospel of our blessed Saviour +Jesus Christ to them. Afterwards they treated me ill sometimes; +but I persevered, and continued to dwell among them, and dispute, +and exhort them to give up their sinful ways of life, burn their +idols, and come to Jesus. + +"About a month after I landed, I heard that the chief was dead. He +was the father of the present chief, who is now a most consistent +member of the church. It is a custom here that, when a chief dies, +his wives are strangled and buried with him. Knowing this, I +hastened to his house to endeavour to prevent such cruelty if +possible. When I arrived, I found two of the wives had already +been killed, while another was in the act of being strangled. I +pleaded hard for her, but it was too late; she was already dead. I +then entreated the son to spare the fourth wife; and, after much +hesitation, my prayer was granted: but, in half an hour +afterwards, this poor woman repented of being unfaithful, as she +termed it, to her husband, and insisted on being strangled; which +was accordingly done. + +"All this time the chief's son was walking up and down before his +father's house with a brow black as thunder. When he entered, I +went in with him, and found, to my surprise, that his father was +not dead! The old man was sitting on a mat in a corner, with an +expression of placid resignation on his face. + +"'Why,' said I, 'have you strangled your father's wives before he +is dead?' + +"To this the son replied, 'He is dead. That is no longer my +father. He is as good as dead now. He is to be BURIED ALIVE.' + +"I now remembered having heard that it is a custom among the Feejee +islanders, that when the reigning chief grows old or infirm, the +heir to the chieftainship has a right to depose his father; in +which case he is considered as dead, and is buried alive. The +young chief was now about to follow this custom, and, despite my +earnest entreaties and pleadings, the old chief was buried that day +before my eyes in the same grave with his four strangled wives! +Oh! my heart groaned when I saw this, and I prayed to God to open +the hearts of these poor creatures, as he had already opened mine, +and pour into them the light and the love of the gospel of Jesus. +My prayer was answered very soon. A week afterwards, the son, who +was now chief of the tribe, came to me, bearing his god on his +shoulders, and groaning beneath its weight. Flinging it down at my +feet, he desired me to burn it! + +"You may conceive how overjoyed I was at this. I sprang up and +embraced him, while I shed tears of joy. Then we made a fire, and +burned the god to ashes, amid an immense concourse of the people, +who seemed terrified at what was being done, and shrank back when +we burned the god, expecting some signal vengeance to be taken upon +us; but seeing that nothing happened, they changed their minds, and +thought that our God must be the true one after all. From that +time the mission prospered steadily, and now, while there is not a +single man in the tribe who has not burned his household gods, and +become a convert to Christianity, there are not a few, I hope, who +are true followers of the Lamb, having been plucked as brands from +the burning by Him who can save unto the uttermost. I will not +tell you more of our progress at this time, but you see," he said, +waving his hand around him, "the village and the church did not +exist a year ago!" + +We were indeed much interested in this account, and I could not +help again in my heart praying God to prosper those missionary +societies that send such inestimable blessings to these islands of +dark and bloody idolatry. The teacher also added that the other +tribes were very indignant at this one for having burned its gods, +and threatened to destroy it altogether, but they had done nothing +yet; "and if they should," said the teacher, "the Lord is on our +side; of whom shall we be afraid?" + +"Have the missionaries many stations in these seas?" inquired Jack. + +"Oh, yes. The London Missionary Society have a great many in the +Tahiti group, and other islands in that quarter. Then the +Wesleyans have the Feejee Islands all to themselves, and the +Americans have many stations in other groups. But still, my +friend, there are hundreds of islands here the natives of which +have never heard of Jesus, or the good word of God, or the Holy +Spirit; and thousands are living and dying in the practice of those +terrible sins and bloody murders of which you have already heard. +I trust, my friends," he added, looking earnestly into our faces, +"I trust that if you ever return to England, you will tell your +Christian friends that the horrors which they hear of in regard to +these islands are LITERALLY TRUE, and that when they have heard the +worst, the 'HALF HAS NOT BEEN TOLD THEM;' for there are perpetrated +here foul deeds of darkness of which man may not speak. You may +also tell them," he said, looking around with a smile, while a tear +of gratitude trembled in his eye and rolled down his coal-black +cheek, - "tell them of the blessings that the gospel has wrought +HERE!" + +We assured our friend that we would certainly not forget his +request. On returning towards the village, about noon, we remarked +on the beautiful whiteness of the cottages. + +"That is owing to the lime with which they are plastered," said the +teacher. "When the natives were converted, as I have described, I +set them to work to build cottages for themselves, and also this +handsome church which you see. When the framework and other parts +of the houses were up, I sent the people to fetch coral from the +sea. They brought immense quantities. Then I made them cut wood, +and, piling the coral above it, set it on fire. + +"'Look! look!' cried the poor people, in amazement; 'what wonderful +people the Christians are! He is roasting stones. We shall not +need taro or bread-fruit any more; we may eat stones!' + +"But their surprise was still greater when the coral was reduced to +a fine soft white powder. They immediately set up a great shout, +and, mingling the lime with water, rubbed their faces and their +bodies all over with it, and ran through the village screaming with +delight. They were also much surprised at another thing they saw +me do. I wished to make some household furniture, and constructed +a turning-lathe to assist me. The first thing that I turned was +the leg of a sofa; which was no sooner finished than the chief +seized it with wonder and delight, and ran through the village +exhibiting it to the people, who looked upon it with great +admiration. The chief then, tying a string to it, hung it round +his neck as an ornament! He afterwards told me that if he had seen +it before he became a Christian he would have made it his god!" + +As the teacher concluded this anecdote we reached his door. Saying +that he had business to attend to, he left us to amuse ourselves as +we best could. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, turning abruptly towards us, and buttoning +up his jacket as he spoke, "I'm off to see the battle. I've no +particular fondness for seein' blood-shed, but I must find out the +nature o' these fellows and see their customs with my own eyes, so +that I may be able to speak of it again, if need be, +authoritatively. It's only six miles off, and we don't run much +more risk than that of getting a rap with a stray stone or an over- +shot arrow. Will you go?" + +"To be sure we will," said Peterkin. + +"If they chance to see us we'll cut and run for it," added Jack. + +"Dear me!" cried Peterkin, - "YOU run! thought you would scorn to +run from any one." + +"So I would, if it were my duty to fight," returned Jack, coolly; +"but as I don't want to fight, and don't intend to fight, if they +offer to attack us I'll run away like the veriest coward that ever +went by the name of Peterkin. So come along." + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + + + +A strange and bloody battle - The lion bearded in his den - +Frightful scenes of cruelty, and fears for the future. + + +WE had ascertained from the teacher the direction to the spot on +which the battle was to be fought, and after a walk of two hours +reached it. The summit of a bare hill was the place chosen; for, +unlike most of the other islanders, who are addicted to bush- +fighting, those of Mango are in the habit of meeting on open +ground. We arrived before the two parties had commenced the deadly +struggle, and, creeping as close up as we dared among the rocks, we +lay and watched them. + +The combatants were drawn up face to face, each side ranged in rank +four deep. Those in the first row were armed with long spears; the +second, with clubs to defend the spearmen; the third row was +composed of young men with slings; and the fourth consisted of +women, who carried baskets of stones for the slingers, and clubs +and spears with which to supply the warriors. Soon after we +arrived, the attack was made with great fury. There was no science +displayed. The two bodies of savages rushed headlong upon each +other and engaged in a general MELEE, and a more dreadful set of +men I have never seen. They wore grotesque war-caps made of +various substances and decorated with feathers. Their faces and +bodies were painted so as to make them look as frightful as +possible; and as they brandished their massive clubs, leaped, +shouted, yelled, and dashed each other to the ground, I thought I +had never seen men look so like demons before. + +We were much surprised at the conduct of the women, who seemed to +be perfect furies, and hung about the heels of their husbands in +order to defend them. One stout young women we saw, whose husband +was hard pressed and about to be overcome: she lifted a large +stone, and throwing it at his opponent's head, felled him to the +earth. But the battle did not last long. The band most distant +from us gave way and were routed, leaving eighteen of their +comrades dead upon the field. These the victors brained as they +lay; and putting some of their brains on leaves went off with them, +we were afterwards informed, to their temples, to present them to +their gods as an earnest of the human victims who were soon to be +brought there. + +We hastened back to the Christian village with feelings of the +deepest sadness at the sanguinary conflict which we had just +witnessed. + +Next day, after breakfasting with our friend the teacher, we made +preparations for carrying out our plan. At first the teacher +endeavoured to dissuade us. + +"You do not know," said he, turning to Jack, "the danger you run in +venturing amongst these ferocious savages. I feel much pity for +poor Avatea; but you are not likely to succeed in saving her, and +you may die in the attempt." + +"Well," said Jack, quietly, "I am not afraid to die in a good +cause." + +The teacher smiled approvingly at him as he said this, and after a +little further conversation agreed to accompany us as interpreter; +saying that, although Tararo was unfriendly to him, he had hitherto +treated him with respect. + +We now went on board the schooner, having resolved to sail round +the island and drop anchor opposite the heathen village. We manned +her with natives, and hoped to overawe the savages by displaying +our brass gun to advantage. The teacher soon after came on board, +and setting our sails we put to sea. In two hours more we made the +cliffs reverberate with the crash of the big gun, which we fired by +way of salute, while we ran the British ensign up to the peak and +cast anchor. The commotion on shore showed us that we had struck +terror into the hearts of the natives; but seeing that we did not +offer to molest them, a canoe at length put off and paddled +cautiously towards us. The teacher showed himself, and explaining +that we were friends and wished to palaver with the chief, desired +the native to go and tell him to come on board. + +We waited long and with much impatience for an answer. During this +time the native teacher conversed with us again, and told us many +things concerning the success of the gospel among those islands; +and perceiving that we were by no means so much gratified as we +ought to have been at the hearing of such good news, he pressed us +more closely in regard to our personal interest in religion, and +exhorted us to consider that our souls were certainly in as great +danger as those of the wretched heathen whom we pitied so much, if +we had not already found salvation in Jesus Christ. "Nay, +further," he added, "if such be your unhappy case, you are, in the +sight of God, much worse than these savages (forgive me, my young +friends, for saying so); for they have no knowledge, no light, and +do not profess to believe; while you, on the contrary, have been +brought up in the light of the blessed gospel and call yourselves +Christians. These poor savages are indeed the enemies of our Lord; +but you, if ye be not true believers, are traitors!" + +I must confess that my heart condemned me while the teacher spoke +in this earnest manner, and I knew not what to reply. Peterkin, +too, did not seem to like it, and I thought would willingly have +escaped; but Jack seemed deeply impressed, and wore an anxious +expression on his naturally grave countenance, while he assented to +the teacher's remarks and put to him many earnest questions. +Meanwhile the natives who composed our crew, having nothing +particular to do, had squatted down on the deck and taken out their +little books containing the translated portions of the New +Testament, along with hymns and spelling-books, and were now busily +engaged, some vociferating the alphabet, others learning prayers +off by heart, while a few sang hymns, - all of them being utterly +unmindful of our presence. The teacher soon joined them, and soon +afterwards they all engaged in a prayer which was afterwards +translated to us, and proved to be a petition for the success of +our undertaking and for the conversion of the heathen. + +While we were thus engaged a canoe put off from shore and several +savages leaped on deck, one of whom advanced to the teacher and +informed him that Tararo could not come on board that day, being +busy with some religious ceremonies before the gods, which could on +no account be postponed. He was also engaged with a friendly chief +who was about to take his departure from the island, and therefore +begged that the teacher and his friends would land and pay a visit +to him. To this the teacher returned answer that we would land +immediately. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, as we were about to step into our little +boat, "I'm not going to take any weapons with me, and I recommend +you to take none either. We are altogether in the power of these +savages, and the utmost we could do, if they were to attack us, +would be to kill a few of them before we were ourselves +overpowered. I think that our only chance of success lies in mild +measures. Don't you think so?" + +To this I assented gladly, and Peterkin replied by laying down a +huge bell-mouthed blunderbuss, and divesting himself of a pair of +enormous horse-pistols with which he had purposed to overawe the +natives! We then jumped into our boat and rowed ashore. + +On reaching the beach we were received by a crowd of naked savages, +who shouted a rude welcome, and conducted us to a house or shed +where a baked pig and a variety of vegetables were prepared for us. +Having partaken of these, the teacher begged to be conducted to the +chief; but there seemed some hesitation, and after some +consultation among themselves, one of the men stood forward and +spoke to the teacher. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack when the savage had concluded. + +"He says that the chief is just going to the temple of his god and +cannot see us yet; so we must be patient, my friend." + +"Well," cried Jack, rising; "if he won't come to see me, I'll e'en +go and see him. Besides, I have a great desire to witness their +proceedings at this temple of theirs. Will you go with me, +friend?" + +"I cannot," said the teacher, shaking his head; "I must not go to +the heathen temples and witness their inhuman rites, except for the +purpose of condemning their wickedness and folly." + +"Very good," returned Jack; "then I'll go alone, for I cannot +condemn their doings till I have seen them." + +Jack arose, and we, having determined to go also, followed him +through the banana groves to a rising ground immediately behind the +village, on the top of which stood the Bure, or temple, under the +dark shade of a group of iron-wood trees. As we went through the +village, I was again led to contrast the rude huts and sheds, and +their almost naked savage-looking inhabitants, with the natives of +the Christian village, who, to use the teacher's scriptural +expression, were now "clothed and in their right mind." + +As we turned into a broad path leading towards the hill, we were +arrested by the shouts of an approaching multitude in the rear. +Drawing aside into the bushes we awaited their coming up, and as +they drew near we observed that it was a procession of the natives, +many of whom were dancing and gesticulating in the most frantic +manner. They had an exceedingly hideous aspect, owing to the +black, red, and yellow paints with which their faces and naked +bodies were bedaubed. In the midst of these came a band of men +carrying three or four planks, on which were seated in rows upwards +of a dozen men. I shuddered involuntarily as I recollected the +sacrifice of human victims at the island of Emo, and turned with a +look of fear to Jack as I said, - + +"Oh, Jack! I have a terrible dread that they are going to commit +some of their cruel practices on these wretched men. We had better +not go to the temple. We shall only be horrified without being +able to do any good, for I fear they are going to kill them." + +Jack's face wore an expression of deep compassion as he said, in a +low voice, "No fear, Ralph; the sufferings of these poor fellows +are over long ago." + +I turned with a start as he spoke, and, glancing at the men, who +were now quite near to the spot where we stood, saw that they were +all dead. They were tied firmly with ropes in a sitting posture on +the planks, and seemed, as they bent their sightless eye-balls and +grinning mouths over the dancing crew below, as if they were +laughing in ghastly mockery at the utter inability of their enemies +to hurt them now. These, we discovered afterwards, were the men +who had been slain in the battle of the previous day, and were now +on their way to be first presented to the gods, and then eaten. +Behind these came two men leading between them a third, whose hands +were pinioned behind his back. He walked with a firm step, and +wore a look of utter indifference on his face, as they led him +along; so that we concluded he must be a criminal who was about to +receive some slight punishment for his faults. The rear of the +procession was brought up by a shouting crowd of women and +children, with whom we mingled and followed to the temple. + +Here we arrived in a few minutes. The temple was a tall circular +building, open at one side. Around it were strewn heaps of human +bones and skulls. At a table inside sat the priest, an elderly +man, with a long gray beard. He was seated on a stool, and before +him lay several knives, made of wood, bone, and splinters of +bamboo, with which he performed his office of dissecting dead +bodies. Farther in lay a variety of articles that had been +dedicated to the god, and among them were many spears and clubs. I +observed among the latter some with human teeth sticking in them, +where the victims had been clubbed in their mouths. + +Before this temple the bodies, which were painted with vermilion +and soot, were arranged in a sitting posture; and a man, called a +"dan-vosa" (orator), advanced, and, laying his hands on their +heads, began to chide them, apparently, in a low bantering tone. +What he said we knew not, but, as he went on, he waxed warm, and at +last shouted to them at the top of his lungs, and finally finished +by kicking the bodies over and running away, amid the shouts and +laughter of the people, who now rushed forward. Seizing the bodies +by a leg, or an arm, or by the hair of the head, they dragged them +over stumps and stones and through sloughs, until they were +exhausted. The bodies were then brought back to the temple and +dissected by the priest, after which they were taken out to be +baked. + +Close to the temple a large fire was kindled, in which stones were +heated red hot. When ready these were spread out on the ground, +and a thick coating of leaves strewn over them to slack the heat. +On this "lovo," or oven, the bodies were then placed, covered over, +and left to bake. + +The crowd now ran, with terrible yells, towards a neighbouring hill +or mound, on which we observed the frame-work of a house lying +ready to be erected. Sick with horror, yet fascinated by +curiosity, we staggered after them mechanically, scarce knowing +where we were going or what we did, and feeling a sort of +impression that all we saw was a dreadful dream. + +Arrived at the place, we saw the multitude crowding round a certain +spot. We pressed forward and obtained a sight of what they were +doing. A large wooden beam or post lay on the ground, beside the +other parts of the frame-work of the house, and close to the end of +it was a hole about seven feet deep and upwards of two feet wide. +While we looked, the man whom we had before observed with his hands +pinioned, was carried into the circle. His hands were now free, +but his legs were tightly strapped together. The post of the house +was then placed in the hole, and the man put in beside it. His +head was a good way below the surface of the hole, and his arms +were clasped round the post. Earth was now thrown in until all was +covered over and stamped down; and this, we were afterwards told, +was a CEREMONY usually performed at the dedication of a new temple, +or the erection of a chief's house + +"Come, come," cried Jack, on beholding this horrible tragedy, "we +have seen enough, enough, far more than enough! Let us go." + +Jack's face looked ghastly pale and haggard as we hurried back to +rejoin the teacher, and I have no doubt that he felt terrible +anxiety when he considered the number and ferocity of the savages, +and the weakness of the few arms which were ready indeed to essay, +but impotent to effect, Avatea's deliverance from these ruthless +men. + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + + + +An unexpected discovery, and a bold, reckless defiance, with its +consequences - Plans of escape, and heroic resolves. + + +WHEN we returned to the shore, and related to our friend what had +passed, he was greatly distressed, and groaned in spirit; but we +had not sat long in conversation, when we were interrupted by the +arrival of Tararo on the beach, accompanied by a number of +followers bearing baskets of vegetables and fruits on their heads. + +We advanced to meet him, and he expressed, through our interpreter, +much pleasure in seeing us. + +"And what is it that my friends wish to say to me?" he inquired. + +The teacher explained that we came to beg that Avatea might be +spared. + +"Tell him," said Jack, "that I consider that I have a right to ask +this of him, having not only saved the girl's life, but the lives +of his own people also; and say that I wish her to be allowed to +follow her own wishes, and join the Christians." + +While this was being translated, the chiefs brow lowered, and we +could see plainly that our request met with no favourable +reception. He replied with considerable energy, and at some +length. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack. + +"I regret to say that he will not listen to the proposal. He says +he has pledged his word to his friend that the girl shall be sent +to him, and a deputy is even now on this island awaiting the +fulfilment of the pledge." + +Jack bit his lip in suppressed anger. "Tell Tararo," he exclaimed +with flashing eye, "that if he does not grant my demand, it will be +worse for him. Say I have a big gun on board my schooner that will +blow his village into the sea, if he does not give up the girl." + +"Nay, my friend," said the teacher, gently, "I will not tell him +that; we must overcome evil with good.'" + +"What does my friend say?" inquired the chief, who seemed nettled +by Jack's looks of defiance. + +"He is displeased," replied the teacher. + +Tararo turned away with a smile of contempt, and walked towards the +men who carried the baskets of vegetables, and who had now emptied +the whole on the beach in an enormous pile. + +"What are they doing there?" I inquired. + +"I think that they are laying out a gift which they intend to +present to some one," said the teacher. + +At this moment a couple of men appeared leading a young girl +between them; and, going towards the heap of fruits and vegetables, +placed her on the top of it. We started with surprise and fear, +for in the young female before us we recognised the Samoan girl, +Avatea! + +We stood rooted to the earth with surprise and thick coming fears. + +"Oh! my dear young friend," whispered the teacher, in a voice of +deep emotion, while he seized Jack by the arm, "she is to be made a +sacrifice even now!" + +"Is she?" cried Jack, with a vehement shout, spurning the teacher +aside, and dashing over two natives who stood in his way, while he +rushed towards the heap, sprang up its side, and seized Avatea by +the arm. In another moment he dragged her down, placed her back to +a large tree, and, wrenching a war-club from the hand of a native +who seemed powerless and petrified with surprise, whirled it above +his head, and yelled, rather than shouted, while his face blazed +with fury, "Come on, the whole nation of you, an ye like it, and do +your worst!" + +It seemed as though the challenge had been literally accepted; for +every savage on the ground ran precipitately at Jack with club and +spear, and, doubtless, would speedily have poured out his brave +blood on the sod, had not the teacher rushed in between them, and, +raising his voice to its utmost, cried. - + +"Stay your hands, warriors! It is not your part to judge in this +matter. It is for Tararo, the chief, to say whether or not the +young man shall live or die." + +The natives were arrested; and I know not whether it was the +gratifying acknowledgment of his superiority thus made by the +teacher, or some lingering feeling of gratitude for Jack's former +aid in time of need, that influenced Tararo, but he stepped +forward, and, waving his hand, said to his people, - "Desist. The +young man's life is mine." Then, turning to Jack, he said, "You +have forfeited your liberty and life to me. Submit yourself, for +we are more numerous than the sand upon the shore. You are but +one; why should you die?" + +"Villain!" exclaimed Jack, passionately, "I may die, but, +assuredly, I shall not perish alone. I will not submit until you +promise that this girl shall not be injured." + +"You are very bold," replied the chief, haughtily, "but very +foolish. Yet I will say that Avatea shall not be sent away, at +least for three days." + +"You had better accept these terms," whispered the teacher, +entreatingly. "If you persist in this mad defiance, you will be +slain, and Avatea will be lost. Three days are worth having." + +Jack hesitated a moment, then lowered his club, and, throwing it +moodily to the ground, crossed his arms on his breast, and hung +down his head in silence. + +Tararo seemed pleased by his submission, and told the teacher to +say that he did not forget his former services, and, therefore, +would leave him free as to his person, but that the schooner would +be detained till he had further considered the matter. + +While the teacher translated this, he approached as near to where +Avatea was standing as possible, without creating suspicion, and +whispered to her a few words in the native language. Avatea, who, +during the whole of the foregoing scene, had stood leaning against +the tree perfectly passive, and seemingly quite uninterested in all +that was going on, replied by a single rapid glance of her dark +eye, which was instantly cast down again on the ground at her feet. + +Tararo now advanced, and taking the girl by the hand, led her +unresistingly away, while Jack, Peterkin, and I returned with the +teacher on board the schooner. + +On reaching the deck, we went down to the cabin, where Jack threw +himself, in a state of great dejection, on a couch; but the teacher +seated himself by his side, and, laying his hand upon his shoulder, +said, - + +"Do not give way to anger, my young friend. God has given us three +days, and we must use the means that are in our power to free this +poor girl from slavery. We must not sit in idle disappointment, we +must act" - + +"Act!" cried Jack, raising himself, and tossing back his hair +wildly; "it is mockery to balk of acting when one is bound hand and +foot. How can I act? I cannot fight a whole nation of savages +single-handed. Yes," he said, with a bitter smile, "I can fight +them, but I cannot conquer them, or save Avatea." + +"Patience, my friend; your spirit is not a good one just now. You +cannot expect that blessing which alone can insure success, unless +you are more submissive. I will tell you my plans if you will +listen." + +"Listen!" cried Jack, eagerly, "of course I will, my good fellow; I +did not know you had any plans. Out with them. I only hope you +will show me how I can get the girl on board of this schooner, and +I'd up anchor and away in no time. But proceed with your plans." + +The teacher smiled sadly: "Ah! my friend, if one fathom of your +anchor chain were to rattle, as you drew it in, a thousand warriors +would be standing on your deck. No, no, that could not be done. +Even now, your ship would be taken from you were it not that Tararo +has some feeling of gratitude toward you. But I know Tararo well. +He is a man of falsehood, as all the unconverted savages are. The +chief to whom he has promised this girl is very powerful, and +Tararo MUST fulfil his promise. He has told you that he would do +nothing to the girl for three days; but that is because the party +who are to take her away will not be ready to start for three days. +Still, as he might have made you a prisoner during those three +days, I say that God has given them to us." + +"Well, but what do you propose to do?" said Jack, impatiently. + +"My plan involves much danger, but I see no other, and I think you +have courage to brave it. It is this: There is an island about +fifty miles to the south of this, the natives of which are +Christians, and have been so for two years or more, and the +principal chief is Avatea's lover. Once there, Avatea would be +safe. Now, I suggest that you should abandon your schooner. Do +you think that you can make so great a sacrifice?" + +"Friend," replied Jack, "when I make up my mind to go through with +a thing of importance, I can make any sacrifice." + +The teacher smiled. "Well, then, the savages could not conceive it +possible that, for the sake of a girl, you would voluntarily lose +your fine vessel; therefore as long as she lies here they think +they have you all safe: so I suggest that we get a quantity of +stores conveyed to a sequestered part of the shore, provide a small +canoe, put Avatea on board, and you three would paddle to the +Christian island." + +"Bravo!" cried Peterkin, springing up and seizing the teacher's +hand. "Missionary, you're a regular brick. I didn't think you had +so much in you." + +"As for me," continued the teacher, "I will remain on board till +they discover that you are gone. Then they will ask me where you +are gone to, and I will refuse to tell." + +"And what'll be the result of that?" inquired Jack. + +"I know not. Perhaps they will kill me; but," he added, looking at +Jack with a peculiar smile, "I too am not afraid to die in a good +cause!" + +"But how are we to get hold of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +"I have arranged with her to meet us at a particular spot, to which +I will guide you to-night. We shall then arrange about it. She +will easily manage to elude her keepers, who are not very strict in +watching her, thinking it impossible that she could escape from the +island. Indeed, I am sure that such an idea will never enter their +heads. But, as I have said, you run great danger. Fifty miles in +a small canoe, on the open sea, is a great voyage to make. You may +miss the island, too, in which case there is no other in that +direction for a hundred miles or more; and if you lose your way and +fall among other heathens, you know the law of Feejee - a cast-away +who gains the shore is doomed to die. You must count the cost, my +young friend." + +"I have counted it," replied Jack. "If Avatea consents to run the +risk, most certainly I will; and so will my comrades also. +Besides," added Jack, looking seriously into the teacher's face, +"your Bible, - OUR Bible, tells of ONE who delivers those who call +on Him in the time of trouble; who holds the winds in his fists and +the waters in the hollow of his hand." + +We now set about active preparations for the intended voyage; +collected together such things as we should require, and laid out +on the deck provisions sufficient to maintain us for several weeks, +purposing to load the canoe with as much as she could hold +consistently with speed and safety. These we covered with a +tarpaulin, intending to convey them to the canoe only a few hours +before starting. When night spread her sable curtain over the +scene, we prepared to land; but, first, kneeling along with the +natives and the teacher, the latter implored a blessing on our +enterprise. Then we rowed quietly to the shore and followed our +sable guide, who led us by a long detour, in order to avoid the +village, to the place of rendezvous. We had not stood more than +five minutes under the gloomy shade of the thick foliage when a +dark figure glided noiselessly up to us. + +"Ah! here you are," said Jack, as Avatea approached. "Now, then, +tell her what we've come about, and don't waste time." + +"I understan' leetl English," said Avatea, in a low voice. + +"Why, where did you pick up English?" exclaimed Jack, in amazement; +"you were dumb as a stone when I saw you last." + +"She has learned all she knows of it from me," said the teacher, +"since she came to the island." + +We now gave Avatea a full explanation of our plans, entering into +all the details, and concealing none of the danger, so that she +might be fully aware of the risk she ran. As we had anticipated, +she was too glad of the opportunity thus afforded her to escape +from her persecutors to think of the danger or risk. + +"Then you're willing to go with us, are you?" said Jack. + +"Yis, I am willing to go." + +"And you're not afraid to trust yourself out on the deep sea so +far?" + +"No, I not 'fraid to go. Safe with Christian." + +After some further consultation, the teacher suggested that it was +time to return, so we bade Avatea good night, and having appointed +to meet at the cliff where the canoe lay, on the following night, +just after dark, we hastened away - we to row on board the schooner +with muffled oars - Avatea to glide back to her prison-hut among +the Mango savages. + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + + + +The flight - The pursuit - Despair and its results - The lion +bearded in his den again - Awful danger threatened and wonderfully +averted - A terrific storm. + + +AS the time for our meditated flight drew near, we became naturally +very fearful lest our purpose should be discovered, and we spent +the whole of the following day in a state of nervous anxiety. We +resolved to go a-shore and ramble about the village, as if to +observe the habits and dwellings of the people, as we thought that +an air of affected indifference to the events of the previous day +would be more likely than any other course of conduct to avert +suspicion as to our intentions. While we were thus occupied, the +teacher remained on board with the Christian natives, whose +powerful voices reached us ever and anon as they engaged in singing +hymns or in prayer. + +At last the long and tedious day came to a close, the sank into the +sea, and the short-lived twilight of those regions, to which I have +already referred, ended abruptly in a dark night. Hastily throwing +a few blankets into our little boat, we stepped into it, and, +whispering farewell to the natives in the schooner, rowed gently +over the lagoon, taking care to keep as near to the beach as +possible. We rowed in the utmost silence and with muffled oars, so +that had any one observed us at the distance of a few yards, he +might have almost taken us for a phantom-boat or a shadow on the +dark water. Not a breath of air was stirring; but fortunately the +gentle ripple of the sea upon the shore, mingled with the soft roar +of the breaker on the distant reef, effectually drowned the slight +plash that we unavoidably made in the water by the dipping of our +oars. + +Quarter of an hour sufficed to bring us to the over-hanging cliff +under whose black shadow our little canoe lay, with her bow in the +water ready to be launched, and most of her cargo already stowed +away. As the keel of our little boat grated on the sand, a hand +was laid upon the bow, and a dim form was seen. + +"Ha!" said Peterkin in a whisper, as he stepped upon the beach, "is +that you, Avatea?" + +"Yis, it am me," was the reply. + +"All right! Now, then, gently. Help me to shove off the canoe," +whispered Jack to the teacher; "and Peterkin, do you shove these +blankets aboard, we may want them before long. Avatea, step into +the middle; - that's right." + +"Is all ready?" whispered the teacher. + +"Not quite," replied Peterkin. "Here, Ralph, lay hold o' this pair +of oars, and stow them away if you can. I don't like paddles. +After we're safe away I'll try to rig up rollicks for them." + +"Now, then, in with you and shove off." + +One more earnest squeeze of the kind teacher's hand, and, with his +whispered blessing yet sounding in our ears, we shot like an arrow +from the shore, sped over the still waters of the lagoon, and +paddled as swiftly as strong arms and willing hearts could urge us +over the long swell of the open sea. + +All that night and the whole of the following day we plied our +paddles in almost total silence and without halt, save twice to +recruit our failing energies with a mouthful of food and a draught +of water. Jack had taken the bearing of the island just after +starting, and laying a small pocket-compass before him, kept the +head of the canoe due south, for our chance of hitting the island +depended very much on the faithfulness of our steersman in keeping +our tiny bark exactly and constantly on its proper course. +Peterkin and I paddled in the bow, and Avatea worked untiringly in +the middle. + +As the sun's lower limb dipped on the gilded edge of the sea Jack +ceased working, threw down his paddle, and called a halt. + +"There," he cried, heaving a deep, long-drawn sigh, "we've put a +considerable breadth of water between us and these black rascals, +so now we'll have a hearty supper and a sound sleep." + +"Hear, hear," cried Peterkin. "Nobly spoken, Jack. Hand me a drop +water, Ralph. Why, girl what's wrong with you? You look just like +a black owl blinking in the sunshine." + +Avatea smiled. "I sleepy," she said; and as if to prove the truth +of this, she laid her head on the edge of the canoe and fell fast +asleep. + +"That's uncommon sharp practice," said Peterkin, with a broad grin. +"Don't you think we should awake her to make her eat something +first? or, perhaps," he added, with a grave, meditative look, +"perhaps we might put some food in her mouth, which is so elegantly +open at the present moment, and see if she'd swallow it while +asleep. If so, Ralph, you might come round to the front here and +feed her quietly, while Jack and I are tucking into the victuals. +It would be a monstrous economy of time." + +I could not help smiling at Peterkin's idea, which, indeed, when I +pondered it, seemed remarkably good in theory; nevertheless I +declined to put it in practice, being fearful of the result should +the victual chance to go down the wrong throat. But, on suggesting +this to Peterkin, he exclaimed - + +"Down the wrong throat, man! why, a fellow with half an eye might +see that if it went down Avatea's throat it could not go down the +wrong throat! - unless, indeed, you have all of a sudden become +inordinately selfish, and think that all the throats in the world +are wrong ones except your own. However, don't talk so much, and +hand me the pork before Jack finishes it. I feel myself entitled +to at least one minute morsel." + +"Peterkin, you're a villain. A paltry little villain," said Jack, +quietly, as he tossed the hind legs (including the tail) of a cold +roast pig to his comrade; "and I must again express my regret that +unavoidable circumstances have thrust your society upon me, and +that necessity has compelled me to cultivate your acquaintance. +Were it not that you are incapable of walking upon the water, I +would order you, sir, out of the canoe." + +"There! you've wakened Avatea with your long tongue," retorted +Peterkin, with a frown, as the girl gave vent to a deep sigh. +"No," he continued, "it was only a snore. Perchance she dreameth +of her black Apollo. I say, Ralph, do leave just one little slice +of that yam. Between you and Jack I run a chance of being put on +short allowance, if not - yei - a - a - ow!" + +Peterkin's concluding remark was a yawn of so great energy that +Jack recommended him to postpone the conclusion of his meal till +next morning, - a piece of advice which he followed so quickly, +that I was forcibly reminded of his remark, a few minutes before, +in regard to the sharp practice of Avatea. + +My readers will have observed, probably, by this time, that I am +much given to meditation; they will not, therefore, be surprised to +learn that I fell into a deep reverie on the subject of sleep, +which was continued without intermission into the night, and +prolonged without interruption into the following morning. But I +cannot feel assured that I actually slept during that time, +although I am tolerably certain that I was not awake. + +Thus we lay like a shadow on the still bosom of the ocean, while +the night closed in, and all around was calm, dark, and silent. + +A thrilling cry of alarm from Peterkin startled us in the morning, +just as the gray dawn began to glimmer in the east. + +"What's wrong?" cried Jack, starting up. + +Peterkin replied by pointing with a look of anxious dread towards +the horizon; and a glance sufficed to show us that one of the +largest sized war-canoes was approaching us! + +With a groan of mingled despair and anger Jack seized his paddle, +glanced at the compass, and, in a suppressed voice, commanded us to +"give way." + +But we did not require to be urged. Already our four paddles were +glancing in the water, and the canoe bounded over the glassy sea +like a dolphin, while a shout from our pursuers told that they had +observed our motions. + +"I see something like land ahead," said Jack, in a hopeful tone. +"It seems impossible that we could have made the island yet; still, +if it is so, we may reach it before these fellows can catch us, for +our canoe is light and our muscles are fresh." + +No one replied; for, to say truth, we felt that, in a long chase, +we had no chance whatever with a canoe which held nearly a hundred +warriors. Nevertheless, we resolved to do our utmost to escape, +and paddled with a degree of vigour that kept us well in advance of +our pursuers. The war-canoe was so far behind us that it seemed +but a little speck on the sea, and the shouts, to which the crew +occasionally gave vent, came faintly towards us on the morning +breeze. We therefore hoped that we should be able to keep in +advance for an hour or two, when we might, perhaps, reach the land +ahead. But this hope was suddenly crushed by the supposed land, +not long after, rising up into the sky; thus proving itself to be a +fog-bank! + +A bitter feeling of disappointment filled each heart, and was +expressed on each countenance, as we beheld this termination to our +hopes. But we had little time to think of regret. Our danger was +too great and imminent to permit of a moment's relaxation from our +exertions. No hope now animated our bosoms; but a feeling of +despair, strange to say, lent us power to work, and nerved our arms +with such energy, that it was several hours ere the savages +overtook us. When we saw that there was indeed no chance of +escape, and that paddling any longer would only serve to exhaust +our strength, without doing any good, we turned the side of our +canoe towards the approaching enemy, and laid down our paddles. + +Silently, and with a look of bitter determination on his face, Jack +lifted one of the light boat-oars that we had brought with us, and, +resting it on his shoulder, stood up in an attitude of bold +defiance. Peterkin took the other oar and also stood up, but there +was no anger visible on his countenance. When not sparkling with +fun, it usually wore a mild, sad expression, which was deepened on +the present occasion, as he glanced at Avatea, who sat with her +face resting in her hands upon her knees. Without knowing very +well what I intended to do, I also arose and grasped my paddle with +both hands. + +On came the large canoe like a war-horse of the deep, with the foam +curling from its sharp bow, and the spear-heads of the savages +glancing the beams of the rising sun. Perfect silence was +maintained on both sides, and we could hear the hissing water, and +see the frowning eyes of the warriors, as they came rushing on. +When about twenty yards distant, five or six of the savages in the +bow rose, and, laying aside their paddles, took up their spears. +Jack and Peterkin raised their oars, while, with a feeling of +madness whirling in my brain, I grasped my paddle and prepared for +the onset. But, before any of us could strike a blow, the sharp +prow of the war-canoe struck us like a thunderbolt on the side, and +hurled us into the sea! + +What occurred after this I cannot tell, for I was nearly drowned; +but when I recovered from the state of insensibility into which I +had been thrown, I found myself stretched on my back, bound hand +and foot between Jack and Peterkin, in the bottom of the large +canoe. + +In this condition we lay the whole day, during which time the +savages only rested one hour. When night came, they rested again +for another hour, and appeared to sleep just as they sat. But we +were neither unbound nor allowed to speak to each other during the +voyage, nor was a morsel of food or a draught of water given to us. +For food, however, we cared little; but we would have given much +for a drop of water to cool our parched lips, and we would have +been glad, too, had they loosened the cords that bound us, for they +were tightly fastened and occasioned us much pain. The air, also, +was unusually hot, so much so that I felt convinced that a storm +was brewing. This also added to our sufferings. However, these +were at length relieved by our arrival at the island from which we +had fled. + +While we were being led ashore, we caught a glimpse of Avatea, who +was seated in the hinder part of the canoe. She was not fettered +in any way. Our captors now drove us before them towards the hut +of Tararo, at which we speedily arrived, and found the chief seated +with an expression on his face that boded us no good. Our friend +the teacher stood beside him, with a look of anxiety on his mild +features. + +"How comes it," said Tararo, turning to the teacher, "that these +youths have abused our hospitality?" + +"Tell him," replied Jack, "that we have not abused his hospitality, +for his hospitality has not been extended to us. I came to the +island to deliver Avatea, and my only regret is that I have failed +to do so. If I get another chance, I will try to save her yet." + +The teacher shook his head. "Nay, my young friend, I had better +not tell him that. It will only incense him." + +"Fear not," replied Jack. "If you don't tell him that, you'll tell +him nothing, for I won't say anything softer." + +On hearing Jack's speech, Tararo frowned and his eye flashed with +anger. + +"Go," he said, "presumptuous boy. My debt to you is cancelled. +You and your companions shall die." + +As he spoke he rose and signed to several of his attendants, who +seized Jack, and Peterkin, and me, violently by the collars, and, +dragging us from the hut of the chief, led us through the wood to +the outskirts of the village. Here they thrust us into a species +of natural cave in a cliff, and, having barricaded the entrance, +left us in total darkness. + +After feeling about for some time - for our legs were unshackled, +although our wrists were still bound with thongs - we found a low +ledge of rock running along one side of the cavern. On this we +seated ourselves, and for a long time maintained unbroken silence. + +At last I could restrain my feelings no longer. "Alas! dear Jack +and Peterkin," said I, "what is to become of us? I fear that we +are doomed to die." + +"I know not," replied Jack, in a tremulous voice, "I know not; +Ralph, I regret deeply the hastiness of my violent temper, which, I +must confess, has been the chief cause of our being brought to this +sad condition. Perhaps the teacher may do something for us. But I +have little hope." + +"Ah! no," said Peterkin, with a heavy sigh; "I am sure he can't +help us. Tararo doesn't care more for him than for one of his +dogs." + +"Truly," said I, "there seems no chance of deliverance, unless the +Almighty puts forth his arm to save us. Yet I must say that I have +great hope, my comrades, for we have come to this dark place by no +fault of ours - unless it be a fault to try to succour a woman in +distress." + +I was interrupted in my remarks by a noise at the entrance to the +cavern, which was caused by the removal of the barricade. +Immediately after, three men entered, and, taking us by the collars +of our coats, led us away through the forest. As we advanced, we +heard much shouting and beating of native drums in the village, and +at first we thought that our guards were conducting us to the hut +of Tararo again. But in this we were mistaken. The beating of +drums gradually increased, and soon after we observed a procession +of the natives coming towards us. At the head of this procession +we were placed, and then we all advanced together towards the +temple where human victims were wont to be sacrificed! + +A thrill of horror ran through my heart as I recalled to mind the +awful scenes that I had before witnessed at that dreadful spot. +But deliverance came suddenly from a quarter whence we little +expected it. During the whole of that day there had been an +unusual degree of heat in the atmosphere, and the sky assumed that +lurid aspect which portends a thunder-storm. Just as we were +approaching the horrid temple, a growl of thunder burst overhead +and heavy drops of rain began to fall + +Those who have not witnessed gales and storms in tropical regions +can form but a faint conception of the fearful hurricane that burst +upon the island of Mango at this time. Before we reached the +temple, the storm burst upon us with a deafening roar, and the +natives, who knew too well the devastation that was to follow, fled +right and left through the woods in order to save their property, +leaving us alone in the midst of the howling storm. The trees +around us bent before the blast like willows, and we were about to +flee in order to seek shelter, when the teacher ran toward us with +a knife in his hand. + +"Thank the Lord," he said, cutting our bonds, "I am in time! Now, +seek the shelter of the nearest rock." + +This we did without a moment's hesitation, for the whistling wind +burst, ever and anon, like thunder-claps among the trees, and, +tearing them from their roots, hurled them with violence to the +ground. Rain cut across the land in sheets, and lightning played +like forked serpents in the air; while, high above the roar of the +hissing tempest, the thunder crashed, and burst, and rolled in +awful majesty. + +In the village the scene was absolutely appalling. Roofs were +blown completely off the houses in many cases; and in others, the +houses themselves were levelled with the ground. In the midst of +this, the natives were darting to and fro, in some instances saving +their goods, but in many others seeking to save themselves from the +storm of destruction that whirled around them. But, terrific +although the tempest was on land, it was still more tremendous on +the mighty ocean. Billows sprang, as it were, from the great deep, +and while their crests were absolutely scattered into white mist, +they fell upon the beach with a crash that seemed to shake the +solid land. But they did not end there. Each successive wave +swept higher and higher on the beach, until the ocean lashed its +angry waters among the trees and bushes, and at length, in a sheet +of white curdled foam, swept into the village and upset and carried +off, or dashed into wreck, whole rows of the native dwellings! It +was a sublime, an awful scene, calculated, in some degree at least, +to impress the mind of beholders with the might and the majesty of +God. + +We found shelter in a cave that night and all the next day, during +which time the storm raged in fury; but on the night following it +abated somewhat, and in the morning we went to the village to seek +for food, being so famished with hunger that we lost all feeling of +danger and all wish to escape in our desire to satisfy the cravings +of nature. But no sooner had we obtained food than we began to +wish that we had rather endeavoured to make our escape into the +mountains. This we attempted to do soon afterwards, but the +natives were now able to look after us, and on our showing a +disposition to avoid observation and make towards the mountains, we +were seized by three warriors, who once more bound our wrists and +thrust us into our former prison. + +It is true Jack made a vigorous resistance, and knocked down the +first savage who seized him, with a well-directed blow of his fist, +but he was speedily overpowered by others. Thus we were again +prisoners, with the prospect of torture and a violent death before +us. + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + + + +Imprisonment - Sinking hopes - Unexpected freedom to more than one, +and in more senses than one. + + +FOR a long long month we remained in our dark and dreary prison, +during which dismal time we did not see the face of a human being, +except that of the silent savage who brought us our daily food. + +There have been one or two seasons in my life during which I have +felt as if the darkness of sorrow and desolation that crushed my +inmost heart could never pass away, until death should make me +cease to feel the present was such a season. + +During the first part of our confinement we felt a cold chill at +our hearts every time we heard a foot-fall near the cave - dreading +lest it should prove to be that of our executioner. But as time +dragged heavily on, we ceased to feel this alarm, and began to +experience such a deep, irrepressible longing for freedom, that we +chafed and fretted in our confinement like tigers. Then a feeling +of despair came over us, and we actually longed for the time when +the savages would take us forth to die! But these changes took +place very gradually, and were mingled sometimes with brighter +thoughts; for there were times when we sat in that dark cavern on +our ledge of rock and conversed almost pleasantly about the past, +until we well-nigh forgot the dreary present. But we seldom +ventured to touch upon the future. + +A few decayed leaves and boughs formed our bed; and a scanty supply +of yams and taro, brought to us once a-day, constituted our food. + +"Well, Ralph, how have you slept?" said Jack, in a listless tone, +on rising one morning from his humble couch. "Were you much +disturbed by the wind last night?" + +"No," said I; "I dreamed of home all night, and I thought that my +mother smiled upon me, and beckoned me to go to her; but I could +not, for I was chained." + +"And I dreamed, too," said Peterkin; "but it was of our happy home +on the Coral Island. I thought we were swimming in the Water +Garden; then the savages gave a yell, and we were immediately in +the cave at Spouting Cliff, which, somehow or other, changed into +this gloomy cavern; and I awoke to find it true." + +Peterkin's tone was so much altered by the depressing influence of +his long imprisonment, that, had I not known it was he who spoke, I +should scarcely have recognised it, so sad was it, and so unlike to +the merry, cheerful voice we had been accustomed to hear. I +pondered this much, and thought of the terrible decline of +happiness that may come on human beings in so short a time; how +bright the sunshine in the sky at one time, and, in a short space, +how dark the overshadowing cloud! I had no doubt that the Bible +would have given me much light and comfort on this subject, if I +had possessed one, and I once more had occasion to regret deeply +having neglected to store my memory with its consoling truths. + +While I meditated thus, Peterkin again broke the silence of the +cave, by saying, in a melancholy tone, "Oh, I wonder if we shall +ever see our dear island more." + +His voice trembled, and, covering his face with both hands, he bent +down his head and wept. It was an unusual sight for me to see our +once joyous companion in tears, and I felt a burning desire to +comfort him; but, alas! what could I say? I could hold out no +hope; and although I essayed twice to speak, the words refused to +pass my lips. While I hesitated, Jack sat down beside him, and +whispered a few words in his ear, while Peterkin threw himself on +his friend's breast, and rested his head on his shoulder. + +Thus we sat for some time in deep silence. Soon after, we heard +footsteps at the entrance of the cave, and immediately our jailer +entered. We were so much accustomed to his regular visits, +however, that we paid little attention to him, expecting that he +would set down our meagre fare, as usual, and depart. But, to our +surprise, instead of doing so, he advanced towards us with a knife +in his hand, and, going up to Jack, he cut the thongs that bound +his wrists, then he did the same to Peterkin and me! For fully +five minutes we stood in speechless amazement, with our freed hands +hanging idly by our sides. The first thought that rushed into my +mind was, that the time had come to put us to death; and although, +as I have said before, we actually wished for death in the strength +of our despair, now that we thought it drew really near I felt all +the natural love of life revive in my heart, mingled with a chill +of horror at the suddenness of our call + +But I was mistaken. After cutting our bonds, the savage pointed to +the cave's mouth, and we marched, almost mechanically, into the +open air. Here, to our surprise, we found the teacher standing +under a tree, with his hands clasped before him, and the tears +trickling down his dark cheeks. On seeing Jack, who came out +first, he sprang towards him, and clasping him in his arms, +exclaimed, - + +"Oh! my dear young friend, through the great goodness of God you +are free!" + +"Free!" cried Jack. + +"Ay, free," repeated the teacher, shaking us warmly by the hands +again and again; "free to go and come as you will. The Lord has +unloosed the bands of the captive and set the prisoners free. A +missionary has been sent to us, and Tararo has embraced the +Christian religion! The people are even now burning their gods of +wood! Come, my dear friends, and see the glorious sight." + +We could scarcely credit our senses. So long had we been +accustomed in our cavern to dream of deliverance, that we imagined +for a moment this must surely be nothing more than another vivid +dream. Our eyes and minds were dazzled, too, by the brilliant +sunshine, which almost blinded us after our long confinement to the +gloom of our prison, so that we felt giddy with the variety of +conflicting emotions that filled our throbbing bosoms; but as we +followed the footsteps of our sable friend, and beheld the bright +foliage of the trees, and heard the cries of the paroquets, and +smelt the rich perfume of the flowering shrubs, the truth, that we +were really delivered from prison and from death, rushed with +overwhelming power into our souls, and, with one accord, while +tears sprang to our eyes, we uttered a loud long cheer of joy. + +It was replied to by a shout from a number of the natives who +chanced to be near. Running towards us, they shook us by the hand +with every demonstration of kindly feeling. They then fell behind, +and, forming a sort of procession, conducted us to the dwelling of +Tararo. + +The scene that met our eyes here was one that I shall never forget. +On a rude bench in front of his house sat the chief. A native +stood on his left hand, who, from his dress, seemed to be a +teacher. On his right stood an English gentleman, who, I at once +and rightly concluded, was a missionary. He was tall, thin, and +apparently past forty, with a bald forehead, and thin gray hair. +The expression of his countenance was the most winning I ever saw, +and his clear gray eye beamed with a look that was frank, fearless, +loving, and truthful. In front of the chief was an open space, in +the centre of which lay a pile of wooden idols, ready to be set on +fire; and around these were assembled thousands of natives, who had +come to join in or to witness the unusual sight. A bright smile +overspread the missionary's face as he advanced quickly to meet us, +and he shook us warmly by the hands. + +"I am overjoyed to meet you, my dear young friends," he said. "My +friend, and your friend, the teacher, has told me your history; and +I thank our Father in heaven, with all my heart, that he has guided +me to this island, and made me the instrument of saving you." + +We thanked the missionary most heartily, and asked him in some +surprise how he had succeeded in turning the heart of Tararo in our +favour. + +"I will tell you that at a more convenient time," he answered, +"meanwhile we must not forget the respect due to the chief. He +waits to receive you." + +In the conversation that immediately followed between us and +Tararo, the latter said that the light of the gospel of Jesus +Christ had been sent to the island, and that to it we were indebted +for our freedom. Moreover, he told us that we were at liberty to +depart in our schooner whenever we pleased, and that we should be +supplied with as much provision as we required. He concluded by +shaking hands with us warmly, and performing the ceremony of +rubbing noses. + +This was indeed good news to us, and we could hardly find words to +express our gratitude to the chief and to the missionary. + +"And what of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +The missionary replied by pointing to a group of natives in the +midst of whom the girl stood. Beside her was a tall, strapping +fellow, whose noble mien and air of superiority bespoke him a chief +of no ordinary kind. + +"That youth is her lover. He came this very morning in his war- +canoe to treat with Tararo for Avatea. He is to be married in a +few days, and afterwards returns to his island home with his +bride!" + +"That's capital," said Jack, as he stepped up to the savage and +gave him a hearty shake of the hand. "I wish you joy, my lad; - +and you too, Avatea." + +As Jack spoke, Avatea's lover took him by the hand and led him to +the spot where Tararo and the missionary stood, surrounded by most +of the chief men of the tribe. The girl herself followed, and +stood on his left hand while her lover stood on his right, and, +commanding silence, made the following speech, which was translated +by the missionary:- + +"Young friend, you have seen few years, but your head is old. Your +heart also is large and very brave. I and Avatea are your debtors, +and we wish, in the midst of this assembly, to acknowledge our +debt, and to say that it is one which we can never repay. You have +risked your life for one who was known to you only for a few days. +But she was a woman in distress, and that was enough to secure to +her the aid of a Christian man. We, who live in these islands of +the sea, know that the true Christians always act thus. Their +religion is one of love and kindness. We thank God that so many +Christians have been sent here - we hope many more will come. +Remember that I and Avatea will think of you and pray for you and +your brave comrades when you are far away." + +To this kind speech Jack returned a short sailor-like reply, in +which he insisted that he had only done for Avatea what he would +have done for any woman under the sun. But Jack's forte did not +lie in speech-making, so he terminated rather abruptly by seizing +the chief's hand and shaking it violently, after which he made a +hasty retreat. + +"Now, then, Ralph and Peterkin," said Jack, as we mingled with the +crowd, "it seems to me that the object we came here for having been +satisfactorily accomplished, we have nothing more to do but get +ready for sea as fast as we can, and hurrah for dear old England!" + +"That's my idea precisely," said Peterkin, endeavouring to wink, +but he had wept so much of late, poor fellow, that he found it +difficult; "however, I'm not going away till I see these fellows +burn their gods." + +Peterkin had his wish, for, in a few minutes afterwards, fire was +put to the pile, the roaring flames ascended, and, amid the +acclamations of the assembled thousands, the false gods of Mango +were reduced to ashes! + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + + + +Conclusion. + + +TO part is the lot of all mankind. The world is a scene of +constant leave-taking, and the hands that grasp in cordial greeting +to-day, are doomed ere long to unite for the last time, when the +quivering lips pronounce the word - "Farewell." It is a sad +thought, but should we on that account exclude it from our minds? +May not a lesson worth learning be gathered in the contemplation of +it? May it not, perchance, teach us to devote our thoughts more +frequently and attentively to that land where we meet, but part no +more? + +How many do we part from in this world with a light "Good-bye," +whom we never see again! Often do I think, in my meditations on +this subject, that if we realized more fully the shortness of the +fleeting intercourse that we have in this world with many of our +fellow-men, we would try more earnestly to do them good, to give +them a friendly smile, as it were, in passing (for the longest +intercourse on earth is little more than a passing word and +glance), and show that we have sympathy with them in the short +quick struggle of life, by our kindly words and looks and action. + +The time soon drew near when we were to quit the islands of the +South Seas; and, strange though it may appear, we felt deep regret +at parting with the natives of the island of Mango; for, after they +embraced the Christian faith, they sought, by showing us the utmost +kindness, to compensate for the harsh treatment we had experienced +at their hands; and we felt a growing affection for the native +teachers and the missionary, and especially for Avatea and her +husband. + +Before leaving, we had many long and interesting conversations with +the missionary, in one of which he told us that he had been making +for the island of Raratonga when his native-built sloop was blown +out of its course, during a violent gale, and driven to this +island. At first the natives refused to listen to what he had to +say; but, after a week's residence among them, Tararo came to him +and said that he wished to become a Christian, and would burn his +idols. He proved himself to be sincere, for, as we have seen, he +persuaded all his people to do likewise. I use the word persuaded +advisedly; for, like all the other Feejee chiefs, Tararo was a +despot and might have commanded obedience to his wishes; but he +entered so readily into the spirit of the new faith that he +perceived at once the impropriety of using constraint in the +propagation of it. He set the example, therefore; and that example +was followed by almost every man of the tribe. + +During the short time that we remained at the island, repairing our +vessel and getting her ready for sea, the natives had commenced +building a large and commodious church, under the superintendence +of the missionary, and several rows of new cottages were marked +out; so that the place bid fair to become, in a few months, as +prosperous and beautiful as the Christian village at the other end +of the island. + +After Avatea was married, she and her husband were sent away, +loaded with presents, chiefly of an edible nature. One of the +native teachers went with them, for the purpose of visiting still +more distant islands of the sea, and spreading, if possible, the +light of the glorious gospel there. + +As the missionary intended to remain for several weeks longer, in +order to encourage and confirm his new converts, Jack and Peterkin +and I held a consultation in the cabin of our schooner, - which we +found just as we had left her, for everything that had been taken +out of her was restored. We now resolved to delay our departure no +longer. The desire to see our beloved native land was strong upon +us, and we could not wait. + +Three natives volunteered to go with us to Tahiti, where we thought +it likely that we should be able to procure a sufficient crew of +sailors to man our vessel; so we accepted their offer gladly. + +It was a bright clear morning when we hoisted the snow-white sails +of the pirate schooner and left the shores of Mango. The +missionary, and thousands of the natives, came down to bid us God- +speed, and to see us sail away. As the vessel bent before a light +fair wind, we glided quickly over the lagoon under a cloud of +canvass. + +Just as we passed through the channel in the reef the natives gave +us a loud cheer; and as the missionary waved his hat, while he +stood on a coral rock with his gray hairs floating in the wind, we +heard the single word "Farewell" borne faintly over the sea. + +That night, as we sat on the taffrail, gazing out upon the wide sea +and up into the starry firmament, a thrill of joy, strangely mixed +with sadness, passed through our hearts, - for we were at length +"homeward bound," and were gradually leaving far behind us the +beautiful, bright, green, coral islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg eText The Coral Island + |